GEOPAKThe geometric 3D software for co-ordinate measurement machines User's Manual v 2.4 General Information 1 General Information GEOPAK registers and calculates the geometric data of your parts records program runs for the following measurements provides, among others, all data (nominal-actual comparison) for statistics (STATPAK) is the basic program for the 3D nominal-actual comparison of surfaces (3D-TOL). Copyright (c) 2004 Mitutoyo Neuss, September 2004 Mitutoyo Messgeraete GmbH Borsigstrasse 8 - 10 D - 41469 Neuss Phone ++49 - 21 37-102-0 Fax ++49 - 21 37-86 85 E-mail:
[email protected] International copyright laws protect the program itself as well as this online help. It is not allowed to copy or pass to third persons the total or part of it. The copyright is exclusively at Mitutoyo Messgeraete GmbH. I-2 v 2.4 14.09.04 General Information Overview The most important topics of the program GEOPAK I General Information and Contents II Learn Mode III Probe IV Workpiece Alignment V Elements: Basics VI Elements: Further Options VII Elements: Graphical Presentation VIII Variance Comparison IX Output of Data X Contours XI CMM Movement XII Appendix 14.09.04 v 2.4 I-3 Part Program Editor II Learn Mode Contents 1 Part Program Editor ........................................................ 5 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 2 Introduction Part Program Editor............................................... 5 Part program window .................................................................. 6 Rights to write.............................................................................. 6 Insert / Overwrite ......................................................................... 7 Copy / Insert ................................................................................. 7 Undo ............................................................................................. 7 Learn Mode: Basics ........................................................ 8 2.1 2.2 2.3 Learn Mode: Introduction ........................................................... 8 Starting Learn Mode .................................................................... 9 Start up Wizard .......................................................................... 10 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.4 Temperature Compensation ..................................................... 12 2.4.1 2.5 Temperature Compensation: Manual CMM ..................................... 13 Reference Position .................................................................... 16 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.6 Compensation and Rotary Table ..................................................... 16 Define Reference Position ............................................................... 16 Procedure........................................................................................ 16 Volume Compensation.............................................................. 17 2.6.1 2.6.2 3 Definition ......................................................................................... 10 Procedure........................................................................................ 10 Hints ................................................................................................ 11 Configuration ................................................................................... 11 Probe Offset to Z-spindle................................................................. 17 Automatic Control ............................................................................ 17 Learn Mode Main Window ............................................ 18 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 PartManager and GEOPAK ....................................................... 18 The layout of the main window ................................................ 18 Windows and Tools................................................................... 20 Window Positions...................................................................... 21 Exit Single Measurement .......................................................... 22 Relearn from Repeat Mode ....................................................... 22 Measurement Window / Measurement Time ........................... 23 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 14.09.04 Measurement Window..................................................................... 23 Measurement time........................................................................... 23 Input Characteristics ................................................................. 24 Reset System ............................................................................. 24 Printer Settings .......................................................................... 25 Reset Controller......................................................................... 25 Sound Output............................................................................. 25 v 2.4 II-1 Part Program Editor 3.13 Pallet Co-Ordinate System ....................................................... 26 3.13.1 Definitions ....................................................................................... 26 3.13.2 Connection to Manager Programs and Q-PAK ................................ 26 4 Programming Help Contents........................................ 28 4.1 4.2 5 Programming help: Functions ................................................. 28 Measurement Graphic / Measurement Sequence .................. 29 Variables and Calculations........................................... 30 5.1 Definition of Variables .............................................................. 31 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.2 5.3 5.4 Input of Variables ...................................................................... 33 Yes/No Variable ......................................................................... 34 Save / Load Variables ............................................................... 34 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 5.10 5.11 5.12 5.13 6 Decimal Places................................................................................ 31 Variables: Input of Formula ............................................................. 32 Include Element Characteristics ...................................................... 32 Save ................................................................................................ 34 Load ................................................................................................ 34 Definition ......................................................................................... 34 Calling Variable from File ................................................................ 35 Transfer Actual CMM Position to Variable .............................. 35 Actual Temperature in Variable ............................................... 36 Settings for Temperature Compensation................................ 37 Settings in the dialogue............................................................ 38 Definition of String Variables ................................................... 39 Input of String Variables........................................................... 39 Store/Load String Variables ..................................................... 40 Wait for file with string variable ............................................... 41 System Variable in the Formula Calculation........................... 41 Operators and Functions.............................................. 42 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 6.10 6.11 6.12 6.13 Arithmetic Operators ................................................................ 42 Relational operators ................................................................. 42 Logical Operators ..................................................................... 43 Constants................................................................................... 43 Trigonometrical Functions ....................................................... 44 Arithmetic Functions ................................................................ 44 Operator Precedence................................................................ 45 Basic Geometry Elements ........................................................ 45 Element components ................................................................ 46 GEOPAK Elements: Hole Shapes ............................................ 47 GEOPAK Probes........................................................................ 48 GEOPAK Rotary Table Data ..................................................... 49 Minimum Maximum ................................................................... 49 6.13.1 Minimum maximum calculation........................................................ 49 II-2 v 2.4 14.09.04 Part Program Editor 6.13.2 Minimum maximum features............................................................ 49 6.13.3 Minimum maximum components ..................................................... 50 6.13.4 Example for minimum maximum access:......................................... 50 6.14 Best Fit ....................................................................................... 51 6.14.1 Best Fit Components ....................................................................... 51 6.14.2 Example for best fit access:............................................................. 51 6.15 6.16 6.17 6.18 6.19 6.20 6.21 6.22 6.23 6.24 7 Other GEOPAK Variables.......................................................... 52 Date and Time ............................................................................ 52 Week-days .................................................................................. 52 Week numbers ........................................................................... 52 System Time............................................................................... 53 Examples.................................................................................... 53 Result of Nominal-to-Actual Comparisons.............................. 54 Last Nominal-to-Actual Comparison........................................ 55 Nominal-to-Actual Comparison of Last Element .................... 56 Result of All Nominal-to-Actual Comparisons ........................ 57 Scale Factor................................................................... 59 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 8 Scale all elements (including element point) .......................... 59 Scale only element point........................................................... 59 Set scaling centre into origin ................................................... 60 Use scale factor for 3D-TOL ..................................................... 60 Sequence Control.......................................................... 61 8.1 Loops.......................................................................................... 61 8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.2 8.3 Branches .................................................................................... 62 Subprograms ............................................................................. 62 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.10 8.11 8.12 8.13 8.14 14.09.04 Definition ......................................................................................... 61 Symbol or Special Character ........................................................... 61 Procedure........................................................................................ 61 Definition and Types........................................................................ 62 Create a Local Sub-Program ........................................................... 62 Using an already existing Sub-Program........................................... 63 Delete Last Step......................................................................... 63 Error While Executing Command............................................. 64 Comment Line............................................................................ 64 Programmable Stop................................................................... 65 Show Picture.............................................................................. 65 Clear Picture .............................................................................. 65 Play Sound ................................................................................. 65 Send E-Mail ................................................................................ 66 Send SMS ................................................................................... 66 Create Directory......................................................................... 67 Input Head Data ......................................................................... 67 v 2.4 II-3 Part Program Editor 8.15 8.16 8.17 8.18 8.19 8.20 8.21 8.22 II-4 Set Head Data Field................................................................... 69 Sublot Input ............................................................................... 70 Set Sublot .................................................................................. 71 Program Call.............................................................................. 72 IO Condition (IO Communication)............................................ 73 Possibilities of Text Input/Data Name ..................................... 74 Single Selection ........................................................................ 75 Group Selection ........................................................................ 76 v 2.4 14.09.04 you can call multiple part program windows from the parts list. change a previously learnt part program. Then you find a window (one for each part) in the centre of the screen (second window). then activate the editor by a mouse click on the symbol shown above or via the menu bar "CMM / Part program editor".4 II-5 . With the <CTRL> key. In the list of the following window. you click on the title of the window you want and then on "Activate". 14. It is possible to randomly move the part program windows as well as all the following dialog windows.1 Introduction Part Program Editor The part program editor allows you to view a part program. The main menu of the editor will be displayed. create new programs.Part Program Editor 1 Part Program Editor 1.04 v 2. The title line contains the name of the corresponding part program. Activate Window If you work with several part program windows. Select your part in the PartManager's part list. you can activate the single windows as you want (Menu Bar / Window / Window …).09. Part Program Editor 1.3 Rights to write If you want to change a part program or create a new one. The "Automatic Circle Measurement" dialog window is displayed. II-6 v 2. Depending on the mode you selected before – overwrite or insert – you overwrite the activated line or insert a new line. You can see by the pen symbol in the status bar.2 Part program window The part program window contains the following information (subdivided into five columns): Sequence number of the line (infinitely) Loop nesting Symbols of the function Text (name) of the function Parameter(s) of the function To call the dialog from the learn mode. Now you have three possibilities to continue your work: Double click into the program line Click the symbol of the machine tools (e. whether you are actually allowed to change the program or not. "Automatic Element Measurement Cylinder"). You get a dialog window to this tool (e.g.4 14. The administrator assigns these rights (cf.04 . You can also use the way via the menu bar "Measurement"/"Automatic Element"/"Circle" (our example) You can also click on a tool of your machine tools. This line is shown now as a dark field.g. you need the corresponding user right. activate the corresponding line via mouse click. "circle" if the element "circle" has been used in the single/learn mode for the measurement). lower left corner. which has not yet been measured. also User Rights). 1.09. 09. until the beginning of your editor session.Part Program Editor 1.4 Insert / Overwrite You have two possibilities to toggle between Insert/Overwrite. If the tool bar is not displayed. or even inserted into another part program. keep .04 v 2. You toggle with the insert key of your keyboard. 1. you can undo all changes you have made. The "Overwrite" gets a tic.4 II-7 . Thus the lines are put to the clipboard. use the icon of the editor tool bar. 14. if you want to mark several lines. 1.as usual . or … Choose the menu bar "Edit / Undo".the <CTRL> key pressed when selecting. You can change via the menu bar "Edit / Overwrite". You can see the mode in the status line on the right below.5 Copy / Insert You can also copy one or several command (program lines) by marking them with the mouse. You deactivate the lines with the mouse or the <Shift> key. Cancelling of any action can be achieved in two ways: Click on the backspace arrow of your editor tool bar. from there they can be inserted into the same program at a different place.6 Undo If you want to copy lines. or the tic is removed. ) the type of calculation. II-8 v 2. etc.g. give also a name and a number to each element. you may only concentrate on the measurement. To prepare the measurement program. tolerancing).) further measurement parameters (e. plane etc.g. you can obtain the geometrical data of your parts by a measurement procedure. if made from single points or not (Gauss. Then you get a window to define how your circle must be constructed: the type of construction (measurement.Learn Mode: Basics 2 2. click the circle in the icon bar on top. diameter. Example: You want to measure a diameter (cf. the limits defined by a table value of H8). etc. GEOPAK offers elements (circle. straightness. you want to compare certain features of your parts against their nominal values shown on the drawing (e. After confirmation.04 . graphic. the number of points. and parallelism).09.) that can be used to get these features. automatic measurement. for measured element. In the main window of "Single / Learn". you are automatically guided until all conditions for a smooth program run are fulfilled: Check of the connected devices Definition of the probe data Alignment of the part Usually. intersection. drawing below) and to check whether its size is within the specified limits (here: 30mm diameter.4 14. minimum circumscribed.1 Learn Mode: Basics Learn Mode: Introduction Using GEOPAK. g. This measurement sequence is automatically stored.Learn Mode: Basics In the next step.g. e. The editor changes the part program but has no influence on the data! You can overwrite the existing part program if you do not use it any longer You can create a New Part Program if you want.if you have activated tolerances via the symbol. 2. i. You can continue at the position. Furthermore.04 Enter your new part program into the text field and confirm (OK).09. Now you have the following possibilities: Relearn: You can extend the existing program.4 II-9 . stopped the day before. it happens that the stored data do not correspond any more with the program run.e. . you can select from a part program table.g. The data registered and stored in the learn mode is the prerequisite for any subsequent or later repeat mode.2 Starting Learn Mode You have called learn mode of a part for which at least one part program already exists.: +-0. When starting the repeat mode. GEOPAK restores the data that resulted during the last program run. there do exist measuring data of the last program run. you can input: • the tolerance values. e. • • 14. determine a position program for a part and a separate CNC-operational sequence.g. you e. If you select this possibility. You do not have to execute the measurement again.100 or • e. v 2. If you have changed the program in the meantime with the editor. which part programs you want to execute. continue it. with H8 the tolerance field according to DIN/ISO. 04 .3 2. also your settings in the PartManager (Settings / Defaults for Programs / GEOPAK / Menus) are decisive for with how many windows you have to work with when using the Start up Wizard (see ill.3. then on "Print format specification " and finally on the selection of the protocol. below). If you have not requested the optional protocol. II-10 v 2. 2. you need to go through one window more. Click on "Next" to get to the co-ordinate system. If you.Learn Mode: Basics 2. the Start up Wizard will not offer a respective option. Otherwise. decide in favour of the "Pattern alignment" in the subsequent window (ill.1 Start up Wizard Definition To control the program start for the learning mode. As you can see. This Start up Wizard is designed to give you the possibility to learn the part program start in a standardised form. i.e.3. In the first window of the Start up Wizard you already define the probe to be used.2 Procedure Start the part program like usual in the PartManager. the dialogue "Start up Wizard" opens. you have to work with five windows according to the default values. six windows. you can use the "Start up Wizard". then click on "CNC-Parameter and CNC on". In this example. The Mitutoyo defaults are described under the topic "Procedure" below.09. below). which is also indicated by the contents of the bracket in the title: (2/6). It is basically possible to configure the Start up Wizard regarding its settings yourself. however. Following the two windows you know "Which probe tree is active?" and "Temperature coefficient". you are in the first of five windows.4 14. However.Learn Mode: Basics 2. click on "Standard settings". The individual topics as well as the clearance height or subprogram are described in the GEOPAK-Help in detail.09. 14. Only when you have activated the option "Start up Wizard". Further options The options "Initialisation dialogues" and "No Start up Wizard and no initialisation dialogues" are self-explanatory. Another symbol You use this symbol to decide that you want the part program automatically learnt as per your configuration definitions. the comment lines (up to 32. Dialogues". By clicking once onto the buttons "Next"..3. If you.. for example. you can subsequently work in nine to twelve windows. go to GEOPAK and click on the menu "Settings" and the function "Start up Wizard: Configuration".you have the choice between these options: Start up Wizard Initialisation dialogues and No "Start up Wizard" or "Init.4 II-11 . In the following dialogue. . CAT300-Settings If you work with the program CAT300/3D-TOL. the following symbols are particularly important: You use this symbol to decide that you do not want your inputs to be learned.. You click on this symbol when you wish to make an input and you want this input to be learned. That means that the system learns without queries.4 Configuration If you want to change the configuration. you have the choice between the "Standard settings" and the "CAT300 settings". "Back" or "Done" you proceed as usual.000 characters are possible). the temperature coefficient etc. 2. The procedure is identical to the procedure for the "Standard settings".04 v 2.3..3 Hints The symbols in the windows of the Start up Wizard are each complemented by a balloon. It starts with entering the decimals. click on this button. 4 Temperature Compensation This topic concerns the co-ordinate measuring instruments by means of which you can realise a temperature compensation. you can input the temperature coefficient via the menu Settings/Temperature Coefficient. Procedure In learn mode. Depending on material. Each measured point is divided by the following factor:1.000.0 + temperature coefficient * (current temperature . The reference temperature is 20° C (68° F). when proceeding this way.09. In repeat mode. The software analyses the arithmetic mean value of the connected temperature sensors at the part. you must input as temperature coefficient 0.Learn Mode: Basics 2. It has the unit K-1.20°C) If you do not want a temperature compensation. but if the CMM compensation is activated.000 is not allowed. The machine control reads the values of the temperature sensors in minute steps again.4 14. a more important failure would occur as if you would not at all have activated the temperature compensation. The compensation of the part is executed by GEOPAK. Nevertheless. The fact that the co-ordinate measuring instrument supports the temperature compensation is displayed through a thermometer in the "Machine Position" window. Activate the temperature compensation on the motherboard of the CMM. What you should know The program control automatically executes the compensation of the machine. it is necessary to enable it via an input in the INI file. See also detailed in the topic "Reference Position ". take the expansion coefficient from the tables for expansion coefficients of longitudinal. Therefore. You must input the temperature coefficient.04 . if you want this. the input 0. you can input the temperature coefficients into the start dialog. II-12 v 2. The input value is multiplied by 10*E-6. beginning from Version 2.Learn Mode: Basics 2. 14.09.04 v 2. When you have installed MCOSMOS and wish to install the drivers.4. as well. in the following dialogue window you get to the option "Temperature Sensor. Manual CMM" (see dialogue window below). the present option will be offered for manual CMMs. Clicking this option you get to the dialogue window "Temperature Sensor Settings" (see picture below).2.1 Temperature Compensation: Manual CMM Except for CNC-operated machines which have the temperature compensation feature integrated also with regard to the hardware components.4 II-13 . For your MCOSMOS installation you can get a "Thermal Compensation System" (Hardware Box) with up to eight sensors supplied from Mitutoyo. II-14 v 2.4 14.04 . With your order you already decide whether you want to use "Workpiece" and/or "Scale" sensors.Learn Mode: Basics You are offered up to eight temperature probes (sensors). This is possible for CMMs beginning from EURO-M version.09. Also in the picture below. Three sensors are integrated within the axes. For detailed information on this subject. only five sensors.Learn Mode: Basics In the dialogue you then have to relate the sensor type to the sensor numbers (18). the buttons 6-8 are deactivated. you see. Then you select the serial communication port (Comport) to which you have connected the device (COM1 through COMn). As a rule. The sensors are assigned their individual tasks by mouse-click into the check buttons.g. The sensors to be set are shown in the dialogue as activated.04 v 2. 14. This also causes the program to be left. Theoretically. Procedure At the beginning of the driver installation you insert the disk supplied with the sensor calibration data into drive A: and select the file with the ending ".4 II-15 .dat". on the left. see Temperature Compensation . the situation will be similar to what is shown in the example dialogue above. a sensor on the green workpiece. Should you have ordered e. You click on the "Store" button to inform the MCOSMOS program of the settings. every combination is possible.09. Since the measurements are carried out at the same machine position.5. TempCompRefY.1 Compensation and Rotary Table When using a rotary table. calculation is realised with the factor described above followed by translation of the co-ordinates to the part system. you take this one as the reference point. 2. This could cause that the compensation would not be uniformly realised to the whole part and thus would be wrong. If no case applies. e. TempCompRefZ 2.3 Procedure The temperature compensation will then be realised in the following steps: If a rotary table is defined respectively calibrated. Then. The part co-ordinates are not suited for a compensation because they can change in the course of a part program. II-16 v 2. through relocation of the origin.09.4 14. also the machine co-ordinates are not sufficient to realise the temperature compensation. If a reference point is given.04 . indeed no compensation will be realised. Then. you take the rotary swivel point as the reference point. take (0/0/0) as reference point. in the variables TempCompRefX.Learn Mode: Basics 2. the part is rotated by 180° and you measure the other side. compensation is realised in the machine co-ordinates but it is also possible to enter a reference point for the compensation. You can do that via the GEOWIN. The reference point will be subtracted from the co-ordinates proceeding from the machine. Example: A rectangular part is placed on the rotary table and measurement is done from one side. 2.5. the calibrated rotary table position is automatically taken as reference point for the compensation. If you work with a rotary table.2 Define Reference Position For this reason.g. But it is also possible to define a reference position.5.INI file: Section [TempCompRefPos].5 Reference Position The compensation of the part temperature is carried out in machine co-ordinates. 1. a fixed reference is necessary.6.6 Volume Compensation The volume compensation is realised for some of the CMM. Method with table distance To determine "Distance machine table / Z-spindle". Normally. a window to input the necessary parameters for the volume compensation appears. Attention If you change the probe configuration. In order to execute compensation at the actual measurement place.2 Automatic Control Generally. 2. An automatic control of every change is programmed. after program installation. you must at least calibrate probe no. The Z offset is always a negative value because the Z-axis of the machine co-ordinate system shows into the opposite direction. this dialogue will appear with each new software initialisation of the machine.4 II-17 . 14. At the first program start. you can choose between two methods. therefore Mitutoyo has determined and stored the compensation values of the Z-spindle.04 v 2. As reference point.09. For calculation.1 Probe Offset to Z-spindle When producing our CMM. you have to remove your probe system to determine this distance. 1 and press the button "Last measured masterball position". For details. If you do not input the correct values (Z offset to Z-spindle will always be negative). it is possible to change the probe system. You must enter these values. Method with position of the masterball You only have to input the Z value. The X and Y values are only for information. 2. only calibrate probe no. You must enter these values correctly.6.Learn Mode: Basics 2. you must move the Zspindle to Z = 0. 1 in order that the program automatically recalculates the Z offset. refer to Probe Calibration. To determine this value. Mitutoyo does not know the probe systems used from customers during the measurement. The distance machine table / masterball is defined from the table to the centre of the masterball. The Z offset to the Z-spindle is calculated through calibration of probe no. the program must know the offset from Z-spindle to stylus tip. otherwise the measurement will not have the specified accuracy. In the header of your screen. you see the title strip. you find the menu bar with the different menus from "Element" to "Help". The way you select is just a matter of personal preference. a series of symbols (icons) along the screen margins. this is used to delete the previous command. If you click this menu. some more items must be taken into consideration. When using an automatic probe tree changer system. and the symbols v 2.. Below the menu bar. you find details under "Probe Selection ". and icons with functions.1 Learn Mode Main Window PartManager and GEOPAK You want to realise a measurement and have created a new part in the PartManager (see Create New Part). The leftmost position of the menu bar is the "Preferences" menu. either by the icon or by the pull-down menus. The right part contains (starting from right) the "trash". Then you see. next to the "Quit" symbol a horizontal toolbar with icons: • • II-18 The left part contains the elements from "Point" to "Angle". Activate the part and come to the main window of the GEOPAK learn mode. 3. Cf.. Mitutoyo offers a series of menus. an activated dialog window to the probe selection. you find. If you activate one of these. or how the printer layout is made and other settings. These icons make possible a quick and easy access to the corresponding functions. details of these items under Change Probe Configuration .09. either via the pull-down menu or by a click on the symbol.Learn Mode Main Window 3 3.04 . which make working as simple as possible.2 The layout of the main window You activate the measurement process from the main window. pull-down menus appear. Most of the functions can be activated both ways. several general settings can be made for the program. whether an audio signal is made during measurement. pull-down menus. Our example: shows the title strip "GEOPAK CMM Learn Mode" with the version number and the name of the part which you have enabled via the parts list. Here you can choose if the program runs in metric or inch mode. These elements are also listed in the pull-down menu "Elements".4 14. Below the title strip. information about the actually connected devices.Learn Mode Main Window for the modification of the part co-ordinate system. among other things.4 II-19 . On the right margin. The status bar at the bottom of the main window gives information about the status of the program. you find a toolbar with. 14. mouse click.09. see symbol above. Activate the "Programming Tools" bar via the pull-down menu "Window".04 v 2. Through these tools. you decide about measurement and driving strategy. you find. In the lower part of the screen. you find e. the different tolerances Here. right side). you define the start of a loop (loop start.g. and the unit of measurement (mm or inches). you can have a "Circularity Diagram". you find the tools for the machine movement beginning with the symbol for the probe change. On the left margin. Via e.g. Here. among other things. the symbol for the calculator (define and calculate variables) as well as the toolbar with the programming tools. 3 Windows and Tools In the "Window" pull-down menu. you will find all information about your last operations. change of probe. In particular for the tools. Normally. the position of machine is represented in co-ordinates. of course this will be considered in the representation of the position of machine. Each action you have effected for the purpose of your task is represented in this field for results. Via the symbols (in the picture above in the upper line). also the connection and intersection elements. Position of Machine On principle. you can find a number of options that can be activated/deactivated. you have a shorter way to access these functions. you can select a view in the different planes.g.4 14.Learn Mode Main Window 3. etc.). If you decided in the (menu bar "File / Settings / Input Characteristics") dialogue for another as the Cartesian co-ordinate system. you can see the machine co-ordinate system (grey) and the co-ordinate system of the part (yellow). List of Elements In the list of elements. Field for results In the field for results. this means from the change of probe to the evaluation. If you have a CMM with temperature compensation. also a thermometer with the actual temperature will be shown. by clicking with the mouse. If you dispose of the functions with a rotary table. also the rotary table position will be indicated. II-20 v 2.09.04 . The remaining running time can also be indicated in the repeat mode. that means the measured elements e. you can see all geometric elements you have generated.g. Display Axes When you display the axes. you will find here more information as necessary to print out later (e. This function can be reached via the menu bar "Window". By the "Split Screen" function. call the dialogues of the variables or also determine the loop start or the loop end.04 v 2. Tools for Machine You will find these tools in your GEOPAK main window. via this function you return into a home position.09. all windows are displayed in the "Split Screen" mode. Only if you activate in the pull-down menu the "Split Screen" function. vertically on the right screen side -. continue your work. Each of the buttons corresponds to a menu item from the menu bar ("MMC" or "Probe"). namely the normal mode and the "Split Screen" mode. 14. Load You will choose the "Load Window Position" function if for example someone different worked on your computer. with which you can. you can e. windows of GEOPAK and 3D-TOL or GEOPAK and CAT300 at the same time is possible.g. a displaying on your screen of e. Hint: In the default. The store.in the main window. the windows are displayed in normal mode. in each case.g. Saving You can store the window positions that you have selected at last according to your ideas.Learn Mode Main Window Element Graphics For this subject.4 II-21 . Default Under "Default Window Positions". 3. load and default functions are valid for the normal mode as well as for the "Split Screen" mode. Program Tools By clicking on the program tools . Wherever your window positions may be. you will find a configuration that Mitutoyo considered to be useful. This function can be reached via the "Menu Bar / Window". but you want to have your characteristic window constellation again. "Split Screen" mode.4 Window Positions You can select between two modes of window style. vertically on the left side. You will get this position again at each restart. see details of Information of Element . Tools for Evaluation See details of Tolerances: Principles . is not possible unless there is relearn data existing for the current part program.2.09. Delete part program Only the additionally learned part program commands are deleted. The repeat mode is closed. II-22 v 2. however. the relearn function can be started immediately from the repeat mode (Menu bar / Repeat Mode / Start Relearn). You can start this function also via this symbol.6 Relearn from Repeat Mode Beginning from Version 2. Since there is considerable data.Learn Mode Main Window 3.4 14. These data include all information you have recorded in the learn mode. 3. In this case you have the following possibilities: Store part program The additionally learned commands are stored with the part program and are available for the next execution of a part program.04 .5 Exit Single Measurement This dialogue is shown when you have added commands in the part program. The GEOPAK-Editor is called up using the part program processed last. you should deactivate them by click on the option button. Already existing part program commands are not deleted. your fixed disk would be unnecessarily loaded. The "Start Relearn" function. Relearn is automatically started without any dialogue at the beginning of the learn mode. Store Data for Relearn If you don't use the recorded data for relearn. 1 Measurement Window / Measurement Time Measurement Window You can close the meas. the remaining measurement time of the part program is indicated. click via the menu bar "Settings / Defaults for Programs / CMM / GEOPAK" and come to the "Settings GEOPAK" window. you can have displayed the remaining measurement time.7 3. only an approximate remaining measurement time can be indicated.Learn Mode Main Window 3.4 II-23 .2 Measurement time In the repeat mode. how many time the measurement course has lasted till now. 3. This remaining measurement time is updated with each run.04 v 2. Since part programs can also contain commands as well as branches. Then. In the first program run is indicated. In this window. This action corresponds to the repeated clicking on the dustbin symbol. 14. In the PartManager. You must close the following safety question at exit.7. the complete measurement process is deleted.7. text on screen etc. click on "Display Remaining Measurement Time". After the first program run. click on the "Other" button and in the following window. point display according to Windows conventions via the x-symbol.09. direction vectors etc. To open the Reset system window choose "Settings / System / Reset system" from the menu bar. Normally. 3.4 14. If you have selected the input of cosines. The changes made in the program lines are stored. To open the Input characteristics dialogue box choose Settings / Input characteristics from the menu bar. direction vectors are standardised (length=1). "CMM procedure". "Theoretical element circle" etc.g. It will do if the components accord in their proportion. For example (1/1/0) for a probing below 45 degrees in the X/Y plane. are entered in the dialogue boxes are described in the result field. By means of these default settings you determine how e. Their components are also called cosine because they include the cosine of the angle.09. These changes are important for the repeat mode.). it is not necessary to care that the vectors have the length=1.8 Input Characteristics In the Input characteristics dialogue box we distinguish between settings which will not be modified during the whole program (millimetres/inch) and settings. which the vector has with the corresponding principal axis. The type of coordinate system can even be changed in several follow-up dialogue boxes (e.Learn Mode Main Window 3. which are valid for one program line only (see GEOPAK editor). II-24 v 2.9 Reset System To reset means to delete all actions made so far in the program run.04 . The default settings made at this time determine which suggestions are made in the dialogue boxes.g. These settings can be changed at any time. angles. To use the function choose "Settings / System / Reset Controller" from the menu bar. e. 3. 14. Another reason to choose different printers may be the printer resolution or you simply wish to print graphic and text on different printers.g.4 II-25 .12 Sound Output To open the Sound output dialogue box choose Settings / System / Sound from the menu bar.10 Printer Settings It is possible to output graphic and text on different printers. 3.11 Reset Controller Do not use this function unless problems with the machine control occur.04 v 2. if they do not fit in one document for layout reasons.Learn Mode Main Window 3. Check the "Sound on" check box first and then check the following check boxes: Element begin Count points Element finished.09. To open the Print dialogue box choose "Settings / System / Printer Settings / Graphic or Text" from the menu bar. 3. This manager program includes information about which part program must be executed at which pallet position and .2 Connection to Manager Programs and Q-PAK As for each single part exists a part program.1 Definitions The table co-ordinate system (table position) determines in which position the pallet is situated on the CMM table. The pallet co-ordinate systems are separately stored for each type of pallet.04 . As different types of pallets are possible. You may assign the same pallet co-ordinate system numbers for different types of pallets. which is calling the single part programs. The pallet co-ordinate system determines. gets the information from Q-PAK. at which position the part is placed on the pallet.13 Pallet Co-Ordinate System With the pallet co-ordinate system you can measure different parts on one or several pallets at different positions on the machine table automatically or in CNC mode (see picture below). you must assign numbers to the pallets.13. on which table position the pallet is situated... Procedure II-26 v 2. Condition First of all.4 14.09. the same way exists for each pallet a manager program.Learn Mode Main Window 3.13. you must have stored as table co-ordinate system the positions at which the pallets must be situated (refer to "Store/Load Co-Ordinate System"). 3. you have all information for using the pallet co-ordinate system in the manager program. Below.09. Store this co-ordinate system as a pallet co-ordinate system (menu bar "Co-Ordinate System / Store Pallet Co-Ordinate System"). you enter for which type of pallet this co-ordinate system is valid. at the top. Window "Store Co-Ordinate System" In this window.4 II-27 . This number is used for the pallet co-ordinate system in the manager program.04 v 2. you enter at which table position the pallet was situated when defining the co-ordinate system. you define a co-ordinate system. The "Load Pallet Co-Ordinate System" command is exclusively used for tests. you enter the pallet co-ordinate system no.Learn Mode Main Window For each position on the pallet. In the middle field. 14. So. you do not have to activate the function explicitly. immediately after you confirm the element.04 . This only makes sense if you know in advance how many points you need. you should deactivate this function. Automatic element finished: As soon as the required number of measurement points has been taken. the element memory number can be automatically incremented for each execution by pressing this button. • the element is calculated and stored. • the element is considered to be ready and no more data points are expected. just click on this icon (for example Circle). Acoustic action: If you want. No projection: If you do not want the element to be automatically projected into the plane it is nearest to.1 Programming Help Contents Programming help: Functions There are some functions designed to make easier for you generating an effective part program. Loop counter: Within a loop.4 14. this is especially useful for manual machines. The button remains pressed if you activate the element again. a voice can tell you what to do next.09. In this case.Programming Help Contents 4 4. Thus. Measurement Graphic: After you have activated the function. the element you measure is continuously presented in the window "Measurement display". If you want to store the element into the same memory number. In this case. Tolerate: this button activates the tolerance-input window immediately after you have confirmed the element window. it is not necessary to activate this function explicitly. you should press this button. you should use the icon "Automatic element finished" to tell GEOPAK that the measurement has been finished. Then the automatic element measurement window appears. or during manual alignment. do not use this button. II-28 v 2. Automatic Measurement: If you need the automatic element measurement. If you want to keep measuring until you have reached the limits of your element. 2 Measurement Graphic / Measurement Sequence You have four options for activating the measurement graphic: Click on both symbols: The element and the number of the measured and of the expected measurement points are displayed (see ill.Programming Help Contents 4. 14.04 v 2.09. Click on none of the symbols: The number of the measured measurement points is displayed. Click only on the symbol "Aut.). element finished": The number of the measured and of the expected measurement points are displayed.4 II-29 . Click on the graphics symbol only: The element and the number of the measured measurement points are displayed. Variables can also be read in a file or output into a file. You can use the variables wherever GEOPAK expects a numerical value. Activate the "Define Variable and Calculate" dialogue window via the symbol of the toolbar on the right of screen margin..Variables and Calculations 5 Variables and Calculations In addition to the possibilities GEOPAK offers in connection with the geometrical calculations. GEOPAK accepts this variable as input value. which are not programmed in GEOPAK. only one part program for different diameters is sufficient if the diameter is defined as variable. which you have defined before. you can exchange data with other programs II-30 v 2. By mouse-click.04 .. Click on "Your" Variable. open the list box beside "Names of Variable". This way. the calculation of a the area of circle out of the diameter. GEOPAK makes your work easier offering a list of the variables. and .g. you can define – according to requirements . e. This means that you only have to write a single part program for similar parts that only differ in some measurements For example.09.your own variables and perform calculations.4 14. You can use variables (without other calculations) to edit flexible part programs. Variables generally have three major advantages: You can perform calculations. when calculating sealing rings having different diameters: here. Input the name you want for your variable (maximum 18 characters) into the line with names of variables. You should know When calculating with decimal fractions.Variables and Calculations 5. If you perform a query of a calculated value for equation with a number.09. • tolerance and the • comparison queries only the number of decimal places you have defined is taken into account. You should try to find a method which makes sense (also see topic Save/Load Variable) 5. define in the dialogue window "Define Variable and Calculate" how many decimal places you need for this variable.4 II-31 . You can find details in the topic Table of Operators and Functions . The calculation will be done with the best possible accuracy. 14.1 Definition of Variables In addition to the possibilities GEOPAK offers for the geometrical calculations. wants figures with such a small difference to be treated as "Equal". This truncation error makes it nearly impossible that a real number "exactly" accepts a value desired. they differentiate around 10*E18.04 v 2. but for the • protocol. there is always a small truncation error. An expressive term makes easier finding the correct variable again and increases the readability of your part program. you can define – according to your requirements . this difference is not important for a normal application. the computer will always inform you that the values are different because normally. The operator however. Call the function "Formula Calculation" via the symbol or the menu "Calculate" and come to the "Define and Calculate Variables" dialogue window.your own variables and perform calculations.1. However.1 Decimal Places As the next step. You can use the variables wherever GEOPAK expects a numerical value. to make an example. Upper and lower case letters are of no importance. first click on the list box "Elements" (at bottom left) with the elements already defined Then. you can input just a number or a complete formula.g.4 14. you find the symbol. Hint In this dialogue window (top on the right).1. If a calculation cannot be performed. II-32 v 2. the result is shown as "-".3 Include Element Characteristics If you want to include the characteristic of a measured element into the calculation (e. the result is immediately displayed.04 . this element characteristic is accepted in the input field for the formula. GEOPAK immediately displays the result on the right (besides the text field) of the formula.2 Variables: Input of Formula In the next description field.Variables and Calculations 5. click on the text field "Feature". When clicking on the symbol. In each case. If the calculation is making sense. the diameter of a measured circle). You can undo as many steps as you want. Here.09. See which operandi and operators are allowed in a formula in detail under the topic Table of Operators and Functions. 5. select the characteristic of the element.1. 14.09. You will find more detailed information in the file "Specifications for Layout Dialogue Boxes" (dia_lay_e. • As it is possible to create several dialogues in one file enter the name of the dialogue in the "Name of dialogue" text box. v 2.04 • In the Filename text box type the file name or.. In the "Input variable" dialogue box. From dialogue file: Click on this icon if you wish to enter several variables in a dialogue box.2 Input of Variables This function allows you to enter variables in the running part program by means of a dialogue box.4 II-33 . proceed as follows: Simple input: Click on this icon if you wish to enter one variable only.Variables and Calculations 5. Make sure to use a significant name of variable.. • In the Text for dialogue text box enter the dialogue text.. • . Suggestion. To open the "Input variable" dialogue box click on this icon or choose "Calculate / Input variable" from the menu bar.udl files that you have created before. Upper limit and Decimals text boxes. click on this icon to choose from the displayed .. Lower limit. The dialogue text describes the information to be entered in a part program dialogue. • Make your entries in the Name of variable.pdf) on the MCOSMOS CD-ROM. 5.04 . E.3 Yes/No Variable This function is the simple version of the "Input variable" dialogue box.4.09. If you have named these variables XCoor. In the following window. for example the name of only one variable. all variables beginning with “var” are loaded. In this case.g. you would have to write three loading instructions.4. if you choose "No" it is the value 0. CoorY and CoorZ.g. If you want to load only a single variable activate the symbol. YCoor and ZCoor. Only the one you have selected is loaded (e. If you choose "Yes" the value 1 will be written in the variable. 5.Variables and Calculations 5.2 Load You can reload all variables as you have saved them before. II-34 v 2. choose "Calculate / Yes/No variable" from the menu bar. var*). With this variable you can control printing by means of the branch functionality. Only enter the name of the file.4. you enter the file for the variables. Here an example: In a sub-program you want to load the jumping-off point via X. Or you enter a wildcard (e. Make your entries in the Text for dialogue and Name of variable text boxes.1 Save / Load Variables Save If you need the contents of the variables beyond the actual program run you should use the function "Save Variable" (menu bar "Calculation / Save Variables"). To choose Yes or No click on the corresponding icon or use the "Enter" or "ESC" key. Y and Z out of a file without overwriting other variables when loading. Enter. if you wish to determine before a measurement that the measuring results are to be printed.3 Definition Before defining variables you should take care of giving names that make sense. 5. But if you have designated them CoorX. you can load them with one instruction.g.4 14. so all defined variables at this moment are stored. var1). namely Coor*.4 5. you can read in this position either in the actual part coordinate system (de-activated symbol) or in the machine co-ordinate system (symbol activated).04 v 2. Click this symbol to make sure that the next program run really waits for this current information. Then during the execution of the part program the run of the part program is stopped and you can select a variables file in the file selection dialogue "Load Variables from File". The file is then deleted after reading. or a new one. If you use a new name. you can use either a name already existing.4. a new variable will be created. if you want to select a variables file only while the program run takes place. Furthermore.4 Calling Variable from File You can wait for a variable file of another program. Hint When entering the name of the variable.4 II-35 . Click this symbol. In the following dialog window input the names of the variables into the text boxes. Be careful when entering the name.5 Transfer Actual CMM Position to Variable Click on the symbol or use the menu bar with the functions“ Calculate / Actual Position in Variable".09.Variables and Calculations 5. Any typing mistake you make causes a new (wrong) variable to be created under this name and possibly you then use this variable. 5. 14. In this case one button is active for each connected sensor. The calculation temperature is recorded at every part program start. document temperature variations in the part program. II-36 v 2. if necessary. on one of the buttons in the lower section of this dialogue. at your option.04 . you will have to click.8 temperature sensors to the control system. If you want to know the CMM's current temperature values at the three axes.Variables and Calculations 5.4 14.6 Actual Temperature in Variable To record the workpiece temperature it is possible to connect 1 . The average value from all available sensors is shown in the "Machine Position" window. In order for you to record and. This allows the part program to check that the calculated temperature is still valid. For information on this subject refer to Temperature Compensation and. these variations can be loaded into variables (refer also to the subject Formula Input). if a manual CMM is of interest to you. You can also make your decision for the average temperature of selected sensors. to the subject Temperature Compensation: Manual CMM. The CMM will use these temperatures automatically to compensate for its own temperature dependence.09. GEOPAK assumes that temperature remains unchanged while the program is running. Make the following entries in the "Current Temperature into Variable" dialogue from the "Calculations" menu: Name the variable and make your choice which temperature you want to take. . the reference point is always the point whose position remains absolutely the same despite material expansion or shrinkage. 14.7 Settings for Temperature Compensation Introduction In cases where you wish to compensate for workpiece expansion or shrinkage. As a general rule. Our picture below is an example showing a workpiece held by a fixed stop (hatched). The reference point is marked with X. you have to pay special attention to a reference point. The workpiece can also be bolted (see picture below).4 II-37 .09.Variables and Calculations 5. Make sure that the reference point of a rotary table that is required to be turned coincides with the centre of the table. Expansions are possible only in the direction of the arrow.04 v 2. proceed as follows: Enter the workpiece co-ordinates. After the expansion the measuring height lies with -5. If your decision is positive. go to the "Calculate" menu and the "Settings for Temperature Compensation" functions. In this example a circle is measured in XY . Before the expansion the measuring height is about -4. Where a rotary table is available. The dialogue is divided into for sections. you can also choose the rotary table position.g.4 14. Apply temperature compensation to movements If you should approach the same co-ordinates in spite of an expansion of the workpiece.000 In order to be able to activate this option.Variables and Calculations 5.. Temperature coefficient You make your decision for or against a change.plane. Reference point for compensation To change the reference point.. enter the coefficient or choose the workpiece material. you will get to results which possibly do not agree with the measurement job order (see picture below). Reediting is possible.04 .999. or .8 Settings in the dialogue To access the dialogue. Take the current CMM position by clicking on the symbol. you must have indicated the reference point. e. Calculation temperature You choose the average temperature of either all available sensors or selected sensors (for details refer to the subject Current Temperature into Variable).09.. select the option "Apply Temperature Compensation to Movements". II-38 v 2. To compensate for this fault. Input length and Suggestion text boxes.10 Input of String Variables This function allows you to enter string variables in the running part program by means of a dialogue box.. The file you find in the MCOSMOS directory "Documentation \ files \ geopak". you can make use of this function if you wish to determine a file name.pdf". In the "Input string variable" dialogue box. please refer to your MCOSMOS CD-ROM under "Documents".g. .). Make your entries in the Name of string variable. proceed as follows: Simple input: Click on this icon if you wish to enter one variable only.4 II-39 .. e.Variables and Calculations 5. In the Name of string variable text box enter a name to define the variable (18 characters max.pdf". From dialogue file: Click on this icon if you wish to enter several string variables in a dialogue box. In the Filename text box type the file name or... 14.udl files that you have to create before.04 v 2. To open the "Define string variable" dialogue box click on this icon or choose "Calculate / Define string variable" from the menu bar. file "dia_lay_e. You will find further information in the file "UM_string_code_e. In the Text for dialogue text box enter the dialogue text. A significant name makes it easy to find the correct string variable and improves the legibility of your part program (see also chapter Store variables to file/Load variables from file. Make sure to use a significant name of string variable. 5.9 Definition of String Variables This function allows you to change character strings or to "remember them for reuse". To open the "Input string variable" dialogue box click on this icon or choose "Calculate / Input string variable" from the menu bar. For further information concerning the Specifications for Layout Dialogoe Boxes. The dialogue text describes the information to be entered in a part program dialogue. As it is possible to create several dialogues in one file enter the name of the dialogue in the "Name of dialogue" text box.09. folder "GEOPAK". click on this icon to choose from the displayed . 4 14. "STR" will be used as default string variable. The second part is an incremental counter (upwards) starting with zero. The file to be read does not contain the name of the string variable. If you do not preset a filter. Note that two different formats can be read: Format with names of string variables Format without names of string variables The function of the Use load filter icon depends on the used format. Only the string variables.09. To open the "Store string variables" dialogue box choose "Calculate / Store string variables" from the menu bar and enter the file for the string variables. which correspond to the filter. Example for Use load filter with names of string variables A file of string variables with the following contents exists: Text1=First Text Text2=Second Text Info1=First Information Info2=Second Information The "Text*" filter will be set. Load string variable To open the stored string variables simply enter the name of the file.11 Store/Load String Variables Store string variables You make use of this function if you need the contents of string variables for further purposes. are read.04 . In this case the filter represents the first part of the name to be defined for the string variable. The following string variables are read: Text1=First Text Text2=Second Text Example for Use load filter without names of string variables A file of string variables with the following contents exists: First Text Second Text Third Text Fourth Text II-40 v 2.Variables and Calculations 5. All string variables defined at this time will be stored. The file to be read already contains the name of the string variable. Then during the execution of the part program the run of the part program is stopped and you can select a variables file in the file selection dialogue "Load Variables from File". you search for a corresponding component. In the text box "System Parameters" of the dialog you determine the list selection for.Variables and Calculations The "Text*" filter will be set. if you want to select a variables file only while the program run takes place. Click this symbol. • • • • Results of Min/Max Calculation Results for Best Fit Probe Data CNC Parameters In the list box on the bottom right. The following string variables are read: Text0= First Text Text1= Second Text Text2= Third Text Text3= Fourth Text 5.4 II-41 . For acceptance. The component you selected appears on top of the text box.12 Wait for file with string variable Click on the Wait for file icon to wait for a file of string variables of another program. click on the symbol. That is especially then helpful if you deleted mistakenly formula entries. 5.09...04 v 2. Click this symbol to make sure that the next program run really waits for this current information.13 System Variable in the Formula Calculation You come to the dialog "Define Variable and Calculate" via the symbol or the menu bar "Calculate / Formula Calculation". Details about parameters can be taken from the topic "Table of Operators and Functions" 14. The file is then deleted after reading. Over the symbol "Undo" you can make each action again annulled. 1 Operators and Functions Arithmetic Operators Operator Description + Addition - Subtraction * Multiplication / Division ^ Exponential 6.Operators and Functions 6 6.04 .09.2 Relational operators Operator Description < Less than <= Less than or equal to > Greater than >= Greater than or equal to = Equal to <> Not equal to Result of logical operations (comparison) Operator Relation between operand 1 and operand 2 Result < operand 1 is less than operand 2 1 operand 1 is greater than or equal to operand 2 0 operand 1 is less than or equal to operand 2 1 operand 1 is greater than operand 2 0 <= = >= II-42 operand 1 is equal to operand 2 1 operand 1 is not equal to operand 2 0 operand 1 is greater than or equal to operand 2 1 operand 1 is less than operand 2 0 v 2.4 14. 4 Constants Spelling Description PI Pi (3.Operators and Functions > <> operand 1 is greater than operand 2 1 operand 1 is less than or equal to operand 2 0 operand 1 is not equal to operand 2 1 operand 1 is equal to operand 2 0 6.4 II-43 ..3 Logical Operators Operator Description AND Logical AND OR Logical OR NOT Logical NOT Result of logical operations (Boolean operators) Operator Operand 1 Operand 2 Result AND 0 0 0 0 <>0 0 <>0 0 0 <>0 <>0 1 0 0 0 0 <>0 1 <>0 0 1 <>0 <>0 1 0 - 1 1 - 0 OR NOT 6.09..71828.) 14.04 v 2.14159) E Euler’s constant (2. in degrees.5 Trigonometrical Functions The trigonometrical functions expect the angles to be specified in degrees as parameters and produce them (inverse functions). Spelling Description SIN Sine COS Cosine TAN Tangent ASN Inverse sine ACS Inverse cosine ATN Inverse tangent 6.09.04 .6 Arithmetic Functions Spelling Description LG Logarithm (base 10) LGN Natural logarithm (base e) SQR Square SQRT Square root SGN Sign ABS Absolute value INT Truncation FRC Fraction RND Round MIN Minimum MAX Maximum DEG Conversion from radiant to degree RAD Conversion from degree to radiant F2C Conversion from °F to °C C2F Conversion from °C to °F GAUSSRAND Gaussian distributed random value in range of ± argument RAND Gaussian distributed random value in range of ± argument II-44 v 2.Operators and Functions 6. in turn.4 14. >=. FRC. INT. NOT EXPONENT SGN. 6.09. ABS. ATN *. / +. ACS. RAD. AND OR <. RND.4 II-45 . MIN.Operators and Functions 6. COS. SQRT. SQR. TAN.7 Operator Precedence Operator precedence from the highest to lowest Unary -. ASN.04 v 2. <=. MAX. DEG. SIN. =.8 Basic Geometry Elements Spelling Description PT Point CR Circle EL Ellipse CO Cone CY Cylinder LN Line PL Plane SP Sphere DI Distance ANG Angle 14. >. <> The operator precedence can be changed by ‘()’. PhiZX Cylindrical & spherical co-ordinate system. RCylZX Cylindrical co-ordinate system. Spelling Description X. )(angles in degrees) RcylXY. radius RSph Spherical co-ordinate system.I II-46 v 2. calculated distance MaxNo Highest used element number Example for element access: Access the diameter of the circle with the memory number 3 CR[3]. height L Length R Radius of circle. PhiYZ.K Direction (cosine format) A.Operators and Functions 6. angle ThetaX. ThetaY. RcylYZ. ThetaZ Spherical co-ordinate system.04 .YZ.J. radius PhiXY.ZX Only for angle. etc.B. angle H Only cylinder.09.C Direction ( . .9 Element components The values of the element features depend on the unit (inch or mm). calculated angle XY.Z Location I. and large radius of ellipse D Diameter (same as radius) Di Distance from origin (plane & line) R2 Big radius of ellipse D2 Big diameter of ellipse CA Cone angle (degree) ChA Half cone angle (degree) Rng Range (form of element) Sig Sigma Ang Only for angle.D Access the X component (cosine angle) of the cylinder axis with the memory number 8 CY[8]. projected angle Di Only for distance.4 14.Y. 14.4 II-47 . Position Cartesian co-ordinates Cylinder co-ordinates Sphere co-ordinates The same applies for the direction of the axis as an angle or in cosine format.Operators and Functions 6.04 v 2.10 GEOPAK Elements: Hole Shapes Elementtyp Component Size of the hole SQ W Width of the square RE W Width of the rectangle RE L Length of the rectangle SL W Width of the slot SL L Length of the slot DR W Width of the drop DR L Length of the drop DR R Large radius=W/2 of the drop DR R2 small Radius of the drop TR W Length of the triangle TR H Height of the triangle TZ W Width of the trapezoid TZ H Height of the trapezoid HX W Width of a hexagon HX W2 Width 2 of a hexagon Like for the Basic Geometry Elements you can also enter the following variable for the hole shapes.09. 4 14.09.Z Offset of actual tree in Z to tree 1 Example for probe access: Access the diameter of the actual probe PRB.Y Offset of actual tree in Y to tree 1 TreeOffs.04 .X II-48 v 2.Y.Y Master ball Y position MBall.X Offset of actual tree in X to tree 1 TreeOffs.Z Master ball Z position TreeOffs.Z Offsets A.Operators and Functions 6.D Access the X offset PRB.D Master ball diameter MBall.B Angles of rotary probe R Radius of probe D Diameter of probe Rng Range (form) Sig Sigma Tree Number of probe tree Num Number of actual probe MaxNum Highest probe number used NoOfDef Number of defined probes MBall.X Master ball X position MBall.11 GEOPAK Probes Spelling Description PRB Probe Only the actual probe can be accessed Probe components Spelling Description X.R Master ball radius MBall. 13. 6. C Alignment direction in degree I.4 II-49 .09.12 GEOPAK Rotary Table Data Syntax Description RT Rotary Table Syntax Description Ang Current angle in degree X. B.13. J.1 Minimum maximum calculation Spelling Description MinMax Result of the minimum maximum calculation 6.13 Minimum Maximum These values are not available unless the minimum-maximum calculation function has been performed previously (Menu bar / Calculation / Minimum<>Maximum). Z Alignment position in machine coordinates A. K Alignment direction (Cosine format) 6.2 Minimum maximum features Spelling Description MinVal Minimum MaxVal Maximum Avg Average (mean) Rng Range (form of element) Sig Sigma MemMinElm Element number of the element with the minimum value MemMaxElm Element number of the element with the maximum value 14. Y.Operators and Functions 6.04 v 2. PhiYZ.J. RCylZX Cylindrical co-ordinate system.AngZ Only for angle. radius RSph Spherical co-ordinate system.C Direction ( . ElJ.4 Example for minimum maximum access: Access the range of the x co-ordinates MinMax. ElB. ElK Direction of ellipse axis (cosine format) A. )(angles in degrees) RCylXY.AngYZ. PhiZX Cylindrical & spherical co-ordinate system.09.4 14. these terms X only exist for compatibility with the distance terms DiXYZ Only for distance.MaxVal. . DiY. etc. projected angle AngXY. calculated distance DiX.B. ThetaZ Spherical co-ordinate system. radius PhiXY.Rng.K Direction (cosine format) ElI. ThetaY.YZ.ZX Only for angle. angle ThetaX. )(angles in degrees) ElA. angle R Radius of circle. .13. ElC Direction of ellipse axis ( . calculated angle XY.Y.D II-50 v 2. RCylYZ.04 . projected angle.X $$ access the maximum value of the diameter MinMax. and large radius of ellipse D Diameter (same as radius) Di Distance from origin (plane & line) R2 Small radius of ellipse D2 Small diameter of ellipse CA Cone angle (degree) ChA Half cone angle (degree) Rng Range (form of element) Sig Sigma Ang Only for angle.3 Minimum maximum components Spelling Description X. DiZ Components of the distance calculation 6.Z Location I.Operators and Functions 6.13. 04 v 2.K Angles (rotation) (cosine format) 6.14.09.14.1 Best Fit Components Spelling Description X.MemMaxElm.C Angles (rotation) ( .Z Offsets (translation) A.B 14.14 Best Fit These values are not available unless a best fit has been performed previously (Menu bar / Co-Ordinate System / Best Fit) Spelling Description BestFit Result of best fit 6.X Access the rotation angle BestFit.4 II-51 .I 6. .J.2 Example for best fit access: Access the x component of the translation vector BestFit. ) (angles in degrees) I.Y.B.Operators and Functions $$ access the element number with the maximum vector component in x direction MinMax. TC Temperature coefficient SYS.Date.Date.4 14.DoY day of the year 6.15 Other GEOPAK Variables Spelling Description SYS.Time.Time.Date.Date.H current hour Sys.17 Week-days Spelling Description Sys.UF Unit factor.M month Sys.Date.Operators and Functions 6.W Week as per ISO 8601 Sys.D day Sys.Num Actual co-ordinate system number Sys.RC Repeat counter SYS. 25.LC Loop counter SYS.00 in mm mode.Date.M current minutes Sys.DoW Week-day as per ISO 8601 Sys.16 Date and Time Spelling Description Sys.18 Week numbers Spelling Description Sys.S current seconds Sys.Time.Date.Date. 1.DoWu Week-day as per current user settings Sys.09.DoWs Week-day as per system settings 6.Date.4 in inch mode SYS.Y year Sys.SD Safety distance of CMMC CS.Time.IOBit[x] Status (0/1) of IO-Bit no x x from 0 to 99 6.Date.Ws Week as per system settings II-52 v 2.Wu Week as per current user settings Sys.SF Scale factor CNC.04 .MS current milliseconds Sys. 01 (according to ISO: the first weekday is: Monday.1970 UTC. In Europe.CT).4 II-53 . you are well advised to take the difference between two system time readings (SYS.20 Examples Calculate the polar angle from circle centre to x axis and assign the variable "Pangle" to it Pangll=ATN(CR[1].09.X) Calculate the area of the circle with the memory number 4 FL=Pi/4*SQR(CR[4].01). The first week is the week of the 01.Operators and Functions 6. 6.01. Hint Should you wish to register the time required to run your part program.D) Assign a value to variable var2 var2=3. all three possibilities are identical but in the USA. we have to do with the following conditions: The first weekday is Sunday. Based on the ISO norm ISO 8601:1988 / EN 28601:1992 / before DIN 1355.04 v 2. seconds from 1.19 System Time Spelling Description SYS.Y/CR[1].00 Calculate double the amount of var2 var3=var2 * 2 14.CT Current 'C' time. first week is: the week containing the 04. You should differentiate between a general statement as to whether or not the tolerance values have been exceeded.09. II-54 v 2.04 . You can use the information about the last nominal-to-actual comparison as basis for your decision as to how to proceed with the part program. From the system variables. the return value will always be = 0.Operators and Functions 6. below). diameter. each single value of a feature (current position.All"). • the Last Element (System Variable "Tol.21 Result of Nominal-to-Actual Comparisons The Version 2. for instance. to obtain information on the last nominal-to-actual comparison. to get these individual values.Cmd") or • all Nominal-to-Actual Comparisons (System Variable "Tol. This dialogue provides you the selection lists under the heading "System Parameters (see fig.) However. or on all nominal-to-actual comparisons of one measurement.2 offers you a variety of new variables which allow you. You access the dialogue "Define Variable and Calculate" through "Menu bar / Calculate / Formula Calculation". You obtain this general statement through • the Last Feature (System Variable "Tol") . you should choose the option "Tol". Hint When you use one of the tolerance variables for the "Formula Calculation" without having performed a nominal-to-actual comparison. you should refer to a single nominal-to-actual comparison only. etc.4 14. LowerTol Lower tolerance limit Numerical value Tol.ActCrd1 Actual value of the first co-ordinate of position tolerance or concentricity depends on the projection plane Numerical value Tol.OutOfSpec Value out of specification Numerical value Tol.UpperSpec Upper specification (nominal + upper tol) Numerical value You obtain the general statement in the variables "Tol.Operators and Functions 6. "Tol.ActCrd3 Actual value of the third co-ordinate of position tolerance or concentricity depends on the projection plane Numerical value Tol.RefCrd2 Reference value of the second coordinate of position tolerance or concentricity depends on the projection plane Numerical value Tol.22 Last Nominal-to-Actual Comparison You can make use of all values calculated as a result of a nominal-to-actual comparison.TolState".LowerSpec Lower specification (nominal + lower tol) Numerical value Tol.RefCrd3 Reference value of the third co-ordinate of position tolerance or concentricity depends on the projection plane Numerical value Tol.TolLowerState" as per the following table.UpperTol Upper tolerance limit Numerical value Tol.09.PosNo Position number Numerical value Tol. Spelling Description Value type Tol.NomTol Nominal tolerance Numerical value Tol.Actual Actual value Numerical value Tol.04 v 2.RefCrd1 Reference value of the first co-ordinate of position tolerance or concentricity depends on the projection plane Numerical value Tol. using for this purpose the following table with the system variable "Tol".TolUpperState" and "Tol.ActCrd2 Actual value of the second co-ordinate of position tolerance or concentricity depends on the projection plane Numerical value Tol.4 II-55 .Deviation Deviation Numerical value Tol. 14.Nominal Actual value Numerical value Tol. of all features of this element the worst result (highest number) will be taken. but only for the upper tolerance.Cmd.4 14. Tolerance state Tol.TolStae".TolUpperState Returns the state of the tolerance command as TolState .Cmd. See also table below. tolerance command you use for this purpose the system variable "Tol. In doing this. In this case..23 Nominal-to-Actual Comparison of Last Element Should you want to obtain a general statement on all features of the last.04 .TolState Returns the state of the tolerance command.Cmd. the results will be presented in accordance with the table "Tolerance state" (refer to Last Nominal-to-Actual Comparison). You have the following possibilities: Spelling Description Value type Tol. Tolerance state II-56 v 2. but only for the lower tolerance. See also table below. Tolerance state Tol.TolLowerState Returns the state of the tolerance command as TolState.Operators and Functions Tolerance state TolStat TolUpperState TolLowerState Actual value beyond upper tolerance 2 2 0 Actual value between upper tolerance and upper intervention limit 1 1 0 Actual value between upper and lower intervention limit 0 0 0 Actual value between lower intervention limit and lower tolerance 1 0 1 Actual value below lower tolerance 2 0 2 6.Cmd.09. In addition.OOCLower Numerical value Number of the tolerance comparisons out of the lower intervention limits Tol.Count.Operators and Functions 6.").09.All.TolState Returns the state of all tolerance commands Three-State Tol.All.NoOfTol Number of tolerance comparisons Numerical value Tol.OOC Number of the tolerance comparisons out of the intervention limits (that is.Count. Cf. Cf.Count.04 v 2. but only for the upper tolerance. if you want to know if all dimensions of the part are within the tolerance or intervention limits (System Variable "Tol. In this case. table below. but only for the lower tolerance. you can request summary information in line with the following table. between intervention limit and tolerance intervention limit) Numerical value Tol.TolLowerState Returns the state of all tolerance commands as TolState.TolUpperState Returns the state of all tolerance commands as TolState.4 Numerical value II-57 .All.OOTUpper Number of the tolerance comparisons out of the 14.All. Spelling Description Value type Tol.Count. the results will be presented in accordance with the table "Tolerance state" (refer to Last Nominal-to-Actual Comparison).OOT Number of the tolerance comparisons out of the tolerance limits Numerical value Tol.Count. In doing this.24 Result of All Nominal-to-Actual Comparisons You can use this variable at the end of a part program. table below.InTol Number of the tolerance comparisons within the tolerance Numerical value Tol.Count.Count. of all features of this element the worst result (highest number) will be taken.Count.InCtrl Number of the tolerance comparisons within the intervention limits Numerical value Tol.OOCUpper Number of the tolerance comparisons out of the upper intervention limits Numerical value Tol. Three-State Tol. Three-State Tol. Count.OOC = Tol.09.Count.Count. that is.Count.OOTLower = Tol.Count.NoOfTol Tol.OOC Tol.4 14.Count.NoOfTol Tol.InCtrl + Tol.InTol + Tol.Count.Count.04 .Count.OOC + Tol.OOT = Tol.Count.Count.Count.OOTUpper + Tol.Operators and Functions upper tolerance limits Tol.Count.OOT Every tolerance comparison is counted.OOCUpper + Tol. II-58 v 2.OOT = Tol.InCtrl + Tol.Count.OOTLower Numerical value Number of the tolerance comparisons out of the lower tolerance limits Remarks: Tol. a part program command "Tolerance comparison" can include more than tolerance comparisons.Count.Count.OOCLower = Tol.Count.InTol Tol. 04 v 2. 7. Other elements (freeform surfaces) would be 14.1 Scale all elements (including element point) Clicking these option causes one scale factor to be entered for all three axes.g.Scale Factor 7 Scale Factor If you know for example that a plastic part. including the element point. for many freeform surfaces. Use the "Scale Factor" function (menu bar "Calculate / Scale Factor"). Entering 1. as well. by an injection moulding process.00 means that the co-ordinates and dimensions remain unchanged. it is quite possible that material shrinkage or expansion is not identical in all directions. you should enlarge the form by this percentile.2 Scale only element point Due to probe radius compensation. setting a different scale for each axis makes sense only for the element point.4 II-59 . This option can be used in most of the cases. Example When the part shrinks 5 per cent. 7. after the injection moulding of duroplastic material. shrinks by a certain percentage. Due to specific properties of workpieces produced e.09.95. In the following dialogue (with new functions being available as from Version 2. enter 0.2) you are offered a total of four options. In most of the cases the scale factor is identical for all co-ordinates. use Position Tolerance. i.4 14. The "Undo" command is not supported. The same is true in case you have not installed the dongle option for 3D-TOL.04 . In the present example showing any workpiece (2).Scale Factor calculated using the scale factor 1.3 Set scaling centre into origin Clicking this option causes the scaling centre to be set into the origin of the workpiece. e.e. This is not advisable for offset-defined co-ordinate systems (RPS alignment. The option "Different scale factor for each axis" cannot be used in calculating formulae. For points measured with different scale factors for each axis and required to be transferred to 3D-TOL. Please note that in this case it is your sole responsibility to define the nominal values.0. In the case of an error occurring in the learn mode you would have to set the scale factor once more. In these cases.g. there would not even be a warning. 7. the scaling centre (3) is not located in the origin of the co-ordinate system (1).09. 3D-TOL can assume the scale factor and the scaling centre only in case it applies to all axes. II-60 v 2. when all elements are to be scaled. 7.4 Use scale factor for 3D-TOL For the "Scale only element point" option the button is deactivated. automotive parts). 4 II-61 .g. in the element storage or for storage of contours. make sure that you activate the loop counter If this is the case. For this purpose. 14. to save measured elements in different element storage areas. beginning from the number entered from time to time. you must pay attention to use capital characters without fail.1 Loops Definition The loops are used to repeat the same or similar procedures several times in succession. It happens that your measurement task requires. All dialogues showing the symbol "Loop Counter" (on the left) provide you direct access to the function "Loops".g.04 v 2. we have installed a counter.1. which is increasing the number of the element storage by one at each loop flow. make sure that you de-activate the loop counter. the loop indicator can be immediately used in the dialogues e.g.Sequence Control 8 Sequence Control 8. 8. when entering formula calculation or even when you input a text. In the window "Beginning of Loop". When using the special character "@LC".1. This can also be realised through variables (see details of the topic "Definition of Variables"). 8.1 8. the counter will increment by one at any flow in progress. e. when entering file names. It is also possible to realise free inputs via the special characters "@LC". When you want to access an additional element at each time the loop is run. When you want to access the same element at each time the loop is run. e. you determine the "Number of Executions".3 Procedure You come to the loop functions via the symbols or the menu bar "Program / Beginning of Loop (End of Loop)". for tolerance comparisons.09.1.2 Symbol or Special Character Via the symbol. In the "Sub-Program Start" dialog window. you can do that via install "Branches". In these cases. 8. 8. in an existing part program. Sub-programs.09. details of topic "Branches" in the GEOPAK Editor.3.04 . Cf.2 Branches If. Sub-programs are separated into two program types. Quit the sub-program via the symbol. which are related to a parts Sub-programs.1 Subprograms Definition and Types There are two reasons to apply sub-programs: You want to divide up (structure) a long part program into blocks making sense and giving a clear overview. with which you adapt an existing sub-program to the actual situation. click the "Learn" option and possibly enter a speaking name easy to recall. especially variables are offered. you want to carry out individual instructions only in certain conditions. II-62 v 2. You want to hold self-repeating program runs in a sub-program in order to use it again.2 Create a Local Sub-Program At the position where you want to create the sub-program activate the function via the menu bar "Program / Sub-Program" or via the symbol of the toolbar in the main window of the GEOPAK Editor.Sequence Control 8. Example: Sub-program for bore pictures with rims having four or five bores.4 14. Immediately. which can be used from several parts (global) The creation and administration of the global programs is realised in the subprogram management (see details in the PartManager under topic "Administration of Sub-Program").3 8. The branches can only be created in the GEOPAK Editor. all instructions in this sub-program are stored.3. Proceed as follows: Make one more probe change for the probe you want and delete this one again.09.Sequence Control 8.3.4 II-63 .4 Delete Last Step With this function menu bar "Program (Delete Last Step").). Hint To impede this. Exception If you delete a probe change. again load the variables. Then. The last command is displayed once again and you must confirm. store the variables at the sub-program start.04 v 2. You undo this change. you can remove the last command of the part program and in most cases undo it. You will get the co-ordinate system again as before the change. 8.3 Using an already existing Sub-Program Activate the symbol and inform the program via the radio buttons where the sub-program is located (library etc. it is not possible to directly undo this change. Before terminating the sub-program. 14. If you modify variables in the sub-programs you also modify them for the main program. you can continue measuring with the right probe and the unnecessary probe change will not appear in your part program. Hint The variables that are defined in the main program are also available in the sub-programs. To undo also means: You have changed the co-ordinate system. In this dialogue you can check again your last entries. use the "Comment Line" (menu bar "Program / Comment Line"). e.04 . Repeat element measurement: If you select this option. you can enter any text you want (80 characters max. per line). Delete command: If you select this option. the command is stored despite a faulty execution in the part program.g. II-64 v 2. This fourth option is particularly not recommendable for the scanning of contours because this would mean the loss of all points already measured. However.09. the last dialogue is displayed again. the number of measurement points is completely reset to 0. Store command: If you select this option. The measurements you have performed up to this stage are still valid.there are four options available: Repeat command: If you select this option. the command is neither executed nor stored. the last used dialogue opens. 8. Therefore. this option differs substantially from the option "Repeat command" (see above).6 Comment Line If you want to add information to your part program.Sequence Control 8. in the case of a collision.4 14. which do not concern the measurement and will not appear in the test certificate.5 Error While Executing Command When this dialogue appears – usually unexpectedly . In the following "Comment in Part Program" window. " symbol. 8. you call an element and confirm.4 II-65 . If.04 v 2. 14. The picture will appear in the "Measurement Display" window.8 Show Picture With this function (menu bar "Program / Show Picture"). in the following. you can have a picture for your actual measurement course. Search for the picture via the symbol according to Windows conventions and confirm. you can clear a picture that you have activated before (see details under "Show Picture").10 Play Sound With this function (menu bar "Program / Play Sound"). you can stop the part program run at a position and give some information or instructions to the user through a text.9 Clear Picture With this function (menu bar "Program / Clear picture"). Via the symbol above to the right ("Test") in the "Play Sound" window.09. 8. the picture will be overwritten as a default setting in the "Measurement Display" window. you can play a sound during the actual measurement course. the picture in the "Measurement Display" window will disappear.7 Programmable Stop With the "Programmable Stop" (menu bar "Program / Programmable Stop"). You can avoid this in the element window by clicking on the "Graphics of Meas. 8. you can hear the file to the test. By clicking on the function.Sequence Control 8. a picture or an audio file Proceed according to Windows conventions. You determine the file by clicking on the symbol according to Windows conventions. You make the usual entries where for the address. For details. you can use 480 signs. an e-mail program compatible with MAPI (for example Outlook-Express) must be installed. before starting GEOPAK.11 Send E-Mail With this function (menu bar "Program / Send E-Mail"). For the text. Yet. It is possible that the different providers accept not as much of characters. see the following topics Configuration. In addition. the Cc details and the subject max. 8. You can attach one file each time. the necessary settings must have been realised before in the PartManager. you can send an e-mail directly out of GEOPAK. Log Communication and Address Book Hints You only can select one receiver from the address book.04 .09. For the text.Sequence Control 8. 80 signs are allowed.4 14. you can use 160 characters.12 Send SMS With this function (Menu Bar "Program / Send SMS"). you can directly send a SMS out of GEOPAK. II-66 v 2. even if this information might be required (e. For further information concerning this subject. no further action will be required later with a function asking for head data (e.09.14 Input Head Data Some functions automatically ask for head data.g. the function "Input Head Data" will be available. This is useful. folder "GENERAL". the "Flexible Protocol Output" or "Statistics Output into File"). refer to the topic 14. Use this variable when entering the directory name in this function. Therefore.g.2. please refer to your MCOSMOS-CD-ROM under "Documents". Also use this variable in the "File Format Specification" function. Other functions don't automatically ask for the head data. Certainly. With this command. Hints If this path does not yet exit. 8. you can create a new directory in a GEOPAK part program. The head data dialogue will not appear again.4 II-67 .pdf". Str1 = Woche_@week. which you complete with the text and the "week" system variable (see example below). you also can create sub-directories. In this way the part program executed the functions you have entered in the dialog "HEAD Data Editor" earlier in the PartManager. if e. beginning from Version 2. Beginning of File Format). tasks are repeated in weekly periods. when this data has been selected previously (e. first of all define a string variable. nothing happens. The head data required for input is the information defined in the PartManager with the option "Input Head Data before Printing" (for details. If you proceed this way. Otherwise. "Beginning of File Format" or "Beginning of Print Protocol"). In this case. When selecting a name for the directories.Sequence Control 8. it will be created. you have all possibilities of the string coding at your disposal.g. you wish to file the protocols of the results sorted by the week. file "si_io_comm_g (e).g.13 Create Directory With this function. You call this function (Menu bar / Program / Input Head Data) at the beginning of the part program and confirm in the following window.04 v 2. For Example a dialogue of the following type will appear: If no head data is defined. If no head data with the option "Input Head Data before Printing" is defined in the PartManager.Sequence Control "Head Data: Definition ". II-68 v 2. "Editor for Head Data: Overview" and Dialogue Window "Editor for Head Data" ).4 14. no dialogue and no error message will show up.09.04 . no head data dialogue and no error dialogue will show up. 04 v 2. refer to the topic "Editor for Head Data: Overview "). To find out which head data field is to be set. e. below.Sequence Control 8. the user has to enter the ID of the head data field which he has set already previously in the PartManager (fig. You enter the ID and the new contents of the field. Menu bar / Settings / Head Data / New or Change). through a text variable. In case the data is entered in the learn mode with variables. The existing ID's you have already set in the PartManager are 14.g.4 II-69 . This is useful in case the head data is required to be set through a part program functionality.09. the result will automatically be analysed and displayed under the input line.15 Set Head Data Field This part program allows you to set a head data field (for details. an error message will appear ("Head Data Field not Existing"). You should know If there is no ID. the contents of this list will not be added (for details. Depending on the sublot already defined in the PartManager (for details. no error will be displayed. for the flexible protocol output or the statistics). the character string will automatically be reduced to the input length. This command does not verify the "input type". there will appear a dialogue where you input the sublot. the new contents will be valid until it is replaced in the PartManager or changed by another command. The command is not learnt. In the learn mode. you can access this function through the "Menu bar / Program / Sublot Input" and confirm in the subsequent window. Should the length of the input text be longer than the defined input length.4 14.04 . refer to General information on Sublot and the topics to follow). If a number is defined as input type and a character string is set.Sequence Control suggestions for the ID list field. the field will automatically be filled with blanks. This means: even if GEOPAK is finished. II-70 v 2.2. Beginning from the Version 2. there is only a check for maximum length.g.16 Sublot Input It may be necessary to specify sublot data already at the beginning of part programs (e. If the "input type" reads "Extend list". When in the PartManager a "Structured Sublot" has been defined. The dialogue "Structured Sublot" performs a self-check of its input data. a corresponding dialogue will be displayed (fig. For the standard input. there is no error message.09. Refer also to "Set Sublot". An error message will appear only in case the user has interrupted the input ("Sublot input was interrupted"). Otherwise only the sublot input with an input field will be displayed. 8. If you enter less than 40 characters. refer to Extend List ). below). The new contents of the head data field is stored in the part's head data. 4 II-71 . The remaining characters of every sublot are filled with blanks. Set complete sublot: If the option "Set Structured Sublot" is disabled the whole sublot will be set. If data is entered in the learn mode with variables. Using the symbol ("Set Structured Sublot") you decide in the dialogue "Set Sublot" (see fig. the result will automatically be analysed and displayed under the input line. Refer also to "Sublot Input". Otherwise this function is disabled and can not be selected in learn mode. Should the sublot field to be set no exist. You should also know Structured sublot: In order to identify the sublot to be set.04 v 2. Default settings: If a structured sublot has been defined the default setting of the option "Set Structured Sublot" is enabled. below) as to whether you want to set the complete sublot or only a sublot field. the screen shows an error message ("Sublot not existing"). 14.09.Sequence Control 8.17 Set Sublot This function (Menu bar / Program / Set Sublot) allows you to set the sublot as a whole or only a sublot field of a structured sublot. you enter the number of the sublot field and the new contents of the field. these are input. your part program will start again.09. and this according to Windows conventions in the "Program Name" text field. \PROG\DATA).18 Program Call Program Name With this function (menu bar "Program / Program Call"). these programs will run in parallel to your part program.Sequence Control 8. Only if you close the external program.04 . Working Directory In this text box you enter the folders (directories) that are required for the running external program. separated by empty signs. the part program stops and only the external program is running. Pay attention to the spelling of the directories and the rules of the way of writing of directories (e. you can call any external program. II-72 v 2.g. in this text field.4 14. Program Parameters If the external program requires further parameters. Then. If you only click on the clock symbol. 04 v 2. Typical examples are Automatic process control.pdf". logical "HIGH" (for the most part high tension) and logical "LOW" (for the most part low tension). 14. You find the file for the default setting on the MCOSMOS installation CD (\OPTIONS\IO_COND).4 II-73 . file "si_io_comm_g (e). folder "GENERAL". In our case. It makes possible that MCOSMOS may work together with other control systems. are Input / Output cards. e. IO Cards IO cards. To minimise the expenses when selecting IO cards. In this file. you will have to write a control file. The communication can take place in one or two directions.DAT"). Robot control. Requirement The "IO_COND. there are only two conditions.g. This must also be available in the "INI" directory. also called EA cards in German (Ein. Pallet feeding device.09. Without these files. the IO condition is also called IO communication (Input-Output).19 IO Condition (IO Communication) Introduction Frequently.Sequence Control 8. That means. To do so. For further information concerning this subject.INI" must be available in the "INI" directory of MCOSMOS. please refer to your MCOSMOS-CD-ROM under "Documents". the "ME-8100-A". electronic signals are exchanged. Furthermore. per signal. MCOSMOS will not execute an IO communication. you have to define the name of the control file (default setting "IO_COND. we offer some standard IO cards. and the type of card that you wish to use.oder Ausgangskarten). we call them digital input or output cards. That leads for example to the output: "Now it is 13:45:48 o’ clock". as well as names of files. commentary lines. e.pdf". If you want to call variables within a loop via the loop indicator you input as a variable name.asc".asc" etc. That leads after the first program run to "Result1. Then to "Result 2.Sequence Control 8. For further information about all possibilities of modifying the texts in the string coding. file "UM_string_code_g(e).g. that you input as an originally-protocol number namely in the dialogue window directly after start of the repeat mode. RC stands for Repeat Counter and begins with the number.4 14. text lines (e. in the second to var2 etc.20 Possibilities of Text Input/Data Name It is also possible to enter defined variable information into all boxes in which you normally make text inputs: Protocol headlines. you can input in the learn mode with the "File Format Beginning" function as file names for example "Result@RC. elements and variables. "Text to Printer"). Further possibilities of input: Single Selection Group Selection II-74 v 2. for example the current time of day you can do that over the output text by previously entering the text "Now it is @time o’ clock".g.04 . If you want to create your own ASCII-file with the results to each program run.
[email protected]. Three important examples If you want to output. This leads in the first loop flow to variable var1. please refer to your MCOSMOS-CD-ROM under "Documents".asc". So you have to define the projection plane. In the dialogue window "Connection Element Line".04 v 2. In case of a connection element the material side is not known. all elements build up to now. when you use a line and have to pay attention to its sense of direction. There may.and vice versa . You click the elements selected to the right-hand side and confirm.21 Single Selection In order to get. In case of single selection. hence automatic projection is not possible.the following two symbols are of utmost importance: With mouse-click to group selection With mouse-click to single selection Our example In our following example. For this purpose you have at the left border of the respective dialogue windows "Connection Element . for instance. With the connection element calculated using this method. to a connection element. you are presented. Provided the elements are of one type of elements and arranged one behind each other in the memory. but it is up to you • determine the sequence and • to mix the types of elements.. due to the fact that the material side is known. You can determine these elements via the single or group selection facility. you first have to select the elements used to build the connection element. the line is the connection element.4 II-75 . Via the horizontal icon bar ("Available") you can decide by a mouse-click which types of elements you want to watch and use or not. you proceed in the same way as with any other element. Change selection When you change from single to group selection .undoubtedly faster . for instance. you are recommended to use the . YZ and ZX. 14..09.Group Selection.Sequence Control 8. This is the case. You should know In case of a measured element automatic projection into one plane is possible. on the left-hand side. of course." the planes XY. occur situations where single selection is mandatory. you have to • proceed step by step. 22 Group Selection In order to get. due to the fact that the material side is known. for instance. With the connection element calculated using this method.4 14. YZ and ZX.. In the icon bar ("Available") you select. For this purpose you have at the left border of the respective dialogue windows "Connection Element . for instance. Bear in mind that with the sequence of the circles you define the line's sense of direction. you proceed in the same way as with any other element You should know In case of a measured element automatic projection into one plane is possible.04 . occur situations where single selection is mandatory.. You can determine these elements via the single or group selection facility. you are recommended to use the . the element "Circle" and decide in the text box "Number" how many circles you want to use to build the connection element "Line". the line is the connection element. So you have to define the projection plane. e. when you use a line and have to pay attention to its sense of direction.g. Change Selection To change from single to group selection . you first have to select the elements used to build the connection element." the planes XY. II-76 v 2. of course.09.you use the following two symbols: With mouse-click to group selection With mouse-click to single selection Our example In our following example.and vice versa . In case of Single Selection you have to Proceed step by step.group selection.undoubtedly faster . This is the case.Sequence Control 8. but it is up to you to determine the sequence or to mix the types of elements. Provided the elements are of one type of elements and arranged one behind each other in the memory.. There may. In case of a connection element the material side is not known. to a connection element. hence automatic projection is not possible. .....................09......... 10 PH9 Probe Clearance .................................................................................... 12 Calibrate Scanning Probe Systems . 9 Counting......... 8 1...............................................2 6 Several Masterballs: Introduction ...........................2 4.............................................................................5 2.... 3 New Input of Probe/Edit/Copy Probe Data .................... 11 Manual Calibration..........2 2...................................................... 7 Confirm Probe Configuration ............... 16 Single Probe Re-Calibration .............2 6........................ 13 Define MPP/SP600 Factors ........... 12 Calibration of Scanning Probes .......................... 14 Z-Offset........6 3 Probe Calibration: Options ...............................................1 2..................................................... 5 Save / Delete / Calibrate Probe Data .......3..................... 17 Calibrate Probe: Display ..............3 7 Cancel Probe Change: Sequence...................................................1 14..........................................................................3 1.....4 2.................................. 10 2............ 23 v 2................................................. 19 5..................5 1..........2 1..........04 Combination of Racks / Introduction ............................. 9 Probe Calibration ............1 6...... 14 3..................................1 5.....................3 Load Probe Data from Archive .......................... 17 4......................................................1 1...................................... 6 Probe Selection.................................... 18 Several Masterballs .. 19 Cancel Probe Change ............. 13 Define Master Ball ......... for two racks ......................................... 19 Define Masterball Position.....1 1........................6.............3 2............. 14 Maximum Difference.................................................................................. 15 Archive Probes ...................1 4......2 3.3 2 Warnings ................... 21 6........................................... 3 1.....................................g........................................... 8 Numbering........................................................................................................................... 16 4................... 21 Cancel Probe Change: Details and Tips ....................................................... 17 Re-Calibrate from Memory................... 22 Combination of Racks..........................1 4........4 III-1 ............................ e................................2 1.....................4 1.................. 22 Rotary Table: Hints...........4 5 Procedure.......6 Probe Data Management: Introduction.......................................6.....................................................3 4 Define Master Ball: Example...............1 3....... 7 Change Probe Configuration ........................................................................................6.............................. 23 7..........Probe Data Management III Probe Contents 1 Probe Data Management... ...........................................7 7............6 7.......04 ..18 7................ 25 Manual Change..................................................................... 32 Configuration with the SCR200............11 7.................... 26 Probe Extension Module "PEM" ............. 23 Sub-Racks.. 24 Manual and Virtual Changer ........................2 7........................................... 35 Rack Specific Parameters and Positions .......................4 14................................4 7........................................................................................ 30 Rack Definition ........................................... 27 Convert Rack Data ............19 III-2 Combination of Racks / Definitions . 29 Calibrate ACR 3 .....8 7..........................10 7..........................14 7..................... 25 Manual Change with Following Rack .17 7....................................15 7.......................................16 7........................ 37 v 2.........9 7...........................3 7...................................... 28 Set Advanced MPP100 Data ...09... 26 Rack Alignment ....................................12 7................. 30 Numbering Method of Probe Configurations......13 7............... 26 Definition of Sub-Racks................................ 31 Options with the FCR25........................................ 36 Port Settings ..................Probe Data Management 7.........................5 7...................................................................... 33 Configuration with the ACR3 and Two Times FCR25 .................................. 1 Probe Data Management: Introduction You want to perform a single measurement. PH10). About columns The first column shows probe numbers. you just click on the symbol to accept the angle values. the tree number will be asked for previously. About symbols: The symbol (on the left) is activated. Your co-ordinate measuring machine is equipped with the probe suitable for your measuring job. The second column displays symbols. It is possible to Load Probe from Archive. The Archive probe function is possible. too. Further subjects are described under the topics "New Input of Probe/Edit/Copy Probe Data" and "Save/Delete/Calibrate Probe Data". when you define a loop start prior to changing the probe. Keep in mind that probes can be archived and recalled again from there. Click the function "Select All" in case you want to calibrate all probes in succession. Upon confirmation you are presented the dialogue window "Probe Data Management". Ö Ö Click on the probe from where you want the loop to start. As a rule. you print the current probe list. • • For information about "ProbeBuilder" or "Define Probe" first click on the topic "ProbeBuilder". You start your measuring program through the PartManager (for details refer to Single Measurement/Learn Mode). The HCU is suitable for all rotary-type probing systems (PH9. 14. For details refer to the topic "Loops". Make sure that the window is not unnecessarily overloaded. Hints You can input as many probes as you currently need. The current tree number is suggested. Provided you have manually set the angles of your probing system using the Renishaw Head Control Unit (HCU). The GEOPAK main window opens and tells you that no probe is defined yet.Probe Data Management 1 Probe Data Management 1. Click on the symbol for OK. It is always the probe identified with an asterisk behind the probe number that is used for measurement.04 v 2.09. If a probe-tree changing system is used.4 III-3 . There is a general rule: A changed or redefined probe is always given the symbol of a theoretical probe. When the values are too high. you have touched the ball from the side (sliding-type probing). then. Under "A" and "B" of the columns you find information on the probe angles (refer also to New Input of Probe/Edit/Copy Probe Data). the pin symbolises an already calibrated probe. Data regarding the Maximum Difference relative to the calculated calibration ball diameter is indicated after the diameter column. It is necessary that you have approached a minimum of 5 points for measurement. III-4 v 2. for instance.4 14.Probe Data Management The probe symbol represents a theoretical probe.04 .Y and Z (refer also to New Input of Probe/Edit/Copy Probe Data). The probe offset relative to the reference probe is shown in the columns X.09. Click the line of the probe to be copied. click on Edit and perform the changes in the subsequent window.4 III-5 . Edit Probe Data Click the respective line in the Probe Data Management window. Ö First enter a theoretical value for diameter.000 (e. all changes are transferred to Probe Data Management. for instance. Ö In the lines for probe angles.necessarily starting from 1.. for example 2. you can enter an 14. is to be chosen in the following dialogue window via the menu bar / Settings / Input Characteristics. Otherwise leave the values set to 0. New Input of Probe The probes are consecutively numbered . Ignoring the number suggested." is active in the "Copy probe Data" dialogue. Copy Probe Data Only the line "Copy to.. Upon OK.2 New Input of Probe/Edit/Copy Probe Data The dialogues "New Input of Probe".09. you will get a safety query.04 v 2.5 degrees. The dialogues are almost identical.g. In case data was saved previously and you have made changes. then enter rough offset values. upwards and downwards in steps of 7. Whether to enter linear measures in millimetres or inches. in mm). a part program with offset values already defined for later recalibration (star-type probe) by another part program.Probe Data Management 1. "Edit Probe Data" and "Copy Probe Data" are prompted up by clicking over the menu bar / Probe Data Management and the function required. use the arrow keys to select the values. Ö If you have. Hint If. Further topics: Probe Data Management New Input of Probe/Edit/Copy Probe Data III-6 v 2. however. Delete Deletion is possible for any probe. This probe is then overwritten. you will get a safety query. and finally • to finish the window with Abort. you are requested to answer a safety query. Otherwise the copied probe is placed to the end of the list.4 14. previously saved values will be displayed. In case data was saved previously and you have made changes. The #1 probe (reference probe). Copying onto the reference probe is not possible. Otherwise a fault message will show up. you use the Probe Data Management window • to save. Calibrate You always calibrate the active probe (for details refer to Probe Calibration). however. As a rule of principle.3 Save / Delete / Calibrate Probe Data Save Saving causes all current data to be physically written on the hard disk. any changed or redefined probe is always given the symbol of a theoretical probe.Probe Data Management already occupied probe number. In case data saving has been confirmed with OK and you want to change or recopy probe data in a subsequent step.09. can only be deleted if it is the last probe in the list. Further topics: Probe Data Management Save/Delete/Calibrate Probe Data 1.04 . • then to make changes or recopy data. or if all subsequent probes are deleted at the same time together with the reference probe. the "old". 4 Probe Selection If at least one probe is defined. cf. you will see the window for probe management. This dialog is a safety question at exit. After starting learn or repeat mode. store changes"? 1. you can add new probes to the list. The new data are directly passed to the probe data management window (for details. Select one and confirm. Last but not least. you get the "Change Probe" window.5 Confirm Probe Configuration This only refers to machines that are equipped with a probe changer system. (Probe Data Management and Probe Calibration ). Furthermore. cf.09. The window "change probe data" immediately appears. you continue as you did in Probe Selection . here you can define your probe(s). the probe configuration may have been manually changed. this one is used for measurement. After confirmation. while executing a part program. you use the function "Probe / probe data management" in the pull-down menu.Probe Data Management 1. You can easily change probe data by simply clicking any probe of the list twice. you should examine the "real" probe tree and then confirm. In the headline. For this. Therefore. your measurement data will be wrong. If the probe configuration has been changed. then this becomes the actual probe used for measurement. If you do not enter the correct configuration. Now. the following question appears: "Data have been changed. The menu "probe" can access the windows for "select probe" and "probe data management". you can see the window "change probe" with the data of the defined probe(s). you find the number of the probe configuration. Probe Data Management ). there are collisions when working with the wrong probe data. Further Information The active probe is marked by an <*>. which is active now. 14. If there are no defined probes.4 III-7 . you get the window "Confirm Actual Probe Configuration". Meanwhile.04 v 2. You can also access this function via the "probe" icon of the tool bar on the left margin of the screen. there will be problems as soon as you change the probe configuration. you should enter the number of the configuration. For details. Even if there are probes defined. After changing. GEOPAK would try to record the probe configuration into an occupied port. 6 Change Probe Configuration The change of probe tree will be automatically realized. you get the error message "Probe # 1 not Defined". Ö You call the probe tree change via the menu probe / change configuration. nevertheless can be combined no matter which configuration an element has been probed with.6. proceed as in Probe Selection .1 Warnings If the probe configuration has not been calibrated yet. GEOPAK needs a common reference probe.04 .4 14. also Probe Data Management . you get the window for "Probe Data Management" (the number of the configuration appears in the headline). After you confirm it. The automatic change of probe tree will be realized from where the probe tree is situated at the moment you want to change it. otherwise. Therefore. you get an additional message "Attention: Probe will move!". you get the message only if the CNC can be manually moved.Probe Data Management 1. After the configuration has been changed. you can correct the actual position by the joysticks. you must respect a series of special steps. The probe tree takes the direct way to the port. If you dispose of a manual tool changer. Then. the number of the configuration is written in the headline.09. Now you have a chance to check whether the rack can be reached without collision. you should pay attention to warning messages. with a swivelling probe. cf. This direct way will only be selected if you have not indicated a security position in the "Rack Definition" program. Enter the number of the probe configuration and confirm. The probe configuration number is the number of the port in the rack. To avoid collisions. This probe must be calibrated first. before. you get the window for the selection of the actual probe. Make sure that the probe can be rotated without collision (see above). Do not forget to define these positions for the repeat mode by pressing the "GOTO button" of the joystick box. In repeat mode. III-8 v 2. In single / learn mode. Also see details of Manual Tool Changer . This is probe #1 of configuration #1. you get the message "Attention: Probe Configuration has Changed". If you have worked. As all the measurements can be made with different probe configurations. take care that the access to the probe tree is free. 1. and you can use the joysticks to move the machine. g. the number of assessable ports in the ACR has been reduced (e. you must give an exact name to the ports in the corresponding rack. The numbering begins in your Rack with the number 01 and in the rack with the number 11. the numbering of the ports of the second rack starts from 7 and goes to 12.6.6. for two racks If you have.4 III-9 . If the rack position has not been determined yet. e.2 Numbering. then counting for the second rack starts from 9. If.09. for example two racks of the same type (see picture below with two SCR200). usually 8 ports are available. 14.Probe Data Management 1. to 7). counting for the second rack starts from 8.3 Counting The following counting can still be used because of compatibility with GEOPAK 3 in connection with your part programs from this version: If you use two SCR 200 with 6 ports. 1. in case of an ACR. however. you get an error message.04 v 2.g. . the rest of the probe positions are automatically measured. Ö You confirm und get the window "Calibrate Probe". Ö Now specify the number of points you want to measure. v 2. If you have not measured the master ball using probe #1. Otherwise.n. First. Procedure III-10 Ö Activate probe #1 in the window "Probe data management". Different methods GEOPAK offers different methods to calibrate probes.09. you can finish the measurement at any time. Ö Now probe the master ball with the probe you want to calibrate at least five times. Input the number of points for the calibration before measurement. you get a warning message. and then confirm. this probe is called the "reference probe". you can decide which numbers of points must be taken. Now click "calibrate" to get the dialogue for calibration. You confirm. you can enter any other diameter via the text-input field. Then measure the master ball manually. If you have a CNC machine. Select the manual calibration by a clicking the symbol.4 14. In this window you get all information you need. mount the master ball to a fixed position.04 . if you try to calibrate some other probe. Select the manual mode by clicking the symbol. Ö Select the diameter of the master ball out of the list.Probe Calibration 2 2. you will get the error message "Position of master ball not defined". At least five points must be used. This is achieved by measuring it using the probe #1. you must know the position of the master ball. You guide the CMM to the measuring points. As soon as the defined number is reached. the program automatically calculates the probe data. Only set the probe above the master ball. therefore. then select the "automatic probe calibration". If the actual diameter is not in the list.1 Probe Calibration Probe Calibration: Options Define Master Ball with Reference Probe Before you calibrate one of the probes #2 to . After at least five points. Make sure that all probes you want to calibrate can freely access it. cf. If you want an automatic calibration of a probe configuration (activate by a click on the icon).Probe Calibration Note When using one of the other methods.2 PH9 Probe Clearance With this command. The angle position is taken either from the probe number or correspondingly from the angle you entered. see Z-Offset ) the number of calibration cycles. thus making the calibration more accurate. the Z-Offset (for more details. Cf. you can move to a probe position. the machine moves as if the reference probe would be active. You should use a large distance first. By this program you can configure your probe system included the swivel length. topic Recalibrate from Memory . After this function. The offset is made by the reference probe.3). Therefore. we recommend using at least two. 2. additionally input With regard to the Swivel length you work with the ProbeBuilder (since version 2. This makes sense for example if the probe should be moved alongside a part and has to be swivelled for this purpose. Measurement Point). 14. this makes a calibration possible in spite of inaccurate probing of the pole. continue accordingly. you must again move to a defined probe if you want to continue the measurement.e. the safety distance (for more details.4 III-11 . and you have a rotary probe head.09. the subsequent measurements start from the data acquired by the previous cycle.04 v 2. for which you must not especially define a probe. i. one for touching measurement and the other for scanning measurement.Probe Calibration 2. That means: You have to determine the scale factors. The values of the scanning probe are always the lower ones. You will get an error message if the masterball is not defined. SP25 and SP80. the probe diameter is calculated. For this.4 Calibration of Scanning Probes When using one of the probing systems SP600. For "Element finished". the function itself is activated and can not be deactivated.4 14. it is possible to also use an already defined masterball.04 . As a reply. The same applies also to an already existing part program. choose to use this possibility. If don't choose to do so. the diameter. however. use the menu bar and the „Probe“ menu. The diameter text box is deactivated. beginning from Version 2. When performing measurement on a ball. As a result (ill. you will be able to enter the number of the masterball. but not the diameter.3 Manual Calibration To get to this function and the dialogue. every single point with the probe offset is sent to the machine. however. This option is only visible with an activated scanning probe system. the text of this option in this window is greyed. However. Should you. is shown depending on the number of the masterball defined previously. the "Element finished " is possible beginning from the fifth measurement point. In a volume-compensated machine.09. When working with a newly defined probe. III-12 v 2. the masterball you use will have the number 1. probe 1 needs to be calibrated. above) you receive two different probe diameters. These points are used to calculate the probe. make sure that you always enter the diameter of the masterball: Manual calibration Re-calibrate single probe Re-calibrate from memory In addition. special calibration routines are automatically used. For further details refer to the topic Volume Compensation For the following functions and the dialogue related to them. Prior to calibrating probes with numbers greater than 1. 2. Always only the offset of the touching measurement is used. click on the option "Determine scale factors" in the window "Calibrate probe".2. you get the volumecompensated points. SP80 und SP25) the MPP factors and the relevant probe diameter are established automatically. If you want to call this command in the part program ("Menu Bar / Probe / Define MPP Factors"). 1. Then. In the manual mode. The definition of the factors is always realized for the current probe. By means of this information.6 Define MPP/SP600 Factors With measuring probes. for calibration purposes. This also applies to the case that the measurement procedure was changed during the element measurement. Another feature of all the scanning probe systems is that the effective ball diameter is slightly different depending on whether the scanning probe systems will be operated in touch trigger or scanning mode. 1 will be defined. refer to "Re-calibrate from Memory". This is valid for all probes to be calibrated. 14. Note For the scanning probe types (SP600. The ball will be measured in the touch trigger mode. the offset of the current probe to probe no. the probe must be moved over the masterball with the program. you must define factors so that the measurement accuracy is guaranteed. The position of these scales relative to the CMM scales must be additionally defined for the calibration. the subsequent steps will be automatically realized. This is why the ball diameter must be determined twice. the MPP/SPxx factors will be determined by scanning the ball once again in a special mode. CNC scanning).04 v 2. 2. the following conditions must be fulfilled: The probe must have been calibrated before. In CNC operation. 2.5 Calibrate Scanning Probe Systems The probe systems MPP of Mitutoyo and SPxx of Renishaw are scanning probe systems where scales are installed in the probe head. This way.g. From now on. a dialogue is displayed prompting the operator to manually move the probe over the masterball.4 III-13 . the ball will be measured once again in the touch trigger mode by using these factors in order to get the exact probe data. always the diameter of the scanning probe is used. Proceed as follows: Measure the ball with the probe no.09. For more detailed information.Probe Calibration For the probe radius compensation of scanning commands (e. This function is not applicable for a SP600 with star probe. drawing below). III-14 v 2. continue?" Reason The reference probe has not been calibrated yet. because the differences to probe #1 would be wrong. When clicking the "calibrate" button. In such a case. probing of equator may not be possible (cf.1 Define Master Ball: Example Situation You have started GEOPAK in single / learn mode and want to calibrate a new probe in the probe data management window. the probe calibration would result in wrong probe data. However. In these cases.4 14.09. you can opt for "continue" when you get the warning. the master ball is probed using a circle along the equator. you get the warning "Position of master ball not defined. If you actually use a small tip. Solution Calibrate probe #1 anew (cf. or a different master ball is used. Probe Calibration ).Define Master Ball 3 Define Master Ball 3. if you are sure that the master ball position has not been changed since you have calibrated probe #1 the last time. this means the height above the equator where the master ball is touched.2 Z-Offset Usually during probe calibration. This warning tries to prevent you from getting wrong results.04 . and you try to calibrate a probe with a number different from 1. you can input an offset in Z. If the position of the master ball has been changed in the meantime. 3. and a point on the pole. Then the distance of the individual points to the calculated surface is computed. the higher the value.if the element is close to perfect. it is defined exactly through the points.g.4 III-15 . A = maximum distance B = maximum distance C = maximum difference The value can only be obtained if an element is measured with more than the minimum number of points required for that element. e.the quality of the measurement or probe system. If an element has been measured with only the minimum number of points.09. you may get a high value for the "maximum difference".04 v 2. the point that is nearest to the centre.Define Master Ball 3. It is calculated after the element data have been obtained from the measurement points. you can evaluate the quality of the measurement. Even in CNC mode. The difference between these two distances is the "maximum difference". there are no distances from the element to the points. or has not been tightly screwed. and .. 14. The idea is the same for all the other elements as well. as a master ball . the maximum distances on one side and on the other give an indication about the measurement (cf. in case of a sphere (the master ball) the following two points determine the value: the point having the largest distance from the centre. also Probe Data Management ). This can be an indication that either your probe is defective. you need at least 4+1=5 measurement points to get the value for the maximum difference. From this value. For a sphere.3 Maximum Difference The maximum difference is an information about the quality of an element or .. the worse measurement. Now the program calculates the "maximum difference". You can get a list of archived probe sets if you select "Probes/from archive" from the menu bar. Ö Select the probe set you need and confirm. Note As this implies a change of the actual probe. Then you find the loaded probe set in the probe data management window. and confirm. In this case.1 You can de-select single probes in a block by <Strg> and mouse click. You can display the archived probe data before loading them. only the single probe is activated. the new number and tip diameter indicate this change in the result field. Load Probe Data from Archive You are in single / learn mode of GEOPAK and want to use a probe configuration.. Then the whole block is marked and put in the archive. also Probe Data Management). A selected block is de-activated if you activate a single probe of this block. III-16 v 2. Ö Click in the "Probe Data Management" dialogue window on the symbol.04 .09. Note 4. however. or . If you want to archive the complete list on the screen. which has been defined (calibrated) and archived. activate the probe you need for the next measurement and click on "Change to" (cf. Ö Select "Probes / Data from Archive" from the menu bar. the rest is deactivated. Ö Use the menu bar probes / archive or .4 14. either with a click on the symbol ("View" bubble) or • with a double click on the archive name. Ö Click in the "Probe Data Management" dialogue window on the symbol.Archive Probes 4 Archive Probes You can archive any probe set.. Next. • This means. then press the <Shift> key and move the mouse up to the last probe. or click "Load from archive" in the probe data management window. the probe #1 must also be archived. In either case you get the "Probe from Archive" window... click on probe #1 first. in the "Probe from Archive" window. This function gives you the possibility to re-calibrate probes via measured spheres. Ö You confirm by "OK". Ö In the following window you input the number of probes that have to be calibrated. the probe with the number 1 must be calibrated first (you will find more detailed information in chapter "Three possibilities for measurement"). a first set of probe data must already exist. 4. as a set of theoretical values. if no error has occurred. However. These new data are stored to the disc immediately. or the previously defined probes. In addition. you enter the memory number of the sphere which you have measured first with probe #1.Archive Probes 4. and wrong probe data are stored. Ö The spheres must be stored into subsequent memory numbers.09.g. use the menu bar and the „Probe“ menu. The correlation between the probes and measured spheres must be exact. The sequence number only does the correlation of the measured spheres and the probes. If you wish to calibrate a probe of any number of the list. This means that the sequence numbers of the probes must not have interruptions. Gaps in the probe list are possible. However.2 Single Probe Re-Calibration Proceed as described in chapter "Re-calibrate from memory". Ö If you have measured the ball with all the probes. 14. A difference is that for single probe re-calibration only one probe will be determined. Ö You start with probe #1 and measure the ball as element "sphere" by all probes. The probe data are calculated anew.4 III-17 . e.04 v 2.3 Re-Calibrate from Memory To get to this function and the dialogue. as otherwise a wrong correlation is done. 4. you select the pull down menu "probes / re-calibrate from memory". This means that it can be done automatically. the first number can be freely selected. The main advantage of this function is that even complex probe configurations can be calibrated using a CNC part program.3.1 Procedure Ö You fix the master ball on the table of the machine at a position where it can be accessed by all probes you want to calibrate. make sure that you always enter the diameter of the masterball: Manual calibration Re-calibrate single probe Re-calibrate from memory In addition it is possible to also use an already defined masterball. the current probe calibration and the calibrations still to be worked off. however. SP80 and SP25.. is shown depending on the number of the masterball defined previously. click on the right mouse key – separately in both window parts. the diameter.09.4 14. For the probe types SP600.4 Calibrate Probe: Display In the display window for "Calibrate probe". Note To set the font type and size according to Windows conventions.. . 4. but not the diameter. You find the current data in the upper field with the black background. however. In the lower table part of this window you see . you find all status information concerning the probe calibration. Via the symbols (left) the functions "Delete" and "Element ready" can be selected. For calibrating single probes and re-calibrating from memory it is possible to define the type of calibration (touching or scanning). The diameter text box is deactivated.Archive Probes For the following functions and the dialogue related to them.the results of former calibrations in case that you have calibrated more than just one probe. Should you. You will get an error message if the masterball is not defined.04 . If don't choose to do so. In the centre of the window you find instructions as to which action is currently being performed (see example below). III-18 v 2. the masterball you use will have the number 1. The information there depend on the installed hardware. The same applies also to an already existing part program. you will be able to enter the number of the masterball. the scanning is already defined by determining the MPP Factors.. choose to use this possibility.. g. it is impossible to calibrate all probes with one masterball only.. In all these cases you would get wrong measurement results.4 III-19 . This method cannot be applied but for learnable part program commands used for calibration (for details refer to Define Masterball Position). 5. In our example the probe designated X is the probe that cannot reach the first masterball. when the probe tip used is so small that there is a potential risk of the probing action being performed with the shank of the probe.04 Use this symbol to activate the loop counter. if it is impossible for all defined probes to approach the masterball.. List to select the ball (position only is stored). v 2.1 Several Masterballs: Introduction This function enables you to calibrate the probes with one or more masterballs in different positions. Calibrate probe X against the second masterball. Define the position of the second masterball using probe Y. Probe Y is the probe that reached both masterballs. e. Another need for this function could arise also.2 Define Masterball Position Recommendation For some fundamental information on the topic „Several Masterballs“ we recommend you first refer to the chapter Introduction Procedure Use the „Menu bar / Probe / Define Masterball Position“ to get to the dialogue.Several Masterballs 5 Several Masterballs 5. Here the following inputs are possible: Diameter of masterball (is stored) Number of masterball 14. Calibrate probe Y against the first masterball. The use of this function may be advisable where. Such a situation may occur.09. Calibration of number 1 probe defines automatically the position of the first masterball. The sequence is performed in the following steps: Calibrate probe 1 and define the position of the first master ball. 09. If this is not the case. Gaps are permitted among these numbers. the difference between the masterballs will be temperature-compensated. the definition of other masterballs will not be possible.0. Where the position of the reference masterball is not defined. In this case you will get an error message. This should be avoided. A part program defining several masterball positions has to be written with the temperature coefficient 0.4 14.Several Masterballs Further hints The maximum number allowed for the master ball is 100. For details refer also to the topics Re-Calibrate from Memory Re-Calibrate Single Probe Manual Calibration III-20 v 2.04 . rotary table).g. The CMM changes automatically to manual mode.4 III-21 . probe tree changes. an error occurs when a probe is being changed. however. Then you realise.04 v 2. that the subsequent measurements can be performed using the previous probe. Should you already have performed the change and the measurement as well. for instance. In order to avoid collisions. For further details refer to the topics Cancel Probe Change: Details and Tips Rotary Table: Hints.: "Attention! Probe is being changed". Regarding the general sequence (cancel probe changes.1 Cancel Probe Change: Sequence If. This warning cannot be deleted. you need to delete the measurement results you have got by mistake.2. you may need to cancel probe change. The CMM will immediately resume the CNC operation. that you do not want this change to happen. move the CMM into a safe position and then click OK. and then click on this symbol. In cases where you have connected a swivel-type probing system. A warning comes up: e.09. you first get a safety query. 14. Ö Click on the "Step Back" symbol in the repeat mode.Cancel Probe Change 6 Cancel Probe Change 6. and rotate table) You work with a probe (probe tree or rotary table) in the CNC mode and intend to make a probe change. beginning from version 2. The CMM changes to the previously used probe (probe tree. Ö Click on the "Delete Last Step" symbol in the learn mode. In this case it is ensured. For each of the indexing table position. a fixed table co-ordinate system is loaded. the CMM position is updated. The status line is updated with the current. namely directly prior to changing a probe tree. Indexing rotary table Furthermore.4 14. provided the table is of the indexing type. The "Cancel Table Rotation" command reverts the sense of rotation and turns the co-ordinate system back (if used). the CMM is not moved back into the previous position.. causes the probe to lose its definition. Only then probe change is cancelled. the data in the result box to be deleted.3 Rotary Table: Hints In case the CMM has not been moved into a safe position. you will get the error message "CMM not in safe position relative to rotary table". Tip: In the repeat mode.2 Cancel Probe Change: Details and Tips For cancelling probes (cancelling probe tree) you should know that cancelling in a loop first deletes all repeats. Indexing-type rotary tables are tables which rotate only by fixed degree increments (e. Performance limits When you have deleted an intermediate position.. 90-degree increments). Depending on the new settings.04 . III-22 v 2.Cancel Probe Change 6. 6.g. Output Going back in the part program causes . correct probe number (probe tree number).09. this command reloads the previously used co-ordinate system. we recommend the use of the "Program Jump" function in cases where you want to skip more than one program line. Cancelling a probe change. including: • • • • • ACR (RS232C) ACR (IEEE) ACR3 Manual changer Virtual changer Hint Master Racks always pick up complete probe trees.or RS232-interface) 7. Examples of probe trees with which the master rack can be fitted: • • • 14.09.4 III-23 . Combinations of probe change systems are configured via the definition program “Rack definition” and are subsequently measured in GEOPAK. This serves to realise an automated and quick change of components as well as automated measurement tasks that have to be performed with different probes. MCOSMOS supports the following types of probe change systems: FCR25 MCR20 SCR200 SCR600 SCR6 SCR80 Manual changer Virtual changer ACR3 ACR (with GPIB.04 TP20 with probe SP25M with SM25-1 and SH25-1 SP25M with TM25-20 and TP20-probe v 2. For more information.1 Combination of Racks / Introduction GEOPAK allows the combination of different racks.Combination of Racks 7 Combination of Racks 7. also refer to the topic "Change Probe Tree".2 Combination of Racks / Definitions Master Rack These racks pick up components with the interface PAA. the manual or the virtual changer.4 14. III-24 v 2. SM25-3 and TM25-20. SCR200. One joint port each for SM25-1. The TP20-probe can be deposited both in the MCR20 and in the FCR 25. Hint A probe extension module (PEM). Leave those "Ports for parking" empty. Define the "Ports for parking" as places of deposit for ports.g. On the other hand it is possible that two ports of the ACR access the same subrack. Therefore. which can be accessed before any other probe tree is supported in the ACR (but not in the ACR3). SH25-2 and SH25-3.Combination of Racks Ports for parking Because the master racks always pick up complete probe trees. One port each for parking for TP200-probes. Further topics: "Definition of Sub-Racks" "Probe Extension Module "PEM"". SM25-2. PE1). These allocations are required for each type of component. SCR600 can also be defined and used as so-called "sub-racks" of either the ACR. components must first be deposited in alternating cycles before new components can be picked up. 7.09. E. you need • • • • Hint One port each for parking for TP20-probes. one ACR port may be equipped with a TP200 without extension and another ACR port with a TP200 with extension (e.04 .3 Sub-Racks The racks MCR20. One joint port each for SH25-1.g. Both TP200 exchange the styli in the same SCR200. Combination of Racks 7. Enter the number of the probe tree you want and confirm. After the change of probe tree. you call the change of probe. Manual Change Ö Via the Probe/Change of Probe menu item. see details of Manual Tool Changer with Following Rack).g. e. confirm in the "Manual Change of Probe Tree" window.4 Manual and Virtual Changer A manual changer can be used if you wish to exchange the probe system and there is no ACR available. By confirming this. with the RMV camera system and the PH10.5 Manual Change We must distinguish between an exclusively manual change and a tool changer with a following rack (e. 14.09. You get a window with the information to the change of probe tree and the probe tree no. 7. you must switch off the probe signal on the joystick box and change the tree. Ö After that. in the title bar). SCR 200. Ö Now.g. the machine control of the CMM registers the new probe system. used at the same time.04 v 2. proceed as for the selection of probe. Two examples: TP200 and SP600 TP2 and QVP A virtual changer is used if the probe system is to be changed but a physical exchange is not necessary.4 III-25 . Now. The virtual changer is also used for the offline creation of part programs. you get the "Change Probe" window (probe tree no. Move the mouse to the port number and click the right mouse button.8 Probe Extension Module "PEM" If an ACR. Make sure to enter the offset by which the probe system is extended in X. Y and Z direction. You wish to change with the probe tip from port 3 (following rack 2) to the SP 600.04 . In the "Port Settings" select "PEM". The probe tree with its component has the number 11. III-26 v 2. TP20 or SP600 you can define the corresponding sub-rack.09. The active tree is tree TP 200 with the probe tip of port 4 (following rack 1). Definition of Sub-Racks If an ACR. the probe is automatically deposited in port 4 and the parked probe from port 1 is changed in. Its number is 14. additional sub-racks to change the styli can be defined. The figure in brackets indicates the number by which you can address the probe including the extension. If you select a TP200. a manual or a virtual changer is used. you can also use the automatically changeable extension "PEM". refer to the topic "Manual Change". Also the SP 600 has set up the port for parking.6 Manual Change with Following Rack The sequence of operations for this configuration is described in an example. Double-click on the port number to open the dialogue box "Port Settings". The port for parking is port 1. a manual or a virtual changer is used. see Rack Definition.7 Ö In following rack 1 (SCR 200). The same applies to port 1. Initially you have a "Master rack" (manual changer) and the following racks 1 (SCR 200) and 2 (SCR 600). The number of the new probe tree is 23. Ö In the following rack 2 (SCR 600). Ö Now you have to perform the probe tree change from number 11 to number 21 manually (for detailed information. the probe is automatically deposited in the port for parking and the probe of port 3 is picked up (probe tree change from 21 to 23). 7. Proceed according to the following three steps: 7. The rack is added by a simple click on the icon. The probe tree with the component that will be deposited here has the number 21.4 14. The "Insert" dialogue box will be opened.Combination of Racks 7. To change the rack-specific parameters. The operator must have the user right to execute "Rack alignment" in GEOPAK. We recommend studying the Readme file in this directory carefully. In the repeat mode this command will be executed even if the operator does not have this right. The part programs for the alignment of the racks and for the conversion of the data are available on the MCOSMOS CD under "AlignRacks". SCR600 are measured by part programs.09. MCR20. The operator is guided through the measurement by pictures independent of the language. SCR200. The delivered part programs already contain the command "Convert rack data".Combination of Racks 7. After the measurement the positions are converted by the learnable command "Convert rack data". 14.04 v 2. SCR600 The rack types MCR20. Therefore no additional action is necessary after the execution of the part programs. The command "ACR alignment" is not learnable. To execute the command "Convert rack data" in the learn or edit mode the operator must have the user right to execute "Rack alignment" in GEOPAK.9 Rack Alignment ACR The alignment (measurement) of the ACR is achieved in the single/learn mode via the pull-down menu "Probe / ACR alignment". SCR200.4 III-27 . You can find more information to this subject under "Calibrate Probe Change System". in which the rack position has been stored.04 . you select in the "Rack Data File" list box the ASCII file.09.4 14. You determine the length (l) out of the tables of stylus and stylus extensions. GEOPAK must know the position of the probe change system. The format of this ASCII file and the order of the necessary positions in this ASCII file can be taken out of the examples of part programs you find on the MCOSMOS-CD under "AlignRacks". the position data will be converted in a format meeting the requirements of the CMM.10 Convert Rack Data In order to automatically change the probe tip. III-28 v 2. which you will find on the MCOSMOS-CD under "AlignRacks". "Length of Probe" List Box Enter the length of the stylus (l) in the "Length of Probe" list box. "Convert Rack Data" List Box In the "Convert Rack Data" dialogue window. Through the "Convert Rack Data" command.Combination of Racks 7. You determine this position by calibrating the probe change system by means of an example of a part program. you come to the "Convert Rack Data" dialogue window. "Convert Rack Data" Dialogue Window Via the "Menu Bar / Probe". Ö Ö For this. the reference position will be automatically stored. 1. proceed as follows: Ö Measure the masterball with the reference probe (probe no. 1). Mitutoyo provides examples of part programs you can find on the MCOSMOS-CD under "AlignRacks". Set origin Continue as follows: Ö Measure the reference sphere with probe no. click on the "Set Origin after Probe Change" radio button. Ö After that. Determine Reference Position Requirement: You only can set the origin after the probe change if the system knows the reference position. Ö For this. click on the "Determine Reference Position (Masterball)" radio button. This is necessary because different probe combinations have a different weight and thus the origin is different.09.11 Set Advanced MPP100 Data Starting-situation: You use the MPP100 together with the probe change system SCR6. probe tree no. 14. Ö After that.04 v 2. you can call these part programs to automatically measure the masterball and to set the origin.Combination of Racks 7. the origin must be re-determined. To be able to determine the reference position. After having changed the probe combination. Select the corresponding "Sphere" reference element in the list box and confirm. After the change of probe tree. Hint This determination of the reference position must always be repeated after the following cases: • If the rack has been re-aligned or • the rack position has been changed or • if the reference probe has been changed. set the origin in the "Set Advanced MPP100 Data" dialogue window. By this. 1 of the current probe tree. select the corresponding "Sphere" reference element in the list box and confirm.4 III-29 . 18 . the following entry must be made in the MctrlWin. the figure 100 is added to the configuration number. III-30 v 2.. 15. To this end you are required to make a change in the dialogue window designated "Position". You don’t need any longer a controller incl. the numbers are fixed for each rack.24 . see Change Probe Tree.4 14. 23 becomes 123.13 Numbering Method of Probe Configurations The numbering method described below is applicable up to MCOSMOS version 2. this distance will be entered at installation in the "Change Direction" window by the service-engineer..04 . It is. Beginning from the Version 2. In this case he only needs to perform the definition himself but is free to select (also refer to the topic "Configuration with the SCR200 "). For the ACR 3. you always must define the probe tree numbers. The former numbering method was sequential without gaps.1.. You access this dialogue window through the "PartManager / Menu bar / Tools / Rack Definition / Movement Parameters". Certainly. When using a probe extension (PEM).8.8..e. Enter the number 8 into the column "Number of Available Ports" and confirm. The new numbering method of probe configurations (using the rack definition program) is carried out in steps of 10. 21. the expensive cabling.4 or upwards.14.2 you can use two ACR-3 modules in order for you to have more than four different probing systems at your disposal. On principle.4.3.Ini: [ToolChgMain] AskGeo3=1 Afterwards the former GEOPAK-3 numbering method can be selected in the rack definition program (File / GEO-3).12 Calibrate ACR 3 You only can use the ACR 3 from version 2. 11 becomes 111... i. Example (ACR.Combination of Racks 7. SCR200. 9. 7. For more information. basically possible that each customer continues with the numbering method he has grown used to – also when working with version 2.16.e. however. This selection is only possible if no configuration has been defined before. as starting with version 2. SCR600): New method 1.09. 11. there is an essential improvement with the ACR 3: To calculate the position where the probe is situated we had to determine till now the distance of the stylus for the recording of the probe (PAA) at a "Masterball" on the rack. i. independent of the previous rack. Former method 1. If the former numbering method is requested even when using the rack definition program. you proceed as already described in the topic Calibrate the Change Probe System . 4 III-31 . SM25-2.09. Basically. In this case. You get to the dialogue "Port settings". Use the right mouse key to select the option "Define probe tree" from the context menu. also the probe tip can be changed. You get to the dialogue window "Define probe tree". 14. The measurement takes place in GEOPAK. If the component is from the master rack or the FCR 25.04 v 2. you have to define the configuration in the definition program. For this. Characteristic features of the FCR25 If no master rack has been defined. you have to define a "Port for parking" also for the probe tips. SM25-3 and TM25-20.14 Rack Definition Start the definition program for the probe change system (Rack Definition) from the PartManager via the menu "Settings / Rack Definition". Define the combination in the definition program. SM25-3 and TM25-20.Combination of Racks 7. Hint: The rack definition program is installed together with GEOPAK. Hint If you want to change a probe tree configuration that has already been defined. SM25-2. click in the dialogue "Rack definition" on the required line at the bottom of the table". If a master rack has been defined. Then you can define the components of master racks or FCR 25 with a double click on the desired component. In this case you need to define the "Port for parking". Before starting the probe change system. Define the probe tree number at the top right in the dialogue. Proceed as follows: Ö Ö Highlight a component in the master rack. Before you can confirm the dialogue "Rack definition". Also read the topic "Calibrate Measurement Probe". Ö Combine the probe tree using the buttons "Add" and "Delete". you need to define the probe trees. also define the "Port for parking" for the probe. Procedure Select all racks you intend to use from the program "Rack Definition" via the menu bar / "Changer" / "Add / Delete". start the probe tree definition with one of these components: SM25-1. you have the option to change the components SM25-1. the user must have already been assigned the user right "Tools" in the PartManager. the programme offers a range of additional options to structure the probe trees.09.4 14. you need no longer care about where the individual components have been parked (parking ports) after the learn mode or where from to get the individual components. You can. SP25M). for example select the probe tree numbers freely and assign individual names to the components for recognition. As regards the window "Define probe tree".04 .Combination of Racks 7. you only need to consider some factors when defining the probe trees: To be at all able to perform a probe change. III-32 v 2. you should know that only those components are offered in this window that can actually be used.4.15 Options with the FCR25 Starting with MCOSMOS version 2.g. Particularly. modules and probe systems can be changed in this rack. the flexible fitting of the FCR25 is supported. Probe tips. the relevant probe trees must have previously been defined with a probe tree number. To guarantee a smooth operation. For defining your probe trees you must always start with the basic components from the masterrack (e. If you wish to perform a probe tree change in GEOPAK. With a click on the line "Rack1:SCR200". the right hand part of the window displays complete rack specific parameters.16 Configuration with the SCR200 To clarify the processes. from rack direction to approach speed (see ill. i. click in the menu "Changer" (Racks) on "Add/Delete". 14.09. Example 1 (SCR200): Proceed as follows: Ö In the window 'Rack definition'. an exemplary rack combination (ACR3 + two times FCR25). go to the topic "Configuration with the ACR and Two Times FCR25 ". Ö In the following window "Add/Delete". For information regarding the second example. an example with a rack (SCR200) and second.Combination of Racks 7. The list underneath defines six ports that are each equipped with the probe TP200. we use two examples: first. Back in the window "Rack definition" you see that the SCR200 has been defined as Rack1.4 III-33 . then send it via the function "Add" to the page "Selected components" and confirm.04 v 2. below). click in the list "Available components" on the SCR200.e. the right hand part of the window displays information about • • the change speed in the port and the probe tree component.4.04 . and three options appear with which you can change the parameters: • • • Rack direction PH10 angle Movement parameters (for detailed information. and two options appear: • Define probe tree number Starting with version 2. The probe tree numbers and the components are shown in a list in the window "Rack definition " (see ill. • Port Settings(for further information. above). the probe tree numbers must always be defined.4 14. refer to the topic "Rack Specific Parameters and Positions " Probe Tree Number / Port Settings A click with the right mouse key on a port.09. Rack Parameter A click with the right mouse key on the rack line. click on the topic) III-34 v 2.Combination of Racks When clicking on one of the ports. Please note that in future you always have the free choice of these numbers. In our example.04 v 2.Combination of Racks 7.09. always proceed as described for example 1 in the topic "Configuration with the SCR200". For how to fit the racks.4 III-35 .17 Configuration with the ACR3 and Two Times FCR25 To perform this configuration. 14. the racks are fitted as shown in the illustration below. refer to the topic "Definition of Probe Change Systems (Rack Definition)". with the exception that in this case three racks are selected. Port01. pay attention not to change to an empty port.g. among other things. which is accessed before and after the change cycle. • Distance to sensor: The distance to the sensor of the SCR200 can be corrected. Approach speed: Defines the speed of the CMM when approaching the rack. Movement parameters: • Safety position: Defines the position (in CMM coordinates). speed during change cycle: Defines the speed of the CMM when entering a port. for long styli) to avoid a false triggering when opening a lid.4 14. • Number of accessible ports: If not all ports are equipped with a probe or a stylus. • Distance to rack: Defines the distance of the CMM to the rack during the change cycle. Rack direction: Defines the position of the rack on the CMM.g. To select a changer choose "File / New Configuration".04 . To change the parameters double-click on the corresponding icon (e. The value is given relative to the rack. Sometimes this speed must be reduced (e.09. rack direction or safety position). PH9/10 Angles: Defines the angle the probe head moves to before changing (accessing the rack).18 Rack Specific Parameters and Positions The definition of your new change system configuration requires that you enter.Combination of Racks 7. several rack specific parameters. III-36 v 2. 04 v 2. If appropriate.e.09. 14. With a further click (right mouse key) on Port01.Combination of Racks 7. i. • • • • module is subject to change and stylus is subject to change. Confirm.4 III-37 .19 Port Settings In a first step you must perform some settings for the port. 1 and no. you must change the number of the rack with parking port or the number of the parking port. In the following window (see ill. 2 (see also the topic "Definition of Probe Change Systems (Rack Definition)") and confirm. it is important that you activate both options. below). you define in the following window the probe trees no. . .....2 8 Direction of a Plane .................. 5 Patterns for Alignment ......................................................................................................2 Align Axis Parallel to Axis .........4 IV-1 ......................................6 3 Three steps ... 6 Alignment by Single Steps ...................................................................................... 8 Alignment in Space ........................... 16 4 Create Origin.............................. 18 Origin in Element .................... 9 2........................... 12 Alignment in Space by Cylinder or Cone ....................................................... 22 Types of Co-ordinate Systems.....................3 7 RPS Alignment: Background................. 20 Operation....6 2 Three Methods ....................................................................................... 20 General Rule ........ 10 Alignment in Space by Plane...1............4 2............................................................ 9 Procedure ...................5 1................. 18 5...........................................................04 Polar Co-Ordinates: Change Planes ................1.............. 15 Align Axis through Point.................... 4 Store/Load Table Co-Ordinate System ...........4 1.1 1........................................................................................................................................................... 12 Alignment in Space by Line ....... 18 RPS Alignment ..1 7...........................2 2............3 2............................2 6........................................2 6 Move and Rotate Co-ordinate System ........................................ 13 Align Axis ............1 5...... 7 Create Co-ordinate System through Best Fit .........................................................................1 2............................................................................ 20 6...... 2 1.........Workpiece Alignment IV Workpiece Alignment Contents 1 Workpiece Alignment......................................................................................................................................2 1...09... 15 3....5 2........................................................... 17 5 Workpiece alignment: Further options........ 20 Workpiece Alignment: Further Options ................................. 23 8.............. 22 7............... 9 Measurement strategy................... 25 v 2........................... 2 1.......2 1......... 22 List of Elements ...........1 3........................................ 2 New co-ordinate system........................................................................................1 6..3 1...................................................... 3 Store/Load Co-Ordinate System........1 Define Co-Ordinate System ...............................1 14........... 1 Three Methods The upper part gives an option of three methods: Alignment Patterns Machine co-ordinate system Co-ordinate system from archive If you do not need exact alignment. just click the symbol shown above. start with the machine co-ordinate system.04 . Then. or get a list of all stored coordinate systems by a click on the arrow symbol of the input field. You have selected the necessary probe and get the dialogue window "Define co-ordinate system". 1.4 14. you should make sure that the part is fixed to the machine in such a way that it cannot move.Workpiece Alignment 1 Workpiece Alignment 1. The third possibility is to use one of the alignment patterns to construct a coordinate system. Now you can either input the number directly. IV-2 v 2.1. or you have to use a more complex way of alignment not covered by the patterns.1 Define Co-Ordinate System Before you start to measure the elements for alignment. just click here and confirm. Then you can select from the list. too.09. If you need a co-ordinate system from the archive. Circle. Circle. this next window allows you to select (or change) the elements you are going to measure for alignment. in the lower line. Point.1. you find eight patterns frequently used for the initial alignment of a part.Workpiece Alignment 1. Line (origin in centre of circle) Plane. Before you opt for the pattern. first measure single elements. Point (origin on line) Circle or cylinder can be replaced by ellipse or cone. Circle Plane.09. Line. a plane determines the axis in space. Line.4 IV-3 . If none of these patterns applies to your case.2 New co-ordinate system In the dialogue window "define co-ordinate system". see Alignment by Single Steps). you should inform yourself about details of the possibilities regarding Patterns for Alignment . Circle. Point (origin on axis of cylinder) Cylinder. axes in space (cylinder or cone) are used to create the direction in space.04 v 2. Line Plane. This is done in the window appearing after you have made the first decision on the pattern. In the upper line. and then align your part using them by the co-ordinate system functions of the menu bar (for more details. Point Cylinder. 14. Point Cylinder. Circle. Line (origin on line) Cylinder. Plane. Line. . If you want to measure parts on one or more pallets. or input your own data for. which are erased each time you start a new run. and confirm. they are used to enable a CNC run without manual alignment.09. this gives you an indication about the quality of the alignment.Workpiece Alignment In this window. IV-4 v 2. you proceed the same way.. You can either accept the suggestions. refer to details of "Pallet CoOrdinate-System" and the following subjects. Just click the symbol. Normally. For details to store or load a pallet co-ordinate system. At "Load Co-Ordinate System". the measured elements. Permanent (archive) co-ordinate systems correspond to fixed positions on the CMM table.e. are listed in the result window. input the selected number. If you do not store at this point. Beginning from Version 2. The suggestion for the number of measurement points is always the minimum number required for the element plus one. The results.2. there will be separate functions with their own dialogues provided for the options "Save/Load Table Co-Ordinate System". i.04 .4 14. the memory number of the co-ordinate system. Temporary co-ordinate systems are those created during the part program run. The co-ordinate system which is constructed this way can be immediately stored. see details of "Pallet CoOrdinate System".. you can do so later via the menu bar "Co-ordinate system / Store co-ordinate system". GEOPAK suggests the elements and a way of measuring. the memory number of the element.2 Store/Load Co-Ordinate System When storing co-ordinate systems. They can be used later for all types of further evaluation. 1. we distinguish temporary and permanent coordinate systems. the name of the element. the number of measurement points and.. Thus it determines a position on the CMM table.3 Store/Load Table Co-Ordinate System Already in the default settings made in the PartManager you decide which options you take regarding the table co-ordinate system (menu bar / settings / default settings / programs / KMG / GEOPAK / settings GEOPAK / menu functions). e. already in the manager program the workpieces can be related to a table co-ordinate system from the archive. The pallet co-ordinate system.09. may be provided with stops. which. For further details see "Pallet Co-Ordinate System". A table co-ordinate system relates to the origin of the CMM.04 v 2. the table co-ordinate system determines the position of the pallet. for instance. Great importance is attached particularly to the table co-ordinate systems with the manager programs. where several workpieces are clamped at different positions on the CMM. Regarding this topic. determines the position of the (different) workpieces on the pallet.Workpiece Alignment 1. 14. In GEOPAK.4 IV-5 . you access these functions through the "Menu bar / Co-Ordinate System/ Save / Load Table Co-Ordinate System". refer also to Save/Load Co-Ordinate System . Click the table co-ordinate system in this list. in turn. In these cases. In a pallet-based operation.g. Point. If you use two probing points for the second point. The pattern "Plane. most of the initial alignments are made using one of the following eight methods (patterns). Line" defines the axis in space by the measured plane. Point" defines the axis in space by the measured cylinder. The pattern "Cylinder. the origin is the centre of the first circle. the origin is the centre of the circle.4 Patterns for Alignment In practical applications. The measured line gives the direction of the x-axis. The pattern "Cylinder. The line gives the direction of the x-axis. and you probe on the right and left flank. Line. The pattern "Plane. Circle. Line (origin in circle)" defines the axis in space by the measured plane. Line (origin on line)" defines the axis in space by the measured plane. Point (origin on the cylinder axis)" defines the axis in space by the measured cylinder. the single point determines the Z-height of the origin. Circle" defines the axis in space by the measured plane.09. The pattern "Plane. Using these patterns makes easier and simpler set up of a co-ordinate system (cf. The direction of the x-axis is from the origin through the centre of the circle.4 14. the single point determines the Z-height of the origin. Point" defines the axis in space by the measured cylinder. it is the centre of the circle projected to the line. Circle. Circle. The pattern "Plane. the first single point determines the Z-height of the origin. The origin is on the axis of the cylinder. Circle. The line gives the direction of the x-axis. you can use this to align a gear.04 . also Define Co-ordinate System ). The direction of the x-axis is from the origin through the second measured point. IV-6 v 2. Line. the origin is on the line. The pattern "Cylinder. The first line gives the direction of the x-axis. The line gives the direction of the x-axis from the first circle centre to the second.Workpiece Alignment 1. The origin is on the axis of the cylinder. the origin is the intersection of the two lines. The origin is on the axis of the cylinder. the measurements are recorded in the result window (cf. Ö 14. However.Workpiece Alignment The pattern "Cylinder.04 Measure the F3 plane. 1. one axis within this plane. the base plane). To open the dialogue box click on this icon or choose "Coordinate system / Align axis parallel to axis" from the menu bar.g. v 2. Create the intersection line between F1 and F2 for "Axis Alignment". In the "Align Plane" dialogue box choose OK to confirm. Ö Ö Measure the F2 plane. The measured line gives the direction of the x-axis. Then. You can switch between the element types by the icons of the following dialogue window. you must do it systematically. Circle or Cylinder can be replaced by ellipse or cone.4 IV-7 . Measure the F1 plane for the plane alignment.09.5 Alignment by Single Steps In order to perform a complete alignment. also Define Co-Ordinate System ). Line. the single point determines the Z-height of the origin. the machine co-ordinate system to start with. The origin is on the axis of the cylinder. measure the elements. the axis in space (in other words. if your part does not suit for the use of one of these patterns. The origin is projected to the line. and the origin must be determined. This is done by the alignment patterns by using a single command. The following example shows these steps: Ö Ö Select e. Point (origin on the line)" defines the axis in space by the measured cylinder. To open the dialogue box click on this icon or choose "Coordinate system / Align plane" from the menu bar. 6 Create Co-ordinate System through Best Fit If you want to create a co-ordinate system via best fit. Then you can input the number of the co-ordinate system in the field next to the symbol. 1. proceed as described under "Best fit with a fixed number of points " or "Best fit with a variable number of points ".09.Workpiece Alignment Ö Create the intersection point between F3 and the intersection line for the zero point determination. To open the dialogue box click on this icon or choose "Coordinate system / Create origin" from the menu bar. in the first window "Best fit" you activate the check box "coordinate system". If you want to store the co-ordinate system.4 14. However. you activate the symbol.04 . IV-8 v 2. and then activate "alignment". if this is not sufficient. Axis alignment.2 Measurement strategy Now you can decide your procedure according to the actual measurement task (drawing. there are cases that cannot be matched with one of these patterns. 2. and made before these steps. you can measure the elements for alignment manually. you take a point in space and declare this the origin. however. However.09. Origin. 14.4 IV-9 . you proceed in three steps. or in other words a reference plane (usually XY plane). and then afterwards align your co-ordinate system by these. you create the axis in space. and you measure the element then. If the window for space alignment is displayed. You should start with the element necessary for the alignment in space. Alignment in space.04 v 2.Alignment in Space 2 Alignment in Space For the most ordinary cases. therefore GEOPAK has also the possibility to align by other means. and the number of points each. In many cases. 2.1 Three steps Basically.). memory number. The determination of the origin can be independent of the two other steps. etc. you need to determine an axis in the reference plane (mostly the x-axis). You must close the window and open it again. position of the part on the machine. For the alignment in space. you use elements. The simplest way is to use one of the Patterns for Alignment . which determine as well the rotation in space as one or two components of the origin. the list of elements in the selection box is not yet updated. Here you must define your measurement strategy. GEOPAK proposes the Patterns for Alignment . you can use following elements: Alignment in Space by Plane Alignment in Space by Cylinder/Cone Alignment in Space by Line You should also know: The elements are stored in the Element List with a symbol. However. 09.g. Ö In most cases.3 Procedure Ö You come to the window for space alignment by the menu bar/coordinate system and the function alignment in space. circles or spheres. This is not the complete list as it only contains elements. you also select "Origin in Element" by clicking the symbol. you open a list of elements. cylinder.04 . Z=0 P = new origin (Z = minus) IV-10 v 2.Alignment in Space 2. Then you decide your co-ordinate plane (XY-. cone. or XZ-plane). Ö By the arrow key of the dialogue window. YZ-. which can be used for alignment in space.4 14. or line). You also can click on the symbol. not e. Ö Ö Select the element (plane. just click "Origin to Element" off. Normally.Alignment in Space Example 1 The plane (cf. In this case "Origin in Element" means that the origin in x and y is set to the cylinder axis. the positive direction runs from the first to the last measurement point. This is also true for the Patterns for Alignment. drawing above) determines the axis in space. If you do not want this. Example 2 The cylinder axis (cf.09. The positive direction of a cone always runs from the apex into the cone. they must be determined by some other elements. here the XY plane. here the xy plane. the z height of the origin is still open and has to be determined by some other element afterwards. drawing above) is used for the axis in space. the origins in x and y direction are still unchanged. The direction of a cylinder is determined by the sequence of probing. Then "Origin in Element" means that Z is set to zero for all points of the plane. 14. the example for the cylinder axis is also valid for the axis of a cone.4 IV-11 . After this. then the origin stays where it has been before.04 v 2. select the measured plane. You measure . By clicking the symbol or via the menu bar (elements / cylinder).4 Alignment in Space by Plane The Alignment in Space can be achieved by means of a plane.09. After you confirm. or cone. After the Alignment in Space by a plane. also Alignment in Space by Cylinder/Cone and Alignment in Space by Line . The resulting element is stored in the element list. this plane is made the base plane of your co-ordinate system. different from the alignment by a cylinder or a line. A line can only be used if it is a line in space.g.Alignment in Space 2. IV-12 v 2.4 14.04 . you define the element as usual (measure or construct). via the symbol . 2. in other words a "Connection Element" (cf. Then you activate the alignment in space. also Alignment in Space by Plane and Alignment in Space by Line ).5 Alignment in Space by Cylinder or Cone The Alignment in Space can be achieved by a plane or the axis of a cylinder or cone (cf. a cylinder.e. In the dialogue window. the result of the measurement is stored in the element list. the axis in space always points out of the material. the sequence of measurement does not affect the result.the plane. 2. you need for creating the line will be measured not projected. Activate the element line by the icon. By "Alignment in Space by Line" you will get a not projected line (Symbol ). the positive direction is always the direction from the apex into the cone.Alignment in Space Then. proceed accordingly. When applying the Alignment in Space.4 IV-13 . The positive direction is determined by the probing sequence of the cylinder: from the first to the last measured point. 14. the axis of a cylinder or cone.6 Alignment in Space by Line The Alignment in Space can be achieved by a plane. also Alignment in Space by Plane and Alignment in Space by cylinder/cone). you can select the connection element. or by a line (cf. you activate the element line. When applying the Alignment in Space for a cone. you can only use a line in space. In the subsequent window. click and select the cylinder as the axis in space. the axis of the cylinder becomes the z-axis of the co-ordinate system. Take care that the elements. the intersection element. Therefore you cannot use a measured line.04 v 2.09. a measured line is always projected. If a cone defines the axis. or the symmetry element. Using the icon or the menu bar. Then you get the element definition window. For the alignment in space. example below). the centre points of two circles or ellipses. symmetry lines of lines in space. e.g.09.04 . 1 = plane 1 2 = plane 2 3 = intersection line IV-14 v 2.4 14.Alignment in Space You can use intersection lines of two planes (cf. and lines connected from points in space. 09. Origin on axis Click on this icon if the axis should not only be aligned parallel with the element but should be positioned exactly on the element. The co-ordinate system will be rotated around the Z axis until the X axis or Y axis is positioned parallel to the element. line. 14. cylinder or cone (measurement.Align Axis 3 Align Axis 3. ellipse. Before you execute this function carry out the plane alignment. Ö To open the dialogue box click on this icon or choose "Coordinate system / Align axis parallel to axis" from the menu bar. Ö Ö To choose an element click on the corresponding icon.). The selected element will be projected into the X/Y plane. You can choose between four alignment elements each of which with a defined axis.1 Align Axis Parallel to Axis The function "Align axis parallel to axis" is used if the co-ordinate system should be positioned horizontally to a certain axis. The axis alignment determines one of the two axes to be positioned horizontally to the plane.4 IV-15 .04 v 2. In this example the Z axis is the plane axis. In the "Co-or. Ö First determine the alignment element. In this case the coordinate system is rotated and afterwards moved until the origin is positioned on the element.-Plane-Axis" group box determine the axis (X or Y) you wish to align with the element at a click on the corresponding icon. theoretical etc. You can choose between four alignment elements each of which with a defined point.Align Axis 3. The selected element will be projected into the X/Y plane. theoretical etc. ellipse.04 .). Ö Ö To choose an element click on the corresponding icon.4 14. Offset alignment Click on this icon and enter a value if the axis should not pass the point but should be positioned in a certain distance to the point.-Plane-Axis" group box determine the axis (X or Y) which should pass the point of the element at a click on the corresponding icon. In the "Co-or. cylinder or cone (measurement. The co-ordinate system will be rotated around the Z axis until the X axis or Y axis passes this point. Ö First determine the alignment element.2 Align Axis through Point The function "Align axis through point" is used if a co-ordinate axis should pass a certain point. Ö To open the dialogue box click on this icon or choose "Coordinate system / Align axis through point" from the menu bar. In this example the Z axis is the plane axis. The axis alignment determines one of the two axes to be positioned horizontally to the plane.09. Before you execute this function carry out the plane alignment. line. IV-16 v 2. The co-ordinate system will be rotated so that the point is positioned with the determined distance to the axis. which contains this point. With these icons you determine in which axis the element coordinate is set to zero. Z=-3. It may occur that the position of the origin may be changed accidentally. Ö In the dialogue box choose the type of alignment element.04 v 2. Ö Click on this icon or choose "Co-ordinate system / Create origin" from the menu bar. The origin is positioned in this plane. GEOPAK sets all selected axes to zero. Ö Measure the element. which determines this origin first. If you measure a circle below this plane (Z=-3) the program would position this co-ordinate on the measuring height. you can choose the "Create origin" function to align the co-ordinate system with the element. 14. For some elements (circle). i.e.Create Origin 4 Create Origin If your drawing has been measured from a certain origin. two axes are available only. The text box indicates the element measured last. Ö If you wish to choose another element click on the arrow of the list box and make your selection from the elements listed.09. Example: You have selected all three axes and have determined the X/Y plane by a measured plane. however.4 IV-17 . In this case the Z axis should not have been selected. This can be done for each axis individually. Z=0 P = new origin (z = minus. Ö In the text box enter the angle and click on the icon of the axis (axes) you wish to rotate. If you select "Origin to Element". depending on the element.. If you wish to rotate first and then move.04 . Open the dialogue box again. one or more co-ordinates of the origin can also be determined by this element. Ö In the dialogue box enter the values in the X. However.Workpiece alignment: Further options 5 5. If you wish to move and to rotate and you have entered the requested values in the dialogue box the co-ordinate system will always be moved first and then rotated. the z-value of the co-ordinate system is also set to zero on IV-18 v 2.. above) determines the axis in space. the orientation properties (direction in space) are evaluated. move and confirm.09.1 Workpiece alignment: Further options Move and Rotate Co-ordinate System If you wish to move and rotate the co-ordinate system.) Example 1: The plane (cf. proceed as follows: Ö Click on the icon shown above or choose "Co-ordinate system / Move and rotate co-ordinate system" from the menu bar. The values differ from the ones obtained before. but goes passes through the origin. proceed as follows: 5. This is achieved by clicking the icon.2 Ö Ö Rotate first and confirm. This means that the element is not only parallel to the axes of the co-ordinate system. Y and Z text boxes. Origin in Element When you measure an element to determine the axis in space.4 14. 09. The other coordinates (x and y) must be determined differently. The z-value of the origin must be defined distinctly. e.4 IV-19 . in other words the xy plane. In other words. In this case.Workpiece alignment: Further options the plane. 14. the origin is shifted into the plane. above) determines the z-axis in space. Example 2: The axis of the cylinder (cf. by a circle.g. "origin to element" means that the x and y co-ordinates of the origin are set to the axis of the cylinder.04 v 2. the 6 degrees of freedom have to be removed. Therefore the designer usually designates specific points.04 .g. Ö Press the button(s) for those co-ordinates. the origin of the co-ordinate system being in the centre of the front axle. these points have certain co-ordinates given.4 14. 6. The sheet metal parts do not have any features. this means that normally 6 values must be given. the points are designated on the drawing. and the third determines one coordinate value. etc. e. this has to be transmitted to GEOPAK by buttons. Select the first reference point.). However.. Fxy for a point defining x and y. fixes. etc. and the co-ordinates written in the lower right corner. Furthermore. or z. y. In this case.1 RPS Alignment RPS Alignment: Background The RPS (Reference Point System) alignment is mainly used for sheet metal parts in a car. The values can be realised in different ways. centre of a circle thanks to a created plane) determines 3 values. you have to distinguish two cases: Case 1: Drawing and known RPS Points Usually.g. another 2. the tolerance for this co-ordinate is given as 0.3 Operation In a practical application. this means that 6 points are necessary. The distribution is such that one coordinate has 3 known values.09. v 2. In addition.0. The RPS alignment consists of constructing the transformation in such a way that the actually measured points have these pre-defined co-ordinate values. which have to be exactly determined (the drawing states "Tolerance = 0..RPS Alignment 6 6. This means that only 3 elements are necessary. As this can be any of the x. usually. two extreme are: each point only determines one value. this makes the operation somewhat complicated. which can be used for a conventional alignment. GEOPAK can handle as well the two extreme cases as all the others in between. proceed as follows: IV-20 Ö Measure the points on the part using the GEOPAK functions (compensated point. and enter the three nominal coordinates from the drawing.2 General Rule For a proper alignment. circle. 6.). one point (e. the label is something like 'Fz' for a z-value.0". Ö Ö Select "Co-ordinate System"/"RPS Alignment" in the menu bar. the second only 2. the drawing specifies which co-ordinate the point. or. intersection. and the last only one value. 3 for one of x. proceed as follows: Ö Ö Load the drawing in 3D-TOL. For each reference.it is necessary to first determine the nominal co-ordinates.09. even if they are not relevant for the alignment. Case 2: Only Data Set Given In this case . Use the function "Search Border Points" to find the nominal coordinates. Then press 'OK'. For the input of the co-ordinates. because they are needed internally. above). For this. or z.04 v 2.RPS Alignment Ö Enter the other values as well. and 1 for the last.4 IV-21 . Then proceed as in the case of given RPS points (cf. Send these points to GEOPAK by pressing the corresponding button in the window. 14. 2 for the next. Ö After all references have been input. Ö Ö Now measure close to your designated points in GEOPAK. you must activate the input by the button on the upper part of the input field. you can either take these values into variables (by the "formula calculation") or write them down and key them in.which happens frequently during demonstrations for customers . y. check the input: the number of pressed co-ordinate keys must be exactly 6. Ö Repeat the last 3 steps for the other references. Workpiece Alignment: Further Options 7 7. Here you can also find the number of points used to calculate the element (probing points for measured elements.X.4 14. also "Alignment in Space"). connection element. independent on the probing sequence (cf. For a measured plane.. point etc.2 List of Elements The list of elements contains all measured or calculated elements. etc. the memory number of the element. but you can also input the memory numbers you want in the dialogue window for the elements. 7.09. the name of the element. this always points out the material. or points of other elements for connection elements).) a graphical symbol of the type of construction (measured. It consists of four columns with the following contents IV-22 the graphical symbol of the element (circle. The program automatically assigns the numbers 1 to.. The elements are separately stored for each type.1 Workpiece Alignment: Further Options Direction of a Plane A vector perpendicular to the surface determines the direction of a plane.). v 2.04 . switch the output (cf. and select the type in the following window.09. If you key-in an element. 1 = X-co-ordinate 2 = Y-co-ordinate 3 = Z-co-ordinate Cylindrical co-ordinates In this system a point in space is defined by the projected distance from the origin. For INPUT. the angle Phi with the first (x-) axis. The X-axis corresponds to the first axis of the 14. and Z-axes define the position of a point in space. Y-. the Cartesian co-ordinate system is active. switching is possible by clicking on the corresponding symbol in the input window. it is displayed using the co-ordinates you have input. the values of the X-. then re-calculate the element from memory. the definitions are slightly different. For OUTPUT. and the value of the z-axis.04 v 2. select "Settings / Co-ordinate system mode" from the menu bar. If you want to see the element in a different co-ordinate system type.Types of Co-ordinate Systems 8 Types of Co-ordinate Systems GEOPAK offers three types of co-ordinate system Cartesian Cylindrical Spherical You can always switch between these types. If you have used an axis different from Z to make the alignment in space.4 IV-23 . After program start. above) to the required system type. Cartesian co-ordinates Here. 09. the angle Theta is the angle between the z-axis and the vector to the point. 1 = angle Phi 2 = angle Theta 3 = (angle Theta) 4 = radius to origin In literature. IV-24 v 2.Types of Co-ordinate Systems selected plane. and the angle Theta. 1 = angle Phi 2 = radius to origin 3 = Z-co-ordinate Spherical co-ordinates In this system a point in space is defined by the distance from the origin in space.4 14.04 . In GEOPAK. some take also the view that the angle Theta is the angle between the base plane and the vector. for the Z/X-plane the Zaxis. This means for the Y/Z-plane the Y-axis. the angle Phi with the first axis. The changes are displayed to you.04 v 2.1 Polar Co-Ordinates: Change Planes In the dialogue windows where you can select one out of the three co-ordinate system types.09.Types of Co-ordinate Systems 8. As a rule. you select your polar co-ordinate system with a click on the middle or lower symbol (cylindrical or spherical. left column). 14. With a further click on one of these two polar co-ordinate systems you can additionally change the working plane. we offer you another option.4 IV-25 . see picture below. . ......................................................................................... 19 Selection of Points Contour ......... 24 2................................8 2...........................5 3. 16 Constructed Lines . 7 Constructed Circles: Overview.................. 14 Probing Strategy Cylinder/Cone.......................................................... 3 2 Elements ..2 2................ 20 Surfaces .....................................................Measurement and Probe Radius Compensation V Geometric Elements: Basics Contents 1 Measurement and Probe Radius Compensation................10 2..........................1 3........15 2...................................................18 2....................................................4 2.................14 2.........................6 4 Type of Construction...................3 2........... 18 Step Cylinder............................... 35 4....12 2..........................1 14....................6 2.....11 2............................................................................................. 21 Angle Calculation ......................... 6 Connection Element Point................ 11 Cylinder ................................... 6 Intersection Element Point ............................................ 17 Plane ............ 31 Re-calculate Elements........................ 9 Ellipse .................................... 15 Line ...................................... 19 Contour........... 27 Type of Calculation.......................09..... 30 Positive Direction by Vector ....................................................... 27 3........................................2................. 35 v 2............................... 26 3 Elements: Further Options ....... 6 Three Possibilities of Measurement .........................2 Elements: Overview................... 9 Inclined Circle ...4 2.................................7 2....................................................................4 3........2 3........ 4 2...2.........2..........................................................1 2.................................................................................21 Distance along Probe Direction..................5 2.................. 7 Circle.......... 4 Point............................................................................................................................. 23 Furthermore................................................................................04 Calculation according to Gauss .............. 34 Calculation ..16 2.................................................... you can select between .3 3.......................19 Symmetry-Element Point ............................3 2.............................. 34 Free Element Input ........................................... 28 Enveloping or Fitting-in Element................................................... 12 Pre-Define Cylinder Direction ...............................................................................................................................................17 2............................ 5 2..................................................................... 10 Cone...............20 Calculation of Distance ................................1 2...........9 2. 23 2....................................................................13 2.................................4 V-1 .........2.......................................................................................................... 6 Sphere .......................................................... ................................................................ 36 Spread / Standard Deviation .....09... 36 Fitting-in Element ........................................2 4...................3 4......4 14..................................... 37 v 2.....Measurement and Probe Radius Compensation 4............ 35 Enveloping Element .......................................4 5 V-2 Minimum Zone Element .04 ............. At CMMs with a fixed probe.Measurement and Probe Radius Compensation 1 Measurement and Probe Radius Compensation If you probe the part with a ball. it is compensated by the probe radius.4 V-3 . When you go beyond a determined distance (dummy distance). the probing direction is fixed with the driving command. which has been driven with the joystick.09. you only know the co-ordinates of the ball centre. you have to take into account that after the first measured point of an element you drive in the opposite direction of the material because otherwise the probing direction will not be correctly recognized and an incorrect compensation is realized. This information comes from the probing direction. 14. GEOPAK must know on which side the material is situated so that the direction of the probe radius compensation is correct (inside or outside). Manual CMM • By probing from the first measurement point. the position is taken over and will be converted in the probing direction together with the measurement point. the current position is continuously read so that the probing direction is determined. the control communicates the probing direction. • In the CNC mode. Then.04 v 2. we calculate the element. From these. This is determined as follows: CNC-CMM • In manual mode. when calling up the element via the symbol. you find. you come to a dialogue window whose basic structure is identical for all elements (see example shown below "Element Circle"). among other things.04 .1 Elements: Overview For your tasks you dispose of. Skipping of "Element Dialog" To carry out measurement the most quickly. horizontally arranged.4 14. The dialogue window consists of five areas. the symbols for the Type of Construction. To do this. and come to the corresponding dialog window. the following elements: PointLine Circle Inclined Circle Ellipse Plane Cone Sphere Cylinder Step Cylinder ContourCalculation of Angles Calculation of Distance Activate one of these elements either by a click on the icon or the pull down menu. you immediately come to measurement. v 2. Then. click on the option "Skip Element Dialogue". V-4 Below the title bar. click on "Settings / Properties for Selection Dialog" in the menu. When you call up your element using the menu bar and the function.09.Elements 2 Elements 2. you can skip the "Element Dialog". In the following window. you can input information about • 2.).g. there are summarised all the types of construction of points allowed by GEOPAK (for further details.) In the central area. In the subsequent dialogue window "Element Point". minimum zone element etc. Ö You either click on the symbol or use the menu bar ("Element / Point"). If it is necessary for you to store the element in a different memory number. you will get a list of all names of this element type you have entered so far. Mitutoyo makes a suggestion. but you can input any name describing the actual element. Connection element. Note Regarding the Constructed Elements like Fit in Element or Intersection Element. Point Using this function. please also refer to Elements: Overview). 14. you find the icons for Type of Calculation (Gauss. • the memory number: The program automatically stores and uses subsequent numbers. you can overwrite the suggestion. etc. e. tolerance etc. you can see the icons for the Programming Help (automatic measurement. For details regarding the first four types of construction please refer to Type of Construction. • the number of points: If you wish to have a statement about the form of the element.) On the right hand side. you create a new element of the type "Point". find information via the Table of Contents for this topic catalogue. On the left side. circle. If you click the arrow at the end of the input field. cancel. Re-calculate from memory. and Theoretical element.Elements The first four types of construction (from left) are identical for all elements. the bottom area contains the usual buttons (Ok.04 v 2. it is necessary to enter the minimum number of points.09.4 V-5 . • • • • Measurement.2 the name of the element. 2 Connection Element Point You can create the Connection Element Point using the position co-ordinates of known elements or the measurement points of these elements. For detailed information refer also to the topics 2. Compensated Point: When this option is selected. 2.4 14. 2. the compensation is realized along the co-ordinate axis (as in manual mode) if the command has not yet been carried out. CNC mode means that the “CNC ON” command was carried out.g. This means that also with a CNC CMM in joystick mode. during the distance calculation. In the polar co-ordinate system. Point Direction: With this option. This is the direction where probe radius compensation is performed.1 Symmetry-Element Point Symmetry-Element: Using this symbol you can calculate the symmetry point from two elements. • CNC-mode: Compensation is along the probe direction.4 Three Possibilities of Measurement For the measurement of points. For detailed informaton about this topic.04 . V-6 v 2. Later on. you see the co-ordinates of the probe centre.2. GEOPAK will automatically perform the probe-radius compensation. only the co-ordinate in probe direction is indicated. refer to "Intersection Element Point". You confirm and get to the selection window Symmetrie-Element Punkt.3 Connection Elements General Connection Element "From Meaured Points"" Intersection Element Point Intersection Element: Using and confirming this symbol you can have the intersection of two elements calculated.2. For details regarding the options available in the symbol block on the right-hand side of the dialogue window please refer to Programming Help.2. as well.2. probe radius compensation is carried out radially. you have three options: Point (uncompensated): Here. e.Elements 2.09. compensation is performed as follows: • Manual mode: Compensation is performed along one of the coordinate system axes. 14. please refer to Type of Calculation). A sphere can be calculated only from a minimum of four measured points which must not all be located on a plane. Ö You either click on the symbol or use the menu bar ("Element / Circle").3 Sphere Using this function. If the circle is calculated from measured points.Elements Option Contour If you want to carry out calculations with individual points of a contour. For more information refer also to the topic "Fit in Element Sphere For details regarding the options available in the symbol block on the right-hand side of the dialogue window please refer to Programming Help. Ö You either click on the symbol or use the menu bar ("Element / Sphere").04 v 2. please refer to Type of Calculation). In the dialogue window "Element Circle" there are summarised all the types of construction of circles allowed by GEOPAK (for further details. please also refer to Elements: Overview).4 V-7 .09. several methods of calculation come into consideration (for further details. Subsequently the dialogue "Min. you create a new element of the type "Sphere".4 Circle Using this function you create a new element of the type "Circle". A circle can be calculated only from a minimum of three measured points that must not be located on a line. In the subsequent dialogue window "Element Sphere". you can use the function (see symbol). For details regarding the first four types of construction please refer to Type of Construction. there are summarised all the types of construction of spheres allowed by (for further details. please refer to Elements: Overview). max. 2. 2. please refer extensively to Minimum and Maximum Point . To this regard. If the sphere is calculated from measured points. several methods of calculation come into consideration (for further details.of Contour" opens. For details regarding the first four types of construction please refer to Type of Construction. It is possible that you get the message that the circle cannot be calculated. V-8 v 2. Caution is advisable in performing "forced projection" into a plane. For details regarding the options available in the symbol block on the right-hand side of the dialogue window please refer to Programming Help. projection will then take place in this plane. This is the plane where the points are projected (Automatic projection). Problem cases If the circle with its measured points is located diagonally in space. The circle is calculated.4 14. for distance measurement.g. Hint If you don't activate this symbol. the program calculates a plane from the measured points • • • followed by checking. Thus you can connect several circles to form an axis in space. In this case. the measuring level is maintained. you can predetermine the projection plane.04 . which base plane this plane comes closest to. We recommend automatic projection. without wanting to have any spatial components. • • • automatic projection could be carried out in the wrong plane. make sure that the changeover of the plane is made by this symbol. e.Elements Normal case As a rule. Regardless of the location of the measured points. When changing the plane. No projection XY-Plane YZ-Plane ZX-Plane Automatic projection plane Set measuring level to zero: You activate this symbol in cases where you intend to measure the circles at different levels.09. You will choose this alternative if more than one circle is to be measured in this plane. 2. Default setting of the icon If this icon is not available in the toolbar. however. to measure a circle in a measured plane. Proceed as follows: measure the plane or call a plane already measured from the memory. you will apply the function via the cylinder symbol. If problems occur due to the position of the circle (e.Elements 2.g.4 V-9 . you want to know which diameter a cone or a sphere has at a certain position. First you have to define the plane on which the circle is positioned. to consult also the topics Connection Elements General and Connection Element Point . for example.6 Inclined Circle Usually the circles are projected to one of the basic coordinate planes. there are three options available.09. Ö In the Settings for GEOPAK dialogue box choose the "Menus" button. The function Fit in Element Circle you use when working with a circle with a pre-defined diameter or when you want to fit in this circle between two lines or a contour. You can determine a "Connection Element Circle". In this dialogue box make the requested settings. you will click on one of these symbols. Ö In the Menu-Functions dialogue box choose the "Inclined circle" radio button.5 Constructed Circles: Overview In the dialogue "Element circle" you have various possibilities to construct circles. inclined position of a bore fit) it is possible to measure an "Inclined circle". The icon appears in the GEOPAK window. To create an Intersection Element Circle. If you want. The element "inclined circle" consists of a plane and a circle. proceed as follows: Ö Make a default setting in the PartManager by choosing "Settings / Defaults for programs / CMM / GEOPAK" from the menu bar. If. We recommend. To open the "Element Inclined circle" dialogue box choose Element / Inclined circle from the menu bar or click on the corresponding icon. instead. You can only use the automatic circle measurement if the measurement plane has been defined in the co-ordinate system before. 14.04 v 2. For details regarding the options available in the symbol block on the right-hand side of the dialogue window please refer to Programming Help. please refer to Elements: Overview). An ellipse can be calculated only from a minimum of five measured points. you create an element of the type "Ellipse". Inform yourself in detail under the topic Intersection Element Ellipse .Elements The inclined circle icon will replace the ellipse icon. 2.7 Ellipse Using this function. For details regarding the first four types of construction please refer to Type of Construction. In the dialogue window "Element Ellipse" there are summarised all the types of construction of ellipses allowed by GEOPAK (for further details.09. You can also have the ellipse calculated as intersection of a plane with a cone or a cylinder. • • It is possible that you do not see the symbol in the icon bar.04 . V-10 v 2. You can again reactivate the symbol function via the "PartManager" program and the menu functions "Settings / Presetting Programs / CMM / GEOPAK".4 14. Ö You either click on the symbol or use the menu bar ("Element / Ellipse"). 09. If the cone is calculated from measured points.R CO [x]. If you need also the radius or the diameter of the cone for the protocol of your elements (cones). enter in the text field opposite: • • For the radius: For the diameter: CO [x]. several methods of calculation come into consideration (for further details.04 v 2. Ö You either click on the symbol or use the menu bar ("Element / Cone"). if applicable also in "File Format Specification".Elements 2. In the dialogue window "Element Cone" there are summarised all the types of construction of cones allowed by GEOPAK (for further details. For details regarding the first four types of construction please refer to Type of Construction. Hint There is no automatic cone measurement. you create an element of the type "Cone". however. A cone can only be calculated from a minimum of six measured points which must not all be located in one plane. please refer to Elements: Overview). 14.4 V-11 . proceed as follows: Ö Use the symbol to the left to call up the dialogue "Define and calculate variable“. click in the dialogue "Print Format Specification" on the option "formula calculation". generate the cone with several automatic circle measurements. Using the CNC measurement you can.D To have these values also in the protocol. For details regarding the options available in the symbol block on the right-hand side of the dialogue window please refer to Programming Help. please refer to Type of Calculation). Ö Under "Variable name".8 Cone Using this function. 04 . GEOPAK enables you to do that using in the "Element Cylinder" dialogue the . however. please refer to Type of Calculation).09. Error message The occurrence of the error message "Cylinder not calculable" or the calculation of the cylinder in the wrong position can be caused by the algorithm not having the starting value for the calculation. V-12 v 2. The strategy is.Elements 2.4 14.symbol (see also picture below).9 Cylinder Using this function. This situation can be remedied by the function "Pre-Define Cylinder Direction". Should you want to define the directional sense independently of the probing strategy. For details regarding the options available in the symbol block on the right-hand side of the dialogue window please refer to Programming Help. several methods of calculation come into consideration (for further details. For details regarding the first four types of construction please refer to Type of Construction. Hint Automatic measurement is possible. Ö You either click on the symbol or use the menu bar ("Element / Cylinder"). In the dialogue window "Element Cylinder" there are summarised all the types of construction of cylinders allowed by GEOPAK (for further details. please refer to Elements: Overview). we recommend that you carry out single automatic element measurements. If the cylinder is calculated from measured points. A cylinder can only be calculated from a minimum of five measured points which must not all be located in one plane. Directional sense The directional sense for the cylinder is defined by the probing strategy in such a way that the direction of the axis runs from the first measurement point to the last one. limited. Should this be not enough for you. you create an element of the type "Cylinder". 09. Ö In the subsequent window "Settings for GEOPAK". click on "Dialogues" ... 14. Ö and then click the option "Dialogue Cylinder .4 V-13 .04 v 2. Ö Click in the PartManager menu bar on "Settings / Default Settings Programs / CMM / GEOPAK"..Pre-define direction" in the "Dialogues" window.Elements If you do not see the symbol in this dialogue .. 09. All elements having a defined spatial axis are accepted. Use direction from element: Of course. e.4 14. The symbol is depressed as a proof that you have predefined a direction. Upon confirmation you return to the "Element Cylinder" dialogue. First you have to establish the axes of the bores and use them for defining the cylinder's direction.10 Pre-Define Cylinder Direction Using the symbol (picture on the left) in the "Element Cylinder" dialogue you can predefine the direction for cylinders (for details refer to "Cylinder ").Elements 2. This window offers you two possibilities. Click the symbol to get to the window designated "Pre-define direction". are located parallel to each other or have a similar direction. An example to illustrate this would be a plane with several bores..g. Input direction: The option used most frequently is the predefinition pf the direction by angles. V-14 v 2.04 . you can define the cylinder direction also from measured elements which. Hint Up to Version v2. that the two first points are located along a surface line.e. the message ". assuming. this time. we have defined a maximum number of steps after which itineration will stops without result. the order for the 2nd and 3rd attempt was inverted. If this works out correctly.11 Probing Strategy Cylinder/Cone The cylinder algorithm operates iteratively (recurring step by step). and they will never reach zero. then GEOPAK tries another assumption for the first approximation.Elements 2. In this case the values are determined from the surface parameters. you should capture as many meas. itineration will start. GEOPAK will try a third time. Depending on the data. So if you want to make use of the "2nd Order Surface" option. Maximum Number of Steps It happens that the first approximation does not come close enough to the final result. In order to avoid endless calculations in these cases.3 the user is able to predefine the cylinder direction can be regarded as a further remedy to overcome the problems mentioned above. In a "normal case" we recommend to place the first three points on a circle which is approximately perpendicular to the cylinder. It is expected that this will distinctly increase reliability of the calculations. Should this attempt equally fail. It starts with a first approximation and tries to improve it in a way to achieve the minimum. The itineration does not converge.04 v 2. There is. points as possible and distribute them evenly over the whole cylinder surface. the improvements will continuously grow smaller very shortly.not calculable" will be output. Starting from v2. In this case one would say that the itineration is converging.2. however. The calculation is the better the more irregularly the points are distributed on the surface. Circular Plane Hence it is the first approximation that is the critical issue in terms of iteration. As soon as they are less than 10^-9 (i. For that reason you should not position the points on two circles or along single surface lines. The improvements will then vary instead of continuously growing smaller. the cylinder (cone) is calculated.3 it will conform to the present description.4 V-15 . The direction is essential.. Should both attempts come to no result. Predefine Direction The fact that as from Version v2. a minimum of 9 points (an increased number is even better) required. As a result. the calculation of a 2nd order surface. numerically zero). 14. For details refer to the topic Pre-Define Cylinder Direction . Surface of 2nd Order If iteration fails to converge. the number of steps is different. in most of the cases it is ranging between 6 and 15.09. GEOPAK then assumes the direction of the first circular plane as the first approximation for the cylinder axis direction. This is the plane where the points are projected (Automatic projection). In the dialogue window "Element Line " there are summarised all the types of construction of lines allowed by GEOPAK (for further details please refer also to Elements: Overview).4 14. Caution is advisable in performing "forced projection" into a plane. In this case you can predetermine the projection plane. the program calculates a plane from the measured points and the probe directions. Ö You either click on the symbol or use the menu bar ("Element / Line").09. For details regarding the options available in the symbol block on the right-hand side of the dialogue window please refer to Programming Help. • • • automatic projection could take place in the wrong plane. Recognising the projection plane As a rule. No projection XY-plane YZ-plane ZX-plane Automatic projection plane Hint We recommend automatic projection. projection will then be realized in this plane.04 . Regardless of the location of the measured points.12 Line Using this function. When changing the plane. A line can be calculated only from a minimum of two measured points. If the line is calculated from measured points. It is possible that you get the message that the line cannot be calculated. • • • It is then checked which base plane this plane comes closest to. make sure that the changeover of the plane is made by this symbol. Problem cases If the line with its measured points is diagonal to space.Elements 2. For details regarding the first four types of construction please refer to Type of Construction. you create an element of the type "Line". several methods of calculation come into consideration (for further details refer also to Type of Calculation). V-16 v 2. The line is calculated. 13 Constructed Lines You have five different options to construct a line.04 v 2. you create a line that runs parallel to the selected line and through the selected point. Symmetry Element Line. The dialogue offers you for the 1st and 2nd element the elements line. Connection Element Line For additional information about the Connection Elements you should also consult the topic Connection Elements General . The direction of the lines is defined by the direction vectors of the two planes using the "Right-hand rule".4 V-17 . 14.Elements 2. Shift-Element Line: Using this option. Tangent. Intersection Element Line: An intersection line can only be determined by two planes.09. First. Then decide if the tangent is to be placed to the circle from a point or if you want the line to be a common tangent of two circles. cylinder and cone respectively. select the circle at which the tangent is to be placed. You can find detailed information by clicking onto the relevant options. .04 . In the "Element Plane" dialogue window are summarised all the types of construction of planes allowed by GEOPAK (for further details refer also to Elements: Overview).Elements 2. For details regarding the first four types of construction. and . For details describing methods of creating the "Symmetry Element Plane". you create a new element of the type "Plane". When you have the plane calculated as a connection element. select the type of calculation. Defining the direction vector In a measured plane. the direction vector always points out of the material. Proceed as follows Ö Ö Ö Ö Click on the symbol.14 Plane Using this function.4 14. Hint For a connection plane located close to the origin. A plane can be calculated only from a minimum of three measured points or defined as a symmetry plane. you are well advised to shift the origin prior to the calculation and reset it upon completion of the calculation. Recalculate / Copy from Memory"). the information of the material side is not available. select the original plane in the following window (e. Changing the type of calculation You can have the element calculated in a way different from the originally set method. In this case. to make sure that you always get the same direction.. cf.09. Several methods of calculation are available in cases where the plane is calculated from measured points (for details see topic Type of Calculation). V-18 v 2. see the topic Type of Construction. Ö You either click on the symbol or use the menu bar ("Element / Plane"). "Plane.g. the direction vector always points Ö Ö from the origin to the plane. confirm. For details regarding the options available in the symbol block on the right-hand side of the dialogue window please refer to Programming Help. Two Ways for Symmetry Element . a graduated spindle. you create a new element of the type "Contour". Click again on the "Element Finished" icon and arrive at the calculation of the step cylinder. click on the "Element Finished" icon.15 Step Cylinder With this function. The GEOPAK program can use the contour points for calculating an element (for details see the example shown under Selection of Points Contour). For further details see under Contour Connection Element Type of Construction Load Contour. You come to the measure mode for the second step of the cylinder (see first step). In the dialogue window "Element Contour" there are summarised all the types of construction of planes allowed by GEOPAK (for further details please refer also to Elements: Overview). you will directly come to the measurement of the first step of the cylinder.g. 2.16 Contour Using this function. A step cylinder can be e. You can also manually measure the first step of the cylinder or with the automatic elements you know.04 v 2.Elements 2.4 V-19 . which have a common axis but different diameters. you create two elements of the type "Cylinder". Load Contour from External Systems . Ö You either click on the symbol (see above) or use the menu bar "Element / Contour". If all points for the first step are recorded.09. The axes of the two cylinders are identical. A contour comprises a number of points in an ordered array. For details regarding the topic "Calculation of an Element on a Contour" see topic Selection of Point Contour 14.. If you confirm the "Element Step Cylinder". you can do that for each one of the two cylinders. Middle Contour . In the same way you entered for all the other elements a name and a storage no. For details concerning the first two types of construction see Type of Construction. Below the line "Selected Blocks" you decide via the symbols which blocks you want to use for the calculation. You decide in which co-ordinate system you want to have them displayed.09. For this purpose you need. For the selection of the points.. Using this symbol you call up all contour points required for the v 2. The "Selection of Point Contour" window appears. Example for the calculation of a circle Ö Click on the element symbol. Make sure that this is activated. as a rule.Recalculate / Copy from Memory" window. V-20 by mouse-click (the mouse changes to a reticle) in a contour graphic on your screen. The areas selected are shown in colour (in "red" as shown in the picture below"). Ö In the "Circle .Elements 2. only a part of the contour points.04 . the mouse pointer again changes to a reticle. you click on the symbol (contour). This is why you have to make a selection. you use the graphics. the co-ordinates of the points or blocks are shown. In the window "Selection of Points Contour". or you summarise points to form blocks (keep mouse button depressed). At the same time. Ö in the following window and on the "Recalculate from Memory" symbol and confirm.4 14.g.. a circle. Ö Select a contour • either from the list or . • With the left-hand mouse button depressed. You can click single points. you select in the contour graphics all the areas you want to use for calculating. You confirm. e.17 Selection of Points Contour You have loaded a contour and want to calculate an element on this contour (or part of this contour). you create a new element of the type "Freeform Surface". Important A "Connection element freeform surface" consists of measurement points of other elements whose measurement points have actually been measured before. by means of a measurement or by using a connection element.04 v 2. using the symbols you can cause a sound output and a graphical assistance to be activated. the material side of the measured element must be known. You come to the dialogue window "Element Surface". you enter your element name or the memory number in the usual manner. There are two ways to create a new element.e. click on the symbol and confirm with OK. Furthermore.Elements calculation of the element in question. Ö In the text boxes. You delete all points (blocks). Ö In addition. So if you want to create a connection element. you can only use measured elements. i. Ö You either click on the symbol or use the menu bar ("Element / Surface"). If you opt for the measurement.18 Surfaces Using this function. 14.09. This function generates the connection between GEOPAK and 3DTOL.4 V-21 . 2. . While the measurement is running you can freely change.. 3D-TOL is automatically started.4 14. • • with an already existing model. below). or . For details regarding the options available in the symbol block on the right-hand side of the dialogue window please refer to Programming Help. As soon as a model has been loaded into 3D-TOL the program will automatically return to GEOPAK.04 . according to the specific requirements of your measuring task..09. V-22 v 2. in case no model is available.. from 3D-TOL to GEOPAK and vice versa using for this purpose the status line. that is either . in order that you can enter measure mode and tolerances.Elements The material side is not known of points that have not been measured compensated and of elements that have been calculated only from contour points without probe direction (see example ill. with the "Load Model" dialogue window. Furthermore. or choose a shorter way by clicking on the in the toolbar. That is possible only if the straight lines were measured in the same driving plane. symbol GEOPAK calculates the angle in the plane and its 3 projections. For details regarding the options available in the symbol block on the right-hand side of the dialogue window please refer to Programming Help.04 v 2. Pay Attention: The angle projections depend on the co-ordinate system. Activate the function (dialogue window) via the menu bar "Elements" and the function "Angle".4 V-23 . the result is a geometrical element of the type "Angle". 14. Directly after this. calculating is realised through the direction vectors.09.19 Angle Calculation By means of the function "Angle". you can make a nominal-actual comparison of values. Otherwise. you may calculate the angle between two elements.Elements 2. You Can Input The Following Addendum Conditions: Calculation of the angle by probing the material sides Calculation of the angles via the direction vector This input only influences: Measured planes Measured straight lines. you can select between the calculated angle its complementary angle of 180° ("Explementary Angle") its complementary angle of 360° Again. if you calculate the distance between a circle and a straight line.04 . Its vector components are signed. • A projection is practical.09. in which the calculated distance ought to be situated.20 Calculation of Distance With the function "distance". but also on not compensated measuring points. e. which are situated in the same plane of drawing. but probed in another measurement position. For details regarding the options available in the symbol block on the right-hand side of the dialogue window please refer to Programming Help. you can make a comparison of nominal and actual values. On principle. V-24 v 2.4 14. You Can Input The Following Addendum Conditions: Calculation of the radius of the output elements concerned.g. you can calculate the distance between two elements. This input is ineffective on planes concerned. The result is a geometrical element of the type "distance". Attention: The vectorial distance depends on the co-ordinate system. are in no case projected. Here the respective probe radius is added or subtracted. The distance vector is directed from the first towards the second output element. Directly after this. Activate the function (dialogue window) via the menu bar "Elements" and the function "Distance". This input produces an effect not only on circles.e. GEOPAK Win calculates the distance as sum and as vector. i. cylinders and spheres involved. You may also choose the shorter way via the symbol displayed in the icon bar. • • The distance is always positive. Projection plane. the result is a spatial distance.Elements 2. these are the components 1 and 2.09. this statement applies in exactly the same way. You do not get the component 1a. The resulting distance is decomposed into its components in a way that a2= ax2+ay2+az2. the distance components (see sketch below) are defined by the points of intersection of the “straight line through the circle centres” with the circles. For the Y-value.4 V-25 . Thus. 1 = X-component 2 = Y-component 14.Elements Distance comprising calculation of radii For circles. In the example of the sketch below.04 v 2. GEOPAK calculates the geometric distance between the circle centres and includes the radii in the calculation of this geographic distance. Ö You enter the two points in the dialogue window. Proceed as follows Ö You can activate the function via the menu "Element/Distance along Probing Direction" and come to the corresponding dialogue window.21 Distance along Probe Direction Basically. as well. The distance along probing direction can be negative.g.09. the function is used in cases where points from a CAD system are to be compared.Elements 2. Example Nominal points exist.4 14. For details regarding the options available in the symbol block on the right-hand side of the dialogue window please refer to Programming Help. of a freeform surface from a CAD system. V-26 v 2. Ö You form a theoretical point and measure the corresponding point at the workpiece. The normal line directions in the surface points directions are given.04 . as well. e. However. The result is automatically displayed after the "Distance". Material is lacking in such a case. only the deviations arising perpendicular to the surface are to be determined. further types of construction are possible. also Elements). if the element originally has been calculated as a Gauss element. Now the element is recalled from memory and its position is calculated in the actual co-ordinate system.04 v 2. these are shown by different icons and separately explained for each element type. 14. For different elements. the first four icons are the same for all types. e. Therefore. Calculate an element from the positions (locations) of other elements.g.4 V-27 . then select how this element must be built. the button for "minimum zone element". select the element you want to get first. however.g. the pitch circle diameter out of the centres of several circles. the dialogue windows for the elements contain icons describing the different construction methods (cf. Determine the element by measurement.Elements: Further Options 3 Elements: Further Options 3. this means that you input the nominal values by keyboard. You can also change the way of calculation: press e. "Re-calculate from memory" means: The position of the element has been previously stored in a different co-ordinate system.09. You can also define any element as a "theoretical element". Some of these icons differ from one element type to the next.1 Type of Construction In the GEOPAK way of thinking. g. it is either a circle through two points. more accurately: the sum of the squared distances is minimised).2 Type of Calculation For some types of elements you can select between four different methods of calculating the resulting element parameters. This is not always unique (e. Gauss: The program calculates an "average" element. in the case of an elliptical hole) which means that there may be more than one solution. Maximum Inscribed Element: the program calculates the largest circle that can be situated within the points. These two ideal elements contain all points in between them. if more than the minimum number of points has been taken. Three points forming an acicular angle triangle always determine it. and they are calculated in such a way that this zone is the smallest possible. Usually. Minimum Circumscribed Circle: the program calculates the smallest circle that contains all the points. these different ways of calculation are giving different results. Minimum Zone Element: the program calculates an element that is situated in the middle of two ideal elements. These three points form an acicular angle triangle. or a circle determined by three points. The circle may have the same centre as the maximum V-28 v 2.09.4 14. if these two points are opposite to each other. This circle is always defined and unique.04 . this element is situated within the points in such a way that the distances of the single points to both sides are roughly the same (or.Elements: Further Options 3. whereas for the other cases. When using this.09. and two other points the outer circle. Hint As to opt for which type of calculation. two points determine the inner. 14. It depends on your measurement requirements which calculation to select. In this latter case. The radius or diameter output by GEOPAK is the average value of the two circles. find detailed information in the topic Enveloping or Fitting-in Element. The most common calculation is according to Gauss criterion. or may even be different from both.4 V-29 .Elements: Further Options inscribed or the minimum circumscribed circle. all points have the same influence on the result. only the outermost or innermost points determine the result.04 v 2. With this method you receive the line (plane) represented by the blue line.09. V-30 v 2. Also in case that a feather key is to be fitted in this groove.Elements: Further Options 3. below). you would receive the line (plane) (red line) that lies in the material.3 Enveloping or Fitting-in Element As regards lines and planes. a frequently asked question is which type of calculation is the most suitable. From the illustration above you can see that for lines and planes.04 . always the enveloping element is useful. If you opted for the fitting-in element. Hint This also applies to the case of two parallel edges forming a groove. you should use the enveloping element to limit the material free space (see ill.4 14. and 3. the positive direction is the direction from the first to the last point. the positive direction is from 1 to 3.4 V-31 . direction. Definition for the Elements For a measured line.04 v 2.4 Positive Direction by Vector Background In GEOPAK. 2. plane. all properties of the elements are automatically calculated. the axis gets the same direction as the line. 14. and as alignment procedure also uses this positive direction to determine the axis in space or within a plane. If this line is used for an axis alignment of the x-axis. GEOPAK uses the following definitions of the positive direction for the elements.09. the points have been taken as 1.Elements: Further Options 3. In the example below. the X/Y plane is the projection plane. therefore. this positive direction must be defined in such a way that reproducibility from one execution of the part program to the next is possible. With the circle and the ellipse. the "Positive Direction" always is parallel to the direction vector of the projection plane. These properties are usually location. and other features specific to the element. For the elements line. The "Positive Direction" is indicated by Z+'. Since calculation of angles between elements takes the so-called "positive direction" into account. In our example below. cylinder. and cone the direction in space plays a significant role. Therefore. Elements: Further Options In case of a cylinder.4 14.09. In the case of a cone. picture below). V-32 v 2.04 . the "positive direction" runs from the apex into the opening of the cone (cf. along the axis of the cylinder. the "positive direction" goes from the first to the last measured point. 14. picture below). the order / sequence of measured points does not affect the direction (cf.4 V-33 . The vector of a measure plane always points away from the material.Elements: Further Options In case of a plane.09. the vector pointing out of the plane gives the "positive direction".04 v 2. name and number of the element that you want to use. When you delete the marked points with "OK". This command is not to learn. Ö You confirm and get the graphics displayed. under Straightness).) or towards the outside (Max. via the function "Free Element Input".04 . Ö You click on the symbol and come to the window "Recalculate without Selected Points".. It is not necessary to activate the graphic symbol in the respective dialogue windows.09. Ö Using the symbol you mark in each case the point with the biggest distance towards the inside (Min. and circularity you can blank measurement points and re-calculate the form tolerance after opening the graphic. the element will be recalculated. type.). you open the "Free Element Input" window. The marked points appear on the graphics in red. you can cancel the markings by this symbol. V-34 In this case you can enter.5 Re-calculate Elements For the form tolerances straightness. You proceed in the following way Ö You activate the form tolerance required (see. when you are creating a subprogram. With a double click on this line. For example. such a list is shown to you as dependant on context.Elements: Further Options 3. 3.g. The results will be displayed to you immediately. This input is possible whenever you see this sign [. as a rule. Ö In case you have clicked one point or several points in excess. This window is self-explanatory.] in an element list. v 2. however. The elements of the main program to be called are then unknown. a list with all the elements available. e..6 Free Element Input When you want to open an element in the GEOPAK dialogues.4 14. you would open. flatness. Even in the part program editor. cases where this is not sufficient. There are. (the Chebychev. is meant for the definitions of geometrical errors according to the ISO 1101) you select the Gauss method. 4. you also get a value that is called standard deviation or spread.Calculation 4 Calculation 4. Gauss: The program is calculating an average element. If no other method is specified. 14. The only method that is always clearly defined is the Gauss method. which is geometrically perfect. you have four methods to execute your measurement tasks (see details of topic Type of Calculation ).4 V-35 . you optionally have four methods for the execution of your measurement tasks (see details of topic Type of Calculation ).04 v 2. This couple of features keeps the distance to a minimum but includes all measured points (Chebychev).2 Minimum Zone Element In the "Elements (for example) Circle" windows. Minimum Zone Element: The program is calculating an average element. among a few features.09.1 Calculation according to Gauss In the "Elements (for example) Circle" windows. The differences are largely cancelled out (compensation element). for example. In the graphics. One of it is the "Minimum Zone Element". 4 14.04 . V-36 v 2. Enveloping Element: The program encloses the measured points by a smallest geometrically perfect feature (contact element at outside measurement).3 Enveloping Element In the "Elements (for example) Circle" windows. One of it is the "Fitting-In Element". 4.Calculation 4. Fitting-in element: The program triggers the measured points by a biggest perfect feature (contact element at internal dimension). you have four methods to execute your measurement tasks (see details of topic Type of Calculation ).4 Fitting-in Element In the "Elements (for example) Circle" windows. One of it is the "Enveloping Element Zone Element".09. there exist four methods to execute your measurement tasks (see details of topic Type of Calculation ). * 4“.e.4 V-37 .09. Dev. straightness and flatness graphics. 14.4 Cylinder 5 Number of points . The result is the standard deviation. number of points 2 Circle 3 Number of points . number of the necessary measurement points.6 Number of points . Ö Divide the “Sum of all deviation squares” through the degrees of freedom and Ö calculate out of it the square root.3 Sphere 4 Number of points .04 v 2. The same value can be displayed in the graphics of elements as “4s”. which is designated by “Std.2 Calculation of standard deviation step-by-step: Ö Sum up the square deviations: Measured point – calculated element for all measured points. Degrees of Freedom: The degrees of freedom are important for the calculation of the standard deviation.Spread / Standard Deviation 5 Spread / Standard Deviation Introduction In the circularity. from the type of element: Type of element Degrees of freedom Line Min.5 Cone 6 Number of points . i. GEOPAK displays a value (standard deviation). This depends on the min. The graphics mentioned above display the quadruple value of it.3 Plane 3 Number of points . . ........1 4........... 26 Activating the Function.................................. 28 Settings .............. 14 Intersection: Extras ......................11 2 Connection Elements..2 6 Shift-Element Line ...............................09................. 25 Tangent... 25 Automatic Element Recognition ........................4 2.... 29 Special Cases / Limitations .............................. 8 Connection Element Sphere ........................1 5.7 1.........................................................Constructed Elements: Connection Elements VI Elements: Further Options Contents 1 Constructed Elements: Connection Elements ....................................................................................................................................2 6...........................1 3.........2 3.......................................................3 4 Symmetry Element Line ......................4 6.................................................. 10 Connection Element Freeform Surface ................................ 16 Intersection Element Circle ............. 18 Intersection Element Ellipse ..................................5 6...... 24 4.4 VI-1 ..................................4 1. 8 Connection Element Ellipse .........3 1....................... 27 The Dialogue: Important Functions ....................2 1........................................................... 12 2......................................9 1........ 20 3............. 26 6...........................................................................................................7 15......... 24 Fit in Element Circle ........................................10 1......................8 1................. 7 Connection Element Line......................................................1 2............................................ 19 Symmetry Elements ...................... 21 Symmetry Element Point ............... 9 Connection Element Plane ................................................. 23 Fit in Elements .........6 1.............................................................. 9 Connection Element Cone ..........................2 2..................................................... 7 Connection Element Circle ..........................................................................................1 1............................. 8 Connection Element Cylinder.................................... 26 Further Options.........3 6......... 27 The Dialogue: Symbol and Information Boxes .....................................................5 1.................04 Introduction.......2 5 Fit in Element Sphere ......................................5 3 Intersection Element Line ......... 20 Symmetry Element Plane: Two Ways ...........6 6......................... 12 Intersection Element Point .. 31 v 2...... 3 Connection Elements "From Measured Points" ..3 2......................................................... General..................................1 6........................ 5 Connection Element Point ...... 3 1....................... 25 5.............................................................. 10 Intersection Elements ...... 24 Further Constructed Elements................................................ ......................3 8......... 41 Monitoring: Data Transfer ...........8 8.......2 8....1 6................................................. 40 8.....................................................................................Constructed Elements: Connection Elements 6............. 31 Limitations.....................................09.....................2 7 Special Cases with the Joystick...................................................6 8........................................................04 .............................................................................9 8............... 36 Hole Shape: How to Work........... 42 Start Part Program ................................................................................................... 45 Transfer Co-ordinate System .....................7 8..............................5 8 Hole Shapes: Introduction......... 45 Joint Co-ordinate System... 44 Element Container.....3 7........ 43 Both Part Programs should be Finished........2 7....................4 15........ 46 v 2. 31 Carbody Measurement: Hole Shapes.............. 38 Carbody Measurement: Introduction .......... 33 Hole Shape: Symmetry Axis and Width ....................... 42 Synchronisation is nessecary...5 8.......................4 8............... 37 Hole Shapes: Tolerance Comparison / Position.......................................................... 42 Synchronisation of Part Program ..........4 7.. 32 7.............7..........1 8.........10 VI-2 Settings .........................1 7................... 32 Differences: Hole Shape – Inclined Circle.................. 43 Retrieve Element Data ....7............................................................. you intend to create a hole pattern from centres of circles.Constructed Elements: Connection Elements 1 Constructed Elements: Connection Elements 1.04 v 2.g. General You use the Connection Elements option in cases where.. 15.4 VI-3 .09. e. You can also draw a line through adjacent circles.1 Connection Elements. Or you wish to determine the straightness of a cylinder axis by measuring several superimposed circles. . etc.4 15. Ö In the "Element Circle.09.. click on the symbol (see picture). current co-ordinate system and in the selected projection plane. etc. The connection element is determined in the .". Procedure To access the dialogue window of the connection element that you want to form.." window.. for the present example you have to confirm "Element Circle" in the window. Hint To see how to proceed in the dialogue windows "Connection Element Circle (Single and Group selection)". refer also to the subjects "Single Selection" and "Group Selection". For details regarding the topic "From Measured Points" (left symbol) refer to Connection Element "From Measured Points" VI-4 v 2. Ö Or adopt a different method using the "Menu bar / Element / Circle.04 . Ö In any case.Constructed Elements: Connection Elements Special importance is attached to the option which allows you choose between single and group selection (for further details refer to "Single Selection" and "Group Selection". Ö the corresponding symbol in the icon bar (see picture). click . the centre of the circle. General" shows examples where you do not activate the option "From measured points". and Ellipse. 15. The connection elements concerned pass through the centres of circles. you can use the symbol (left. used for the geometrical inspection of rotary tables. etc. Hint These options are applicable to both Single selection and Group selection. which have been established for the elements used. above) for your decision to form the connection element from measured points.2 Connection Elements "From Measured Points" In the dialogue window "Connection Element Circle.".Constructed Elements: Connection Elements 1. You can calculate a connection element also from the local coordinates. Option active You activate this option in cases where you wish to determine the connection element from measured points instead of using centres.09. this is. in each case. Sphere. Option not active The topic "Connection Elements.04 v 2. would be a "Connection Element Circle" through the centre of several spheres.4 VI-5 . For the elements such as Circle. A further example. the new element is calculated against which – in the second step – the probe radius is compensated. The result is only valuable when the relevant elements where measured with the same probe radius. you have measured several circles at different heights (see picture below). Using these measurement points you can calculate a cylinder. For this. In the learning mode you are therefore warned when two relevant probe radii differ by more than 0. Probe radius compensation The measured points are probe centres.Constructed Elements: Connection Elements Example: On a cylinder.01 mm. GEOPAK uses the probe radius with which the first element was measured.04 .09. From these.4 15. A connection element formed this way includes all features of a measured element (measurement points and material side). VI-6 v 2. General Connection Element "From Measured Points" 1. or from the measurement points of these elements.4 VI-7 . red Line). e.09.g. For this purpose.. you form the Connection Element Line. you are not allowed to activate the symbol "From Measured Points".3 Connection Element Point You can form the Connection Element Point from the local co-ordinates of known elements. Should you have to define. If you want to connect two lines with each other (picture below. local co-ordinates of known elements.. Measurement points of these elements.04 v 2.4 Connection Element Line You can form the Connection Element Line from the. you will have to activate the symbol. refer also to the topics Connection Elements. For further details.. a line by the centres disposed adjacent or above each other. General Connection Element "From Measured Points" 15.Constructed Elements: Connection Elements 1. For further details. refer also to the topics Connection Elements. . In this case you are not allowed to activate the symbol "From Measured Points".4 15. or from the measurement points of these elements. or from the measurement points of these elements. General Connection Element "From Measured Points" 1. refer also to the topics 1. General Connection Element "From Measured Points" v 2. For further details.09. For further details. An application frequently used for the Connection Element Circle is a hole pattern.6 Connection Element Ellipse You can form the Connection Element Ellipse from the local co-ordinates of known elements. refer also to the topics Connection Elements.Constructed Elements: Connection Elements 1. refer also to the topics VI-8 Connection Elements.. local co-ordinates of known elements.5 Connection Element Circle In the "Element Circle" dialogue you can decide for one out of four calculating methods ("Type of Calculation"). General Connection Element "From Measured Points" Connection Element Sphere You can form the Connection Element Sphere from the local co-ordinates of known elements. For further details. Measurement points of known elements.04 . You can form the Connection Element Circle from the.7 Connection Elements. For further details. or from the measurement points of these elements.4 VI-9 . General Connection Element "From Measured Points" 15. You can form a cone using. the measurement points of several superimposed circles..g.g.Constructed Elements: Connection Elements 1. e.8 Connection Element Cylinder You can form the Connection Element Cylinder from the local co-ordinates of known elements. refer also to the topics Connection Elements. For further details. or from the measurement points of these elements.. the measurement points of several superimposed circles. e. You can form a cylinder using.9 Connection Element Cone You can form the Connection Element Cone from the local co-ordinates of known elements.09. refer also to the topics Connection Elements.04 v 2. General Connection Element "From Measured Points" 1. .4 15. Example: You can form an Element Freeform Surface from the measurement points of two lines. e. you must use GEOPAK and 3D-TOL.10 Connection Element Plane You can form the Connection Element Plane from the local co-ordinates of known elements. This. refer also to the topics Connection Elements.Constructed Elements: Connection Elements 1. You can form a plane using.11 Connection Element Freeform Surface The Connection Element Freeform surface is always formed from the measurement points of known elements.09. or from the measurement of these elements. (Picture below). GEOPAK provides 3D-TOL with the required measurement points. By "actually measured points" we understand in this case: points determined by a probing of the work piece. Prerequisites GEOPAK and 3D-TOL If you want to form the Connection Element Freeform Surface.04 .g. Measurement points The elements used to form the new Connection Element Freeform Surface may only contain actually measured points. General Connection Element "From Measured Points" 1. however. the measurement points of two lines. 3D-TOL performs the actual evaluation. 1 = Line in ZX plane 2 = Line in YZ plane For further details. VI-10 v 2. is based on the understanding that the lines have been measured in one plane. ellipse) Symmetry elements (elements point. these may not be compensated contours. Do not use the following measurement points to form a Connection Element Freeform Surface: Measurement points from the Element Point that was not measured as a "compensated point". surface) Tangent Move element (element line) Fit in element circle or sphere Minimum or maximum point of a contour (element point) Connection elements not calculated from measurement points. circle. observe the following: The probe directions are defined from the calculated element. For a Connection Element calculated from measurement points.04 v 2. For more details. refer to the topics Connection Elements General Connection Element "From Measured Points" 15. line. Contours If you want to use contours for the Connection Element Freeform Surface. line.09. as the compensation is taken on from 3DTOL.4 VI-11 .Constructed Elements: Connection Elements Do not use the following elements to form a Connection Element Freeform Surface: Theoretical elements Intersection elements (elements point. VI-12 v 2. use the menu "Element" and click on "Line" and in the subsequent dialogue onto the symbol (see above).1 Intersection Elements Intersection Element Line To crate an intersection line from two planes.4 15. you can use the tool bar.09.Intersection Elements 2 2.04 . Alternatively. In the dialogue "Intersection Element Line" select one plane each in the First and in the Second Element and click on Ok. 04 v 2. If you click on the empty line (in the ill.4 VI-13 . The right-hand rule as per the example above 1 Plane 1 2 Plane 2 NV1 Normal vector 1 (thumb) NV2 Normal vector 2 (index finger) 1S Sense of direction of line after intersection of plane 1 with plane 2 (middle finger) 2S Sense of direction of line after intersection of plane 2 with plane 1 (the planes intersect in reverse sequence. 15.Intersection Elements The sense of direction of the determined line follows the "Right-hand rule" (see ill. above underlaid in blue). For information about the topic "Loops " click on the term. you get to the dialogue "Free Element Input ". therefore also the sense of direction of the intersection line is reversed). below).09. the Intersection Element Point offers substantially more options (see ill. Alternatively.4 15..Intersection Elements 2.09. For information about the topic "Loops" click onto the term. the line (only two planes).2 Intersection Element Point To be able to construct an intersection element point. The dialogue "Intersection Element Point" is basically similar to the other intersection elements. below) than. you can use the tool bar. However.. use the menu bar and click on "Elements / Point" and in the subsequent dialogue onto the symbol (see above). VI-14 v 2.) you get to the dialogue "Free Element Input".04 . If you click onto the empty line (. for example. Point-Sphere.4 VI-15 .09. below) The line does not intersect with the circle. For more information refer to Intersection: Extras (Contour. The perpendicular is calculated. 15. Circle-Plane). if there is no intersection (ill.04 v 2. SoL = Intersection or perpendicular can be selected SmA = Intersection with axis S/M = Intersection or middle. when there is no intersection (ill. below) The circles do not intersect. The middle is calculated.Intersection Elements Several intersection options at a glance Plane Line Circle Cone Cylinder Ellipse Plane Error S SoL S mA S mA L Line S S S/L S mA S mA S/M Circle SoL S/L S/M L L L Cone S mA S mA L S mA S mA L Cylinder S mA S mA L S mA S mA L Ellipse L S/M L L L Error S = Intersection L = Perpendicular S/L = Intersection or perpendicular. -symbols (ill.g. Extra: Contour If an intersection element is a contour. Y. You can only intersect contours with lines. However.Intersection Elements 2. Via the min. the contour must be defined as the first element using the symbol.09.or Z-co-ordinate. circle/circle. Hint In case of more than one intersection point (e./max.04 . the perpendicular is offered as results. below). You can decide on one point each with the biggest or smallest X-. circle/plane). also in case of intersections of circle/line. above). you select the intersection points. Point In all other cases you will receive an error message.3 Intersection: Extras For the general statements you should first consult the topic Intersection Element Point.4 15. When projecting a point onto a contour. you can select your desired point of intersection via the symbols (ill. Extra: Point / Sphere Intersections are not possible for these elements. inform yourself thoroughly under the topic Intersection: Contour with Circle. Select the second element from the second list. VI-16 v 2. Line. circles or points. Ö Ö Select your contour from the first list via the arrow symbol. 2.2. the centre of the circle was automatically projected onto the plane. 15. For this.4 VI-17 . below).Intersection Elements Extra: Intersection Circle / Plane Up to version 2.09.04 v 2.3 you have the possibility to have the piercing points of the circle circumference line through the plane calculated as intersections (see ill. click on the symbol. As from v. or .04 ...4 Intersection Element Circle You use the function "Intersection Element" via the cylinder symbol whenever you want to calculate a circle in a measured plane. • Given diameter • Distance from the pole of the sphere • Distance from the base plane v 2.Intersection Elements 2.. Use the "Intersection Element" function via the cone symbol when you want to know at which level the cone has a determined diameter which diameter a cone has at a determined place.. The diameter of the circle is identical with the cylinder diameter (see picture below). The information as to whether it is a bore or a shaft is taken over by the cylinder.4 15. • Given diameter • Distance from the apex of the cone • Distance from the XY-plane • Distance from the YZ-plane • Distance from ZX-plane You use the function "Intersection Element" via the sphere symbol when you want to know VI-18 at which level the sphere has a determined diameter.09. Via the following symbols. which diameter a sphere has at a determined place. This is of importance for the application of MMC. 15. apart from the data about the centre.4 VI-19 . the big and the small diameter. Click onto the symbol and confirm.09. the cylinder or the cone serves as an intersection element (2nd element).04 v 2. In the result field and in the protocol you find. below).5 • Distance from the XY-plane • Distance from the YZ-plane • Distance from the ZX-plane Intersection Element Ellipse For an ellipse.Intersection Elements 2. also the angles that include the big semi axis with the co-ordinate axes (see ill. Symmetry Elements 3 3. Often.4 15.1 Symmetry Elements Symmetry Element Line The symmetry line of two lines is their median line.04 . The smaller angle is bisected. the symmetry line is found between two parallel edges. You can also use the axes of cones or cylinders as 1st or 2nd element. VI-20 v 2.09. Symmetry Elements 3. In the above illustration. the symmetry planes are in the joint material.2 Symmetry Element Plane: Two Ways You have possibilities to create symmetry elements in the "Element Plane" dialogue window.4 VI-21 . the symmetry plane is in the joint gap of the starting planes. 15.09. click on the symbol and come to the corresponding "Symmetry Element Plane" dialogue window. Symmetry Element of two Planes In the "Element Plane" dialogue window. Enter the planes under "First or Second Element" and confirm. Hint The symmetry plane is in the joint material or the joint gap between the starting planes respectively. In the above illustration.04 v 2. Symmetry Elements In the above illustration.04 . VI-22 v 2. In the above illustration. the symmetry plane is in the joint material of the starting planes. Possibly. In this case you should call up one of the starting planes from the memory and go the dialogue “Recalculate from memory” and click on the option "Change direction“ (symbol left).4 15. This is how you will get again two planes with a joint mass or a joint gap respectively. the symmetry plane is in the opening angle between the starting planes.09. both starting planes have been probed almost in parallel and from the same direction. Exception The above illustration shows the symmetry plane in the gap of the joint material or in the joint material. 3 Symmetry Element Point The symmetry point between two points is the mid-point between the two points. click on the symbol and the corresponding "Symmetry Element Plane" dialogue window appears.04 v 2. 3. For the calculation of the symmetry point. Hint The vector direction of the plane is defined by the direction from the first to the second point.Symmetry Elements Symmetry Element of two Points In the "Element Plane" dialogue window.09. You can also use the elements circle. GEOPAK uses the element mid-points.4 VI-23 . ellipse and sphere as 1st and 2nd element. 15. Remember that a mouse-click on the area [..] allows you to change to "Free Element Input". The diameter of the elements has no influence on the result. Enter the points under "First or Second Element" and confirm. 09. In case of a contour.. Ö Here. you get to the "Fit in Element Sphere" window. • • you have a circle with a specified diameter. 4..Fit in Elements 4 4. Fit in Element Circle Use the "Fit in Element" function in case.. This explains the symbols (picture below) in the "Fit in Element-Circle" window. there are four possibilities (see picture below) The four sectors are defined by the positive directions (+) of the lines. you intend to fit this circle in between two lines or a contour.4 15.1 Fit in Elements Fit in Element Sphere Fit in Element: As an additional element.04 .2 Ö By clicking on this symbol and confirming. you enter the diameter of the sphere and select the cone where the sphere must be fitted in. In the case of two lines.. The result is an element sphere with the location of this sphere being in the cone. you must select the range in which you intend to fit in the circle (for details refer to "Selection of Points Contour"). VI-24 v 2. or . we suggest you to fit in a cone a sphere with a given diameter. 09. tangent 2 becomes the tangent right outside and … . You can also imagine the small circle of the two circles as a point. Since in the two cases. Then you decide … whether the tangent must be placed at the circle from a point or whether … the line must be a common tangent of two circles (see four icons on the left)...04 v 2. more tangents are possible. First.. you come to the “Tangent“ window. The designation of the tangents results of the contact point with the second circle out of direction of the first circle (see our example above): 1 Tangent inside right 2 Tangent outside left 3 Tangent outside right 4 Tangent inside left If you want the invert the direction of the tangent. you have to select one via the icons (above). You have to take into account that … .Further Constructed Elements 5 Further Constructed Elements 5. 5. 15. select the circle where the tangent must be placed.1 Shift-Element Line With this option you create a line that runs parallel to the selected line (1st element) and through the selected point (2nd element).. you have to invert the order of the circles. tangent 3 becomes the tangent left outside.2 Tangent Via the icon.4 VI-25 . The CMM records the individual measurement points with the probing direction.1 Automatic Element Recognition Introduction With this function it is for some of the elements no longer necessary to select an element to measure a workpiece. 6.04 .09. When the element has been found. You can also automatically call up the tolerance comparison for all stored elements (see also the topic Settings).2 Further Options You can use the three elements first detected to initiate an automatic alignment (also refer to the topic Settings). below. In case that a point has been measured that is positioned too far outside the element being measured. see the line after two measured points). it is graphically represented in the dialogue "Automatic element recognition" (in the ill. VI-26 v 2. You measure a number of points and the element is automatically determined.Automatic Element Recognition 6 6. You can either use this last point as your first point for the new element search or you can stop the measurement. i. according to the surface alignment (see also the topic Settings). the element that has been previously detected in the part program is stored and this last point is disregarded (see ill. below) – this is done in the manual mode as a manual command and accordingly in the CNCmode. You can also automatically learn the clearance height.e.4 15. Furthermore you get an acoustical message and a further representation in the window Element Graphic. In this toolbar.04 v 2.3 Activating the Function After you have activated the function in Settings and the CMM is idle. To switch off the automatic element recognition. you can just start to measure in the manual mode.). The symbols are operative when an element can be calculated from measurement points.09. in order to be able to store an element (part program). Alternatively. diameter. The function with all options and the dialogue gets active.4 The Dialogue: Symbol and Information Boxes Toolbar In the toolbar of this dialogue (ill. 15. Information box An information box (ill. you can opt for the default automatic element recognition (symbol left). you must do this in the PartManager in Settings. you can pre-define an element which would mean a manual execution of all measurement processes up to the "Element finished". 6. below) informs you what has happened or what needs to be done respectively. the symbols are activated or hidden. Alternatively you can use the menu "Elements / Automatic element recognition".4 VI-27 . Fields for results In other fields for results you find the latest relevant results of the element recognition (length.Automatic Element Recognition 6. below). angle etc. Automatic Element Recognition 6. This is always the Z-axis.04 . You can also define the clearance height already in the Settings. After recognition of the first three elements. refer to Patterns for Alignment ). The height can be put manually in the text box next to the symbol. The automatic call-up of the tolerance comparison you can either determine in this dialogue or already in the Settings.4 15. The symbols from left to right: VI-28 No tolerance comparison Tolerance comparison directly after recognition of an element Tolerance comparison of all elements after ending the functionality v 2. Following the surface alignment. With a click on this symbol you accept and store the recognised element with all measurement points in the part program.5 The Dialogue: Important Functions With the automatic element recognition we provide you with a range of functions for a user-friendly control of the measurement process according to your individual requirements. you can initiate an automatic alignment using this symbol (for detailed information.09. this is also executed automatically. If there are already measurement points in the memory. With a click on this symbol you store the recognised element with all points excluding the last one. A click on this symbol deletes the last measurement point. With the automatic element recognition activated. a clearance height can be automatically set. This function also applies for the last element that has been automatically learnt/stored. A click on this button and the dialogue disappears. a safety inquiry appears. The last point is used for the next element. 4 VI-29 . You can use all three options via the settings. use the PartManager via Settings / Defaults for programs / GEOPAK / GEOPAK configuration / Automatic element recognition (see ill. 15.04 v 2. Activate or finish the function in the dialogue top left. To get to the respective dialogue. below).09.6 Settings The special options of the Automatic Element Recognition include the automatic alignment the automatic setting of a clearance height and the automatic call-up of the tolerance comparison.Automatic Element Recognition 6. 4 15. (see also already in Automatic Element Recognition ). Points outside the range (red arrow in ill. initiate a new process for element recognition (for this. below). Use the options for the tolerance comparison to decide for either • • • VI-30 no or a direct tolerance comparison (after storing an element) or the tolerance comparison of all elements after finishing the functionality. Angular Range You use the angular range to determine the accuracy range of the probing direction. outside angle "α") are no longer used for determining the element. already refer to Automatic Element Recognition ).Automatic Element Recognition Capture Range You use the capture range to determine the accuracy range within which points of an element shall be recognised. The probing direction of each measurement point is very important for determining an element.09.04 . v 2. These points initiate a new process for element recognition. This is why points for which the probing direction is not within the defined angle (red arrow in ill. This action corresponds to activating the symbol left. You can use the GOTO-button to additionally learn interim positions that are also stored. the dialogue is closed and the functionality is finished. The element names are given by GEOPAK. to Gauss. The advantage of this is that you need not switch between joystick and keyboard. no probe change is possible.7. sphere and step cylinder cannot be recognised with this function.Automatic Element Recognition 6. This applies in the same way for a line with only two measured points (with a third point. Hint For the SpinArm.2 Limitations The element point cannot be automatically learnt (if only one measurement point has been measured.09. inclined circle.4 VI-31 .7 Special Cases / Limitations 6. You can activate this function only via the joystick. Keyboard (dialogue) Joystick CANCEL = START = Hint When the display in the dialogue shows 0 and you push the START button.7. The elements ellipse. always a circle could be recognised). certain driver settings are required (AutoDummy=1 und MouseModeAvailable=0) 15. this may always belong to another element). 6. Cone and cylinder must be measured in circles.04 v 2. All elements are only calculated acc.1 Special Cases with the Joystick With the joystick you have the possibility to perform two of the functions directly without the necessity to use the dialogue. During an automatic element recognition. 1 Carbody Measurement: Hole Shapes Hole Shapes: Introduction For the measurement of vehicle bodies – particularly in the automotive industry – a range of further elements is required in MCOSMOS. For hole shapes you also have the option to measure the surface with any number of points.4 15. they are also output in the protocols. however. You can also call up an already known surface from the memory. Length values are not separately tolerated due to the high precision of the punching processes. the position and axis direction are important when working with these elements.04 .Carbody Measurement: Hole Shapes 7 7. However. When measuring the actual element. For these hole shapes. the element. Further topics Symmetry Axis and Width How to Work Tolerance Comparison / Position Tolerance VI-32 v 2. As for the inclined circle.09. refer to the topic Differences to Inclined Circle). you find the following elements apart from the "Inclined circle": Square Rectangle Slot Triangle Trapezoid Hexagon Drop These elements are particularly used for measuring punched holes. you can only measure a defined number of points (for detailed information. you first have to measure the surface (see example illustration below of measurement point display) and second. First of all. 15.Carbody Measurement: Hole Shapes 7.4 VI-33 .2 Differences: Hole Shape – Inclined Circle To get to the dialogues.04 v 2.09. either use the symbol bar and click on the relevant symbol or use the menu "Elements / Hole shapes" and then on the Element. Carbody Measurement: Hole Shapes For measuring the hole shapes (example dialogue.09. right).4 15.04 . the system only uses the minimum required number of points VI-34 v 2. There is no button "Autom.04 v 2. You cannot measure more points. element finished".Carbody Measurement: Hole Shapes The elements and their respective number of measurement points: Foursquare 4 Rectangle 5 Long hole 5 Triangle 5 Trapezium 6 Hexagon 6 Drop form 6 The elements are automatically finished after measuring these points. It is also not possible to enter a "Number of points". Therefore. Further topics Hole Shapes: Introduction Symmetry Axis and Width How to Work Tolerance Comparison / Tolerance Position 15.09. There are no buttons for the calculation mode.4 VI-35 . no form deviations are possible and no different modes of calculation. 2 or 3 = are each the widths or heights Symmetry axis: The direction is defined as follows: Triangle From the ground line to the opposite corner. drop form and hexagon).Carbody Measurement: Hole Shapes 7. Other punched hole shapes The sequence of the first two measurement points determines the direction of the symmetry axis. Centre point: The centre point is positioned on the symmetry axis in the two hole ends.3 Hole Shape: Symmetry Axis and Width The hole shapes all have at least one symmetry axis and one width perpendicular to the symmetry axis (see example illustrations below. Drop form From the big to the small circle. W 1. Trapezium Perpendicular to the parallel sides in direction from the bigger to the smaller side.4 15.09. VI-36 v 2.04 . from top left: trapezium. 04 v 2. The same applies vice versa. or lines changing into circle arcs.e.09.Carbody Measurement: Hole Shapes Further topics Hole Shapes: Introduction Differences to Inclined Circle How to Work Tolerance Comparison / Position Tolerance 7.4 VI-37 . below): The forms are composite forms. When measuring long holes and drop forms. the angles are not included in the protocol. i. do not get into the lines when measuring circle arcs.4 Hole Shape: How to Work When working with hole shapes. you measure the points in a certain sequence and at given positions (see ill. be careful not to interfere with the circle arcs when measuring the line with the measurement points as this would lead to wrong results. According to the requirements of the task. 15. We have either to deal with angles. also refer to the topic GEOPAK Elements: Hole Shapes ).09. below). below. You can only tolerate the position of the centre and the direction of the axis. Further topics Hole Shapes: Introduction Differences to Inclined Circle Symmetry Axis and Width Tolerance Comparison / Tolerance Position 7.04 . for detailed information. VI-38 v 2. also refer to the topic Position). Position Tolerance You can execute a position tolerance with any one of the hole shapes (ill. for detailed information also refer to the topic Dialogue Tolerance Comparison Elements). you can use a variable (for detailed information. below.Carbody Measurement: Hole Shapes In the learn mode.5 Hole Shapes: Tolerance Comparison / Position Tolerance Comparison Element With any one of the hole shapes you can execute a "Tolerance comparison element" (ill. the representation in the display shows you where to probe (see example ill.4 15. To tolerate the measurement of a hole shape. select a label in the text box next to the symbol.04 v 2. Further topics Hole Shapes: Introduction Differences to Inclined Circle Symmetry Axis and Width How to Work 15.09.Carbody Measurement: Hole Shapes To apply the Maximum Material Condition (MMC).4 VI-39 . Starting with version 2. If you wish to use the measurement results of both CMMs to create a joint protocol. refer to Retrieve Element Data ). two identical systems measure the workpiece (ill.04 . one of the PCs is declared the Master PC and the second computer the "Slave PC".09. the data can be transferred between the PCs (for detailed information. The part programs can be learnt from either the Master CMM or from the Slave CMM. and the PCs are connected via a network. each CMM has an own PC. The Synchronisation is partly automatic. The part programs can be synchronised. Identical in this context means: Two CMMs are working with our software MCOSMOS.4 15.Carbody Measurement: Introduction 8 Carbody Measurement: Introduction For a carbody measurement. a virtual cuboid is positioned around the probe to prevent collisions. The protocol is output on the Master PC. below). we have furthermore established an "Element Container". The programmes can be started either from the Master PC or from a third PC using the RemoteManager. the second probe can move into this section.4. The measurement results are – like known from MCOSMOS – measured. But also the software contains features to exclude the occurence of a collision. Only after a probe has left an overlapping section. In this container you can gather measurement points (applies VI-40 v 2. The fact that the measurement is performed by two CMMs means a considerable saving of time for the body measurement. Analogous. The two machine controllers that are linked with each other via hardware components perform the collision control between the overlapping measurement ranges of the two CMMs. After you have defined your probe system. for the carbody measurement – be transferred between the two PCs. you must first adjust some defaults (PartManager / Settings / Defaults for programs / GEOPAK / DualArm). This TCP enables the data transfer between Master and Slave PC. use the option buttons of the dialogue and click on either "Server" for the Master PC or on "Client" for the Slave PC. To activate this functionality. Hint In the dialogue "PartManager Configuration" make sure that you click on the GEOPAK repeat mode in the section "Autostart". the repeat mode is automatically started after starting the PartManager. you must additionally enter the network address of the other computer (Master PC).Carbody Measurement: Introduction principally for GEOPAK). No selected workpiece is required for this. Ö When clicking on "Server". Further Topics Setup Parameters Monitoring: Data Transfer Start Part Program Synchronisation of Part Program Retrieve Element Data Element Container Joint Co-ordinate System Transfer Co-ordinate System 8. In this case. The port number must be the same on both PCs. After a new installation.g. a preset port is displayed.1 Settings Server or Client To be able to work with a DualArm system. As required. Ö When clicking on "Client". 15. the DualArm functionality is not available.04 v 2.09.4 VI-41 . Always start the Master PC first and then the Slave PC. these measurement points can – e. Confirm and the "Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)" is initialised. What you need to know A part can have several part programs. in the repeat mode only when the part program has not yet been started.4 15. go to the GEOPAK learn mode and use the menu bar / Program. This is achieved using the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP). a confirmation of the end of the synchronisation is sent to the Master PC and vice versa. for example. If. 8. In the learn mode. Use this function on your Master PC to start a part program on the Slave PC. The "Joint Co-ordinate System" is automatically loaded on both PCs.4 Synchronisation of Part Program The part programs on both PCs (Master and Slave PC) must be synchronised. "Send").09. To get to the function "Synchronisation of part program". The function "Element Container" is operative also without TCP. VI-42 v 2. you can enter a timeout limit for the part program until synchronisation in seconds. 8.04 .e. Ö Ö start GEOPAK If in the Socket Monitor of the Slave PC the button "Send" is activated like on the Master PC. and click in the menu bar on Settings / DualArm Socket Monitor. a part program on a Slave PC is finished.2 Monitoring: Data Transfer After completion of the "Settings" GEOPAK offers the possibility to check the TCP with its functions (e. this function is always available. A dialogue of the same name appears. a message with the content "Synchronisation" is sent to the other PC. you have performed the settings correctly. the part name is also the name of the part program. i. You can also use the function to check if the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) is active or not (for the topic "TCP". Start GEOPAK on the Master PC and click in the menu bar on Settings / DualArm Socket Monitor.3 Start Part Program Start the part program for the carbody measurement via the menu bar/Program and click on the function. The part program on the Slave PC is then started without a further dialogue. Now you can carry out a test by sending measurement results from one PC to the other. Then start the Slave PC. also refer to the topic "Carbody Measurement: Introduction").g. separate for the two PCs.Carbody Measurement: Introduction 8. If there is only one part program. To the end of a part program. In the text box "Timeout" which you can activate by clicking on this symbol. A cancellation could.09.g. Hints While a PC is waiting for a synchronisation.6 Both Part Programs should be Finished The situation may occur that the part program on the Slave PC finishes earlier than on the Master PC. an automatic synchronisation takes place at the end of each part program. This simply means that the part programs on the two PCs are not finished until also the final synchronisation is finished on both PCs. useful results are only possible when using the synchronisation. you receive the message "Command cancelled after timeout ". for example. A synchronisation is also possible during an active part program. If. a window appears "Waiting for synchronisation". If you receive no feedback during the timeout limit.Carbody Measurement: Introduction 8. Additionally. This label must be used by the part program on both PCs. a label must be set in the part program.4 VI-43 . With a click on the button "Cancel" you can stop the synchronisation. In the dialogue "Synchronisation of part program" you enter a meaningful text (e. 15. In this case. both PCs use the same synchronisation command in the active part program. the name of the label is displayed. To recognise the exact synchronisation point.04 v 2.5 Synchronisation is nessecary The synchronisation is mandatory. "Position XYZ reached"). be required when another part program is executed or the communication has been interrupted. Therefore. in a certain section both CMMs measure only from different sides. for example. 8. A corresponding window appears for confirmation. an error message appears. the PC that has retrieved the data receives a message. The data refer to the "Joint Co-ordinate System".09. You would just need to enter a number bigger than 1. If you receive no feedback from the second PC during this timeout period.04 . The Master PC retrieves the data.Carbody Measurement: Introduction 8.7 Retrieve Element Data The function "Retrieve element data" is used for transferring data between Master and Slave PC using the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP). If this has not been defined. the Slave PC sends the data. Hints Use the text box for "Number of elements" to retrieve measurement results of more than one element. The dialogue furthermore provides for defining a timeout in seconds. the workpiece co-ordinate system is used. if available. The Master PC waits until the data are available.4 15. In case of an error. Also the Slave PC can retrieve data. VI-44 v 2. the element "Container" can also be used in the GEOPAK basic geometry. You must simply ensure that the alignment is the same on both CMMs.04 v 2. find an example in the table below: The measurement points of an element have been determined on two CMMs. system". Regarding the carbody measurement. It depends on the respective part program. The co-ordinate system is stored in the GEOPAK learn mode. The origin of the first sphere is the centre of the joint co-ordinate system. however. in the corresponding menu to which you get via the menu bar / co-ordinate system and with a click on the function "Send actual co-ord.8 Element Container The element "Container" is only used to gather measurement points. a prerequisite that the spheres have been measured on both CMMs in the same way and at the same positions.9 Joint Co-ordinate System The current co-ordinate system can be stored as a joint co-ordinate system not dependent on how the co-ordinate system has been defined. The centres of the three spheres are used for this alignment as follows: A plane through the three centres is used for the spatial alignment. 5 points Element finished Element finished Request element (Container 5 as 2) No action Send element (Container 5) Connection element cylinder (container 1+2) 8. Hints It is. 15.e.4 VI-45 . 5 points Meas. the co-ordinate system would not be a "joint" co-ordinate system. A line from the centre of the first sphere to the centre of the second sphere is used for the alignment of the X-axis. but have been gathered and calculated on one PC. Otherwise.Carbody Measurement: Introduction 8. i. Master PC Slave PC Element container 1 Element container 5 Meas. for which calculation of an element the measurement points are needed at a later time.09. Example Three spheres have been measured. Apart from the carbody measurement. VI-46 v 2.Carbody Measurement: Introduction 8. there are two functions available together with the corresponding dialogues: Send .. or Retrieve co-ordinate system.. For transferring the current co-ordinate system. A new alignment on the second CMM is not required. To get to the dialogues. The retrieved co-ordinate system is stored as the current co-ordinate system. go in the GEOPAK learn mode to the menu bar / Program and click on the relevant function.09.10 Transfer Co-ordinate System You can transfer a co-ordinate system from one CMM to the other. If there is no "Joint Co-ordinate System". The part program is not continued until this has been completed.4 15.04 . you get an error message. ....... 2 Element Graphics Options..................7 1................ 12 Display of Graphic Windows ..... 2 1.......... 4 Select Element ................... 5 Rotate ............23 1..........24 1...........................................................................................................8 1................12 1...................20.............20.................................... 10 Multi-Colour Contour Display .................................... 6 Contour View.......9 1.................26 1...........10 1...............................................27 1...19 1..29 1.. 2 Toolbar in the "Graphics of Elements" Window ................................................................................................................... 7 Circles as Partial Circle Display ....09.........................................04 Print Graphics during Learn and Repeat Mode..........14 1.. 2 The "Graphics" Pull-Down Menu..... Flatness and Circularity...................3 1..................... 3 Graphic Limits........... 11 Contour Display as Lines and / or Points..................................................................................................................Graphics of Elements VII Geometric Elements: Graphical Presentation Contents 1 Graphics of Elements...... 6 Display Sub Elements of a Contour .....Task .....16 1.......25 1...... 12 Learnable Graphic Settings ...........................................28 1.......... 14 Recalculate Straightness... 17 Store Section of Graphic Display in Learn Mode............................13 1...............4 VII-1 ..........18 1.................2 1............................................. 22 Parallelism Graphics .............11 1............. 13 Options of the "Graphics of Elements" ........6 1.................. 3 Changing the representation of the graphics of elements ............ 19 Print Graphic in Repeat Mode........ 8 Contour Point Selection by Keyboard ............ 18 Learn Graphics of Elements Printing with "Autoscale" .......................................... 3 Further Components of the Graphics of Elements Window ..15 1......................................4 1.............................1 1...................30 14......................... 18 Learn Graphics of Elements Printing with a "Scale Factor" ................. 4 Element Information ..................5 1.. 15 1............... 16 1.............. 24 v 2... 20 Calculate New Elements out of Contour Points..20 Graphics of Elements ..22 1............................ 19 Define Scaling ......17 1.........2 Delete Measurement Points and Recalculate . 20 Define Label Layout..................21 1........................ 21 Compare Points ....................1 Toolbar in the "Straightness" Window .............................................................................................................................................. 15 1.......................... view VII-2 v 2.1 Graphics of Elements Graphics of Elements . you find the following buttons for functions you frequently use in the "Graphics" pull-down menu. line of sight towards the Z-axis) Side face (YZ-plane. The components of the graphics of elements window are: 1.Graphics of Elements 1 1. Zoom: Zoom graphics clip Reset zoom Moving: Move graphics clip Graphical element or point selection(this function is only in the single or learn mode available) Element information Display element information Rotate: Rotate the graphic Display Option Top view (XY-plane.04 . you can only activate functions if the graphics of elements window is also activated. In this case.2 a toolbar the range of the graphic representation in the window the "Graphics" pull-down menu with its functions in the menu bar The "Graphics" Pull-Down Menu You find the "Graphics" pull-down menu in the menu bar. In this menu.3 Toolbar in the "Graphics of Elements" Window In the toolbar.09.Task The graphics of elements is used as a graphic support for your measurement tasks with GEOPAK. line of sight towards the X-axis) Front view (ZX-plane. The window is available in the single and learn mode as well as in the repeat mode. 1.4 14. line of sight towards the Y-axis) 3D. all the other menus are deactivated. 6 Graphic Limits If you want to input the "Pan" and/or "Zoom" command numerically.Graphics of Elements 1. you can change the representation of the graphics of elements through further options. Hint The "Reset Zoom" function is only possible if you’ve activated the auto scale (see " Element Graphic Options"). use this function (menu bar "Graphics / Graphic Limits"). Print graphics: If you click this symbol.4 Element Graphics Options With this function. you can read in this window. This function is only in the single or learn mode available. which changes you have made via the "Pan" and/or "Zoom" functions. Contrariwise.5 Further Components of the Graphics of Elements Window Further components of the graphics of elements window are: Further graphics status line in the lower window margin Co-ordinate system view (in the window below. a printout of the current window contents with the usual log data is created. left side) Origin of co-ordinate system Auto grid with measures You can activate/deactivate the display of these components in the "Element Graphic Options" window. the commands in the learn mode must not be imperatively carried out. 1.09. "Print Window" and "Close Window". 1. 14. you can store in another window of the part program commands such as "Current View Settings". However.04 v 2.4 VII-3 . (See "Element Graphics Options Window") Learnable graphic commands: If you click this symbol. Dragging the mouse you determine the increased area (red rectangle) Reset Zoom to reduce the element graphic to the original size back. connection element. click on one element or more. recalculate from memory. Ö Ö you click on the symbol or with a double click into the graphics of elements. you can move the displayed graphics clip in the window.. As soon as you’ve selected and confirmed.8 Select Element If you want to select geometric elements. Moving When pressing the left mouse button. Procedure Ö In the graphics.g. you determine whether the next element to select should be the first or the second element.).4 14. you can select and zoom a clip of the graphics of elements through simple click.09. the graphics of elements is in the selection mode..Graphics of Elements 1. if you are in a function.7 Changing the representation of the graphics of elements Zoom If you click on this symbol. which expected an element as input (e. v 2. 1. That means. If you select two elements. the "Select Element" mode of the graphics of elements is automatically reset. Ö Press the left mouse button. The function "select element" is only active.04 . the mouse pointer changes to a cross-hair and you can click on the elements. The current option number (1 or 2) is indicated in the mouse pointer. intersection element. The selected elements are displayed in red in the graphics. you must note the following: VII-4 With the right mouse button. etc. To do so.09. Show elements again Masked out elements will be shown again. The information-field contains information of the element. You can have the hidden elements indicated again. you can add further information in the information-field. The information-fields are only indicated for a moment. click in the "Graphics" pull-down menu on "Display Hidden Elements". you get an information display for the elements. Furthermore.4 VII-5 . you can delete the info-field or mask out the element. keep pressed the left mouse button and move the info-field. The mouse pointer changes to a cross-hair indicating the letter "i".04 v 2.Graphics of Elements 1. the information-fields get lost after rotation of the co-ordinate system. Hint You can move the info-fields.9 Element Information With this function. you get further information to the corresponding element. The context menu is shown. For example. if you click on "Graphics / Show Hidden Elements". Hide elements Ö Click with the right mouse button into the info field of the element you wish to mask out. Ö Click on the element you want to get an info about it. Ö Click on the "Hide Element" function". 14. Proceed as follows: Ö Click on the "Element-Information" icon to change to the "Element-Information" mode. If you click on an info-field with the right mouse button. Click on the info-field. In the result field. you can have displayed a single contour including all elements created within this contour (so-called sub elements). This window offers you the following possibilities: Contour Selection Display Subelements of a Contour Partial Circle Display ON and OFF Point Selection by Keyboard Multi-Colour Contour Display Display Contour as Lines and/or Points.04 . This is how you get to the "Contour View" window: Ö Click on the "Contour View" symbol in the graphics of elements icon bar. The settings you make in the " View Contour" window are for all or single contour.09. VII-6 v 2.Graphics of Elements 1.11 Contour View This function allows different contour-related views to be adjusted in the graphics of elements. the graphics is automatically resized in the window. Or use the menu bar: Ö Click into the graphics of elements. The graphics is rotated in positive or negative direction around the selected axis. Proceed as follows: Ö Click on the "3D-View" in the toolbar in the "Graphics of Elements" window.4 14. The mouse pointer is displayed as an arrow in this mode. Ö Click on one of the three co-ordinate axes of the represented coordinate systems that are displayed and move the mouse to the right or to the left.10 Rotate In the 3D view. Ö Click on "Graphic / View Contour" in the menu bar. These settings enable you to suppress or show parts of contours in the graphics of elements. you can change to the "Rotate" mode. 1. For instance. Hint It is favourable to rotate in the normal (no zoom) graphics and with the "Auto Scale" setting in the "Elements Graphics Options" window because after the rotation. in order to activate the "Graphic" function in the menu bar. Ö Click on the "Rotate" icon. only the active contour will be displayed.12 Display Sub Elements of a Contour To change the display of contours.4 VII-7 . Then adjust whether and which further geometrical elements are to be displayed.Graphics of Elements 1. 14. Ö Ö Activate the check box "Only Active Contour". irrespective of whether or not these elements have been created by means of the selected contour. the elements which were created by means of this contour (fitted-in circle. follow these fundamental steps: First find out whether you want to view a specific contour or whether all contours are to be displayed. Ö Activate the check box "Only Contour Subelements" within the area "Geometric Elements". Above the contour selected. line. the plane in which plane the contour was created and whether it is an open or closed contour. in the graphics of elements.).09. Display contour and its sub elements Of a contour you wish to view. Selecting "All" causes the contour and all geometric elements (circle. only the contour itself and its sub elements. etc. in other words. etc. there appear the number of points the contour contains.04 v 2. If "None" is selected.) to be displayed. Choose a contour from the list box. sometimes you may require only partial information on elements (e.4 14.g.Graphics of Elements 1. This is based on the premise that the circle is a sub element of a contour. Moreover.13 Circles as Partial Circle Display Larger part programs containing numerous elements may cause the graphics of elements to become unclear and complex. only on that part of the circle which runs through a contour) for the graphic view. The part beyond is masked out. Hint To generate an inlaid circle. use the button "Fit in Element" in the "Circle Element" dialogue.04 . VII-8 v 2.09. Using the "Partial Circle Display" function it is possible to display only that part of a circle which runs on the contour. in order to mask-out those parts of circles which do not run on the contour.09. This is generally based on the condition that the circle in question is a sub element of a contour.Graphics of Elements Mask-out circle elements of contours Activate the "Partial Circle Display" function. You get the following graphics of elements: 14.4 VII-9 .04 v 2. but to the graphics of elements. Activate the function "Point Selection by Keyboard". you use. Or use the menu bar: Ö Click into the graphics of elements.09. to undo the last point area selection.4 14. as all subsequent keyboard inputs would again be related to the dialogue. Ö Use the arrow keys to move the mouse pointer to the contour point which you wish to define as the starting point of the point area to be selected. the "Element Circle" dialogue with "Fit in Element" activated.Graphics of Elements 1. Ö Operate the Enter key to define the selected contour point as the starting point. This action has to be repeated. for instance. when you have pressed the left mouse button. When selecting a point with the mouse. You confirm and the dialogue "Fit in element Circle" will be opened. VII-10 Ö Use the arrow keys to move the mouse pointer to the desired contour point. At the beginning. Ö Click with the mouse into the graphics of elements to make sure that the following keyboard inputs do not apply to the open dialogue. Ö Click on the "Contour View" symbol in the graphics of elements icon bar. To open the "Point Selection Contour" dialogue. …To select contour points using the keyboard. the mouse pointer is always positioned onto the first contour point. After your inputs in the dialogue "Fit in element Circle" you confirm again. you always get the point located closed to the mouse pointer. Ö Operate the Enter key to define the selected contour point as the starting point of an area selection. for instance.04 . in order to activate the "Graphic" function in the menu bar Ö Ö Click on "Graphic / View Contour" in the menu bar. whenever you click with the mouse into the dialogue.14 Contour Point Selection by Keyboard A contour consisting of many points located close to each other makes it difficult for the mouse to catch the desired contour point. v 2. it is necessary that the "Point Selection Contour" window is open. Arrow key above LH arrow key. e. for instance. The "Multicolour Mode" enables several contours to be shown in different colours. Activate the "Multicolour Mode" function.g. blue. Page down Pos 1 Moves mouse pointer to the next contour point End Enter (first time) Enter (second time) Moves mouse pointer to the previous contour point For fast mouse pointer movement on the contour Moves mouse pointer to the first contour point Moves mouse pointer to the last contour point Start of selection End of selection In the "Point Selection by Keyboard" mode. for zooming into the graphics.4 VII-11 . Ö Ö Click on "Graphic / Contour in the menu bar. beginning with white. In the multi-colour mode. a measured contour is required to be compared to its nominal contour. contours are always shown in white colour.04 v 2. That would provide you a more detailed view while selecting points. it might be difficult to distinguish these two contours in the graphics of elements. Or use the menu bar: Ö Click into the graphics of elements to activate the "Graphic" function in the menu bar. 14.15 Multi-Colour Contour Display Within the graphics of elements. Deactivate the multi-colour mode for contours Deselect the "Multicolour Mode" in the "View Contour" using the check box.Graphics of Elements Key Mouse pointer movement RH arrow key. If more than five contours are displayed. you can use the mouse for an additional functionality. cyan and magenta). Ö Click on the " View Contour" symbol in the graphics of elements icon bar. If. Page up. Then all contours will appear in the default colour white. green. the series of colours repeats cyclically in the specified order.09. Arrow key below Ctrl + arrow key. the contours are shown in five successive colours (white. 1. Ö Select an element from the list box "Reference element". In the dialogue "Learnable graphic settings" you define the structure of the graphic evaluation. The list box "Reference elements" only lists elements that are used in the part program and that can be used with the selected graphic type.16 Contour Display as Lines and / or Points By default. Layout of the info windows You can use the function "Define label layout" to load the number. This type of view is advisable in conjunction with the function "Point Selection by Keyboard". In the drop-down menu "Output". position and contents of the info windows of the graphic from a meta file. irrespective of the setting in the "View Contour" dialogue.17 Learnable Graphic Settings You can open the window "Learnable graphic settings" only in the GEOPAK part program editor. In case that multiple reference elements are possible. Activate the "View Points" function in the "Contour Display Mode" area. The points . as the graphic settings are automatically stored in the learn mode. Ö Ö Click on "Output" in the menu bar. Show Contour in Points Display Perform the following steps if only the points of a contour are to be shown in the graphics of elements: Ö Click on the "View Contour" symbol in the graphics of elements icon bar. The contour points co-ordinates themselves are not shown in this type of display. Ö Ö Click on "Graphic / Contour View" in the menu bar.4 14. click on "Learnable graphic settings". 1. VII-12 v 2.09.lines view is automatically activated during the selection of points. This is an array of lines connecting the individual point co-ordinates of the contour.Graphics of Elements 1. With this function. contours are shown in the graphics of elements as a polygon. Or use the menu bar: Ö Click into the graphics of elements to activate the "Graphic" function in the menu bar.04 . always enter either the current or the nominal element. Define graphic type Open the list box "Define type of graphic" and select a graphic type. If you select another graphic type (e.e. Display of the graphic windows When deactivating the button "Auto scale". top view. refer to "Define Layout of Info Windows" and "Display of Graphic Windows". For this.g. Co-ordinate mode With the buttons "Co-ordinate mode" you determine if the co-ordinates of the visual range are entered as cartesian co-ordinates.09. For details as to the operation of the buttons.04 v 2. 14.18 Display of Graphic Windows Element graphic options In the "Element graphic options" you determine which elements you wish to have displayed in the element graphic. as cylinder co-ordinates or as spherical co-ordinates. circular runout). activate the function "Load layout #". i. Hint The graphic origin is positioned in the left bottom corner of the graphic window. Setting of views You can use the view buttons for setting the views. refer to the topic "Options of the "Graphics of Elements".4 VII-13 . Ö In the area "Define label layout". this function is deactivated. To load" Define label layout" is only possible when working with the element graphic and the airfoil analysis graphic (MAFIS). For more information about this topic. 1. front view or 3D view. enter the desired values into the input fields of the areas "Minimum" and "Maximum". Ö Enter the number of the layout to be loaded in the repeat mode into the list box. side view. you can perform the settings for the co-ordinates of the visual range.Graphics of Elements the graphic is printed out in the repeat mode exactly according to the layout you have defined in the GEOPAK learn mode. In the "Element Graphic Options" window.4 14. Or click on "Options" in the "Graphic" pull-down menu. Here you determine. Origin: With this function. you activate the automatic grid display with scale labelling. you can change the display of the graphics of elements through further functions. So you can click on elements in the "Graphics of Elements" window and measure for example the angle or the distance between elements. the actual probe radius is indicated as a thin black line within the symbolic representation of the probe. The probe is only displayed in the graphics if it is located in the actual windowing of the "graphics of elements". cone and ellipse. these elements are not displayed at graphic selection. The window is divided in two parts: Elements In the left part of the window. you enable the display of the coordinate system. Flags: With this function. If a desired measurement task can’t be utilised appropriately.Graphics of Elements 1. If the actual probe diameter in the graphic display is smaller than the symbolic representation of the probe. you display the symmetry axes for the elements such as circle. you find the symbols of the different element types. you enable to display the origin. for the actual element. With this function. Info. Further Functions You can activate or deactivate the functions through mouse click on the corresponding icon. Co-ordinate system: With this function. you enable the display of the status line (operator indicator line). Symmetry axis: With this function. The probe is represented as a red sphere in non varying size and is always well displayed. Probe radius: With this function. you enable the display of the position of the probe. you enable the display of the position of the probe radius. VII-14 v 2.04 . you can opt for a graphic selection of elements. Auto scale: With the auto scale it is possible to view every inch of the graphics and in full size in the "Graphics of Elements" window. which elements must be displayed. Option Settings: With this function. A thin red circumference around the probe shows the actual diameter of the probe. Probe position: With this function. you get an information display for the elements. Grid: With this function. cylinder. We suggest to always work with the activated auto scale.09.19 Options of the "Graphics of Elements" You activate the "Element Graphic Options" window by clicking on the icon. g. Print graphics: If you click on this icon. Task: You can mark and remove meas. you click on "Show Straightness Diagram". 14. we give detailed information to these subjects under straightness. After the corrections. How to display the graphics window (e.09. a printout of the current window contents with the usual log data is created. In the "Straightness" window.Graphics of Elements 1.20. Elements of the Graphics Window: Toolbar Graphical display in the left part Numerical evaluation in the right part 1. in another window. commands in the part program such as "Actual Graphics Settings".20 Recalculate Straightness. "Print Window" and "Close Window".4 VII-15 . points in the graphics for the straightness. flatness and circularity. you can store. Flatness and Circularity Hints on beforehand: While this chapter exclusively treats the description of the dialogues and graphics of elements. flatness and circularity with the mouse pointer. straightness) Ö Select the "Straightness" in the "Tolerance" pull-down menu under "Form Tolerance" or Ö Ö click on the "Straightness" tool for evaluation.1 Toolbar in the "Straightness" Window Zoom graphics clip Reset zoom Move graphics clip Graphical element or point selection Display element information Recalculate without selected points Learnable graphic commands: If you click on this icon.04 v 2. you can recalculate the form deviation. 04 .2 Delete Measurement Points and Recalculate Proceed as follows (two methods) Graphical: • Click on the "Recalculate without Selected Points" button. flatness and circularity over all meas. you select by mouse click the points that are not supposed to be included in the recalculation.Graphics of Elements 1. in the standard printout.20.09. Hint Straightness. if necessary in the file output and in the statistical analysis Note that the function "Delete Measurement Points and Recalculate" is not learnable VII-16 v 2. In the graphics. namely • • • • in the field for results. you confirm in the window "Recalculate without Selected Points". Point " buttons and confirm. points are always accepted.4 14. For that. After that. • • The mouse pointer changes to a cross-hair pointer. Numerical: • You can realize this selection also without graphic support in the "Recalculate without Selected Points" window. click on the "Select Min. Point " and/or "Select Max. 4 VII-17 . Therefore. Or use the menu bar: Ö Click on the graphic window you want to print.09. The graphic is immediately printed. Adapt graphic to the set paper format In the area "Magnification" you set the required scaling. Print graphic in learn mode Ö Ö Activate the function "Print now". Ö Click on the "Print Graphics" symbol in the icon bar of the graphic window you want to print. refer to the topic "Autoscaling or Manual Scaling". Now. the graphic is printed in the repeat mode exactly like it has been learned in the learn mode. refer to the topic "Define label layout". Furthermore you can define and store the layout of the labels. Confirm your input. 14.Graphics of Elements 1. For detailed information. Label layout in the learn mode You can use the function "Define label layout for print command" to store the number. Close window Activate this function if you want to close the graphic window after completion of the part program command.21 Print Graphics during Learn and Repeat Mode This function enables you to print the displayed graphic windows directly from the learn and repeat modes. the settings in the area "Define label layout for print command" are important. Confirm your input. Print graphic in repeat mode Ö Ö Activate the function "Learn print command". position and contents of the labels of the graphic in a meta file. Ö Click on "Graphic / Print" in the menu bar. The drop-down menu "Graphic" is displayed as active. For detailed information.04 v 2. e. you will have to turn the auto scale function in the "Elements Graphics Options" to OFF. Confirm your settings in the "Learnable Graphic Commands" window. v 2. Ö Confirm your settings.04 . however. for instance.23 Learn Graphics of Elements Printing with "Autoscale" The auto scale function causes the current printout of the graphics for elements to be fitted into the paper size set by default. If the set blow-up of the graphic window is to remain unchanged. "3D View". Ö Ö Open the window "Learnable Graphic Commands".22 Store Section of Graphic Display in Learn Mode The graphics of elements shows. In cases where you also want the graphics to be printed out: Ö Ö Activate the "Print Window" option. The command is then entered into your part program. Activating the option "Current View Settings" causes the settings of the "Elements Graphic Options" to be stored as well.4 14. The "Auto scale" mode is shown as activated in the dialogue window. An element added with auto scale switched ON causes the zoom to be reset. VII-18 Ö Activate the "Print Window" option". Ö Turn the graphics to the desired position.Graphics of Elements 1. be advisable to record only one element or a section clipped out from the graphics.09.g. all elements. Ö Add the element information to your element. Ö Choose a view. For your measurement protocol it may. Activate the option "Current View Settings" in the "Learnable Graphic Commands" window. Ö Use a zoom tool to enlarge the desired area of the graphics. 1. Ö Ö Ö Enter the scale factor into the input box. All possibilities to a manual input of the scaling factor are inactive. To make sure that your graphic fits into the paper format you have set. Ö Activate the "Print Window" option.24 Learn Graphics of Elements Printing with a "Scale Factor" This function allows surface and form comparisons between elements of different printouts to be made using the same scaling. Enter the scaling factor into the input field. Enter scaling factor Ö Ö Activate the option "Define scaling". 1.09. The "auto scale" mode is shown as activated in the dialogue window. Ö Activate the option "Auto scale". The complete graphic is printed on the set paper format. The command is entered in your part program. Ö Confirm your settings in the "Learnable Graphic Commands" dialogue. Switch on auto scale When working with the auto scale function. Ö Activate the "Define Scaling Factor" option in the "Print Graphic" dialogue. Ö Click on the symbol "Adjust Scaling". Your scale factor is shown in the "Learnable Graphic Commands" window.Graphics of Elements 1. the complete graphic is adjusted to the paper format settings. Confirm your settings in the "Print Graphic" dialogue.4 VII-19 . Adjust manual scaling. reduced or zoomed-in. The "Print Graphic" dialogue is opened as well.04 v 2. you should enter a scaling factor that is smaller than the "recommended" maximum enlargement shown in the learn mode.25 Define Scaling In the windows "Print graphic" and "Learnable graphic commands" you can: Switch to the mode "Auto scale". 14. Graphics of Elements 1. With this setting. you can either Ö Ö or click into the graphic window you wish to print. v 2. Overwrite memory numbers Open the list box "Use current layout as #" and select one of the already existing memory numbers.09. In this dialogue you can enlarge or reduce the graphic for your print-out in the flexible protocol.26 Print Graphic in Repeat Mode You can only use the print command of graphics in the repeat mode when you have deactivated the function "Close window". The settings of the learn mode are then at your disposal in the repeat mode. refer to the topic "Define Scaling". Ö Activate in the section "Print mode" the function "Learn print command". Ö Click in the menu bar on "Graphic / Print" click on the printer symbol of the graphic window. 1. After completion of the part program. The drop-down menu "Graphic" is displayed as active. the graphic windows in the completed part program remain open. position and contents. Confirm the proposed memory number. Hint A memory number 1 indicates that no layout has been defined so far. For detailed information about this topic.04 .27 Define Label Layout You have the possibility to store the info windows of the graphic together with their number. as the memory numbers are incremented by 1 each. Enter into the input field the memory number of the layout you wish to load. Loading of an label layout Ö Ö VII-20 Activate the function "Load layout #". Ö Ö Activate the function "Use current layout as #".4 14. you can mark and select blocks of points.Graphics of Elements Not defining the label layout Ö Activate the function "Disregard labels". The biggest memory number is 65535. single points are not marked and selected. 1. The "Select Points from Contour" Window is displayed: Ö Ö Ö Select an element. you select the view and confirm. The lable layout can only be defined for the element graphic and the airfoil analysis graphic. In addition. single points are not marked and selected. By this.04 v 2. Start points and end points are labelled through little reticles.4 VII-21 . you select the contour out of whose contour points the element is supposed to be recalculated. If you move a label. the points are no longer displayed in red. Close graphic window Activate the option "Close window" if you want to have the graphic window closed after the part program command has been executed in the repeat mode. but rather blocks of points. All points between the start and end mark are selected and represented in red in the graphics. Now. The labels of the block are displayed in blue. In the "Select Points From Contour" mode. 14. Do not use memory number 0. For that the "Select Points from Contour" function of the graphics of elements is available. In the "Recalculate / Copy From Memory" window.09. Click on the "Memory Recall" icon and confirm. In the status line of the graphics of elements.28 Calculate New Elements out of Contour Points Via the "Recalculate Element from Memory" function it is possible to calculate new elements out of contour points. A block always has a start and an end point. The settings of the info windows of the learn mode are not taken on by the repeat mode. the actual data of the point are indicated under the moved label. The "Select Points from Contour" window appears. Ö Input the nominal positions as theoretical nominal elements.4 14. The block is deleted. If you this click on this button. Ö Ö Click on "Compare Points" in the "Output" pull-down menu. v 2. In this dialogue. an empty block is inserted. ellipses or spheres. click on this button. you determine whether the actual points and the tolerance diameter must be displayed in the graphics. Further Buttons in the "Select Points from Contour" Window With the "Select All" button.g. Program run The elements are designated as actual elements and must be completely filed in a sequence in the memory. you only delete one block.Graphics of Elements Proceed as follows Set a block Ö Ö Ö Ö You set the labels by clicking on a point. Nominal elements must always be of the same type as the actual elements. you define the elements to be compared and the number of the elements. 1. It is also possible to re-utilize and move a label that has already been set with the mouse. Delete a block You click on a label with the right mouse button. You can manually input for example co-ordinates if you already know the exact values. If you click on this button. the whole contour is marked.29 Compare Points Task: With the comparison of points.09. The elements can either be points. you select here a • • VII-22 scale factor or the auto scale. variables. In the "Compare Points" dialogue window. circles. This function especially concerns a part program editor. You always delete at first the block that is next to the start point of the contour. These must also be completely filed in a sequence in the memory. Connect two blocks If you move a label (tag) of a block to the label of a second block. Furthermore. This point is the start label.04 . you get an overview of the position deviation of several elements. If you want to delete all blocks. Or you can input e. both blocks are connected. The end label is set where you release the mouse button again. a printout of the current window contents with the usual log data is created. line of sight towards the X-axis) Front view (ZX-plane. "Print Window" and "Close Window". the text that you’ve input before in the dialogue window is displayed. Furthermore. Elements of the "Compare Points" Graphics Window Toolbar Graphical display in the left part Numerical evaluation in the right part Toolbar in the "Compare Points" Graphics Window Zoom graphics clip Reset zoom Move graphics clip Display element information Rotate the graphic Display Option Top view (XY-plane. Print graphics: If you click this symbol. • • The graphics shows the largest and smallest distance of the actual element(s) to the nominal element(s).4 VII-23 . line of sight towards the Y-axis) 3D view Learnable graphic commands: If you click on this icon. line of sight towards the Z-axis) Side face (YZ-plane.Graphics of Elements Ö The "Compare Points" graphics window appears. 14.04 v 2.09. you can store in another window commands in the part program such as • • • "Actual Graphics Settings". Ö Confirm your settings in the "Parallelism" window to indicate the Parallelism Graphics.4 14. Furthermore. v 2.30 Parallelism Graphics Task: For the parallelism of a projected line to a projected reference line. How to get displayed a parallelism graphics Ö Select the "Parallelism" in the "Tolerance" pull-down menu under "Orientation" or Ö Click on the "Parallelism" tool for evaluation. Now. you can click the "Parallelism Diagram Settings" button to realize further settings for the parallelism graphics. you can also have a graphics display. Here. the projection plane and the width of tolerance.04 . you determine the actual line and the reference line.Graphics of Elements 1. You determine whether the points in the graphic representation must be connected. you can store in another window commands in the part program such as • • • VII-24 "Actual Graphics Settings". "Print Window" and "Close Window". Elements of the "Parallelism" Graphics Window Toolbar Graphical display in the left part Numerical evaluation in the right part Toolbar Zoom graphics clip Reset zoom Move graphics clip Display element information Learnable graphic commands: If you click on this icon. A graphical display is not possible with a cylindrical width of tolerance. you enter the reference length.09. You can realize further settings for the parallelism if you click the "Further Tolerance Options" button. Ö In the "Parallelism" window. you click on "Show Parallelism Diagram". You can change the scale in the "Parallelism Diagram Settings" window. The "Parallelism" dialogue window appears. the gauge length of the line is inserted.09. Hint The parallelism is calculated out of the difference of the largest distance minus the smallest distance to the reference line. only meas.Graphics of Elements Print graphics: If you click this symbol.4 VII-25 . a printout of the current window contents with the usual log data is created. If the reference length has been selected shorter than the measuring range of the line.04 v 2. 14.0 had been entered. Exception: If the reference length = 0. points within the reference length are calculated. . ...................................................................4 1............ 29 1......................................................14.............11 Parallelism.............4 1.....................................................5 1...................... 7 Flatness .......... 16 Calculate Absolute Position Tolerance ..04 v 2................1 1..............................2 1...2 Tolerances: General ... 9 Scaling of Tolerance Graphics ............................................................................................. 8 Roundness .......................................9 Concentricity... 4 The MMC in GEOPAK .. 21 1.....................................1 1........................4 VIII-1 ............................................................................... 33 1.................8.................................11...... 4 1...........2 1.........7.3 Symmetry Tolerance Plane Element..............................12.. 12 Examples ..............................09........2 1............................... 13 Position of Plane .................................1 Symmetry Tolerance Point Element...................... 24 Parallelism of a Plane to a Reference Plane........................1 1.....4...... 26 1.......................3 1....11....... 25 Perpendicularity of an Axis to a Reference Plane.......................... 35 1..........1 1....... 7 Graphical Representation .......................................................................14..................................................8. 7 1.....1 Axial Runout.............................. 25 1.......................................... 23 Parallelism of an Axis to a Reference Axis .....................15............................................16 Tolerance Variable......7....6....1 1.............................................................2 1.......5 Parallelism: Example......................................................12 Perpendicularity...........1 1......................................14..................................................... 22 1.............................................6..........6 Definition ............................. 26 Perpendicularity of an Axis to a Reference axis.. 24 Parallelism of a Plane to a Reference Axis ........................................... 26 Perpendicularity of a Plane to a Reference Plane ........ 28 1..........12.........................................7 Definition/Applicability ... 3 1.......3 1...15... 15 Position of Axis..............14 Symmetry Tolerances ...........2....1 1........................8.13 Angularity...................................................................................................................................................10 Coaxiality............................... 3 Maximum Material Condition (MMC) .................4 Perpendicularity of an Axis to a Reference Axis ................... 28 1......2 1.................... 12 1......................... 9 1.......... 24 Parallelism of an Axis to a Reference Plane .................................................. 30 1............................................ 9 Graphical Representation ................................................. 5 Straightness ..............12.............................................................................................................8.2..............4 Tolerances in Detail....................................................2 Circular Runout ..........2 1..................................3 1.......................................................................................................2 1.......................3 1................................ 27 1..11...15 Runout Tolerance ........................1 1....................................................................................................................8 Definition ..... 19 1........2 Symmetry Tolerance Axis Element ...................................... 24 1.................................................... 10 Straightness/Flatness Scaling................5 Definition ........................ 11 Position ....................... 32 1............. 35 14.....8............. 20 1............11............................12....................Tolerances VIII Tolerances Contents 1 Tolerances ...4.11...... 10 1................................................. 4 Roundness Scaling ........... .................................5 2......... 49 Edit Tolerance Band of a Contour .....................................................1 "Tolerance Comparison Elements" Dialogue...... 36 1........ 47 Tolerance Band Editor ........................................ 54 Origin of Co-ordinate System ........................9 2.. 53 Further Options for Nominal Actual Comparison.................. 53 3.4 14.......... 43 Degrees of Freedom for Best Fit..... 39 2.......... 48 Define Tolerance Band of a Contour .. 55 v 2...... 39 Pitch ..................................10 3 Best Fit Contour: Definition and Criteria ............................... 44 Width of Tolerance (Scale Factor) ................2 2...........................................................................................7 2....................................................18................................ 36 1...... 38 2 Contours .........................................3 VIII-2 Nominal-Actual Comparison............................4....... e......19 Set Control Limits ........................2 3............................................ 51 Nominal-Actual Comparison: Further Options........................................g........... 45 Form Tolerance Contour ........................... 40 Comparison (Vector Direction) ........................................09..4 Contours: General............1 3..............................18 Tolerance Comparison Element..............1 2......04 ................ 43 2....17 Tolerance Comparison "Last Element".................18............4...Tolerances 1.............................................................................................2 2...... 36 1...............................................................1 2.................3 2..... 42 Best Fit Contour .......... 37 1.......................6 2..................8 2... 50 Filter Contour ..........2 Further Input Options .................................... "Element Circle". Furthermore. DIN 7168 and ISO R 286 are integrated within our program. • You can activate this first group by clicking on the button "Tolerances" in the dialogues where these elements are defined. " Tolerances related to the position of two elements to each other.g. For the various tolerances see under "Tolerances in Details".Tolerances 1 Tolerances 1. as a standard feature. Tolerances related to a single element only.04 v 2. e. Two tolerance characteristics We differentiate between two tolerance characteristics. you can create or use.4 VIII-3 . you have to enter the tolerance field (type). This second group can be activated only via the tolerance bar. taking into account the "Maximum Material Condition" (MMC. 14.09. The actual limits are displayed to you immediately.1 Tolerances: General Definition GEOPAK allows you to carry out tolerance comparisons to DIN ISO R 1101 and 7684. for wood or plastic processing industries. to be used as a basis for calculation. • Still a further option is via the menu "Tolerances" and the subsequent functions. in addition to the nominal value. The tolerance tables to DIN 16901. it is possible to stop the program run due to the results of the tolerance comparison (see below). This means that. see symbol above left). • It is possible that you use the symbol disposed in the tolerance bar. There are further trade-specific tables. g. appears According to ISO 8015. by the way. 1. or a bore is out of its admissible minimum size.2. with an additional letter. however. in the USA: ANSI Y 14. The MMC in GEOPAK Case 1: The MMC is allowed only for the element Continue as follows VIII-4 Ö Ö Ö Measure element Ö Ö Activate Tolerance diameter Call position tolerance If the tolerated element has no own diameter. If the stands on its own. the tolerance extension is taken only from the element itself. the MMC is to be applied where the in the drawing. a reference mark must be selected in the following text box.Tolerances 1. There exist. national standards (e.2 Maximum Material Condition (MMC) 1. e.g. v 2. This would be the case with a point but not with a circle.4 14.1 Definition/Applicability The MMC allows to extend a given tolerance zone if a shaft is out of its admissible maximum size. means that an additional extension can be taken from a A further different element.09.2.5M) that differ from this regulation.2 . This is shown.04 . Tolerances Case 2: The MMC is allowed also for a reference element Proceed as follows Ö Ö Measure reference element Ö Via the symbol in the "Further Tolerance OptionsHTPC_MSGL_TOL_ELE_OPT" dialogue window.. Element: You select the element in the dialogue window "Tolerance Comparison Element".. Last Element: You tolerance directly the element that was last. Straightness: Flatness: Roundness: Position: Concentricity: Coaxiality: Parallelism: Perpendicularity: 14. via the arrow. B. enter the respective datum label (in most cases a single letter.).4 VIII-5 . Ö Ö Ö Measure element Ö Activate Ö Activate Ö In the subsequent text box you select. C .04 v 2. such as A.09.3 Tolerance diameter of reference element Tolerance diameter of element Call position tolerance Tolerances in Detail Following is a breakdown of all tolerances. 1. By mouse click you get to every single topic. the datum label from the list. 4 14.04 . please see for details under "Maximum Material Condition".09.Tolerances Angularity: Symmetry Tolerance Point Element: Symmetry Tolerance Axis Element: Symmetry Tolerance Plane Element: Simple Runout Tolerance: Tolerance Comparison Contours: In case MMC is allowed with the individual tolerances. VIII-6 v 2. It is recommended that you do away with the connections. When probing manually. you come to the dialogue window "Further Tolerance Options".1 Definition As far as straightness is concerned. Ö Ö Select the desired line under "Element". Ö In any case. For details refer to the topic Scaling of Tolerance Graphics. click on the symbol (left on top) and come to the "Straightness" window. you can calculate it numerically. Here. The result is displayed in the result box. Via the symbol (on the left) the "Settings for the Straightness Graphics" window is displayed. particularly when the points have not been measured in correct order.4. Hint: For theoretical lines. 14.Tolerances 1.4 VIII-7 . intersection lines. Further Options Via this symbol. that's what you normally do. Connection of Points "Connection of Points". Enter the admissible geometrical deviation in the "Tolerance Width" text box. or have its run shown graphically.2 Graphical Representation In the "Straightness" window. geometrical deviation is not defined. Using this symbol you control the functionality "Loops" (see detailed information under this topic).4 Straightness 1. the connecting lines may cause confusion. symmetry lines and lines determined by two points only. activate the symbol (on the left).04 v 2.4.09. you can select any setting other than the default. however. 1. For details refer to the topic Scaling of Tolerance Graphics. Further Options Via this symbol.5 Flatness Definition As far as flatness is concerned. Connection of Points "Connection of Points". Hint: With theoretical planes. VIII-8 v 2. the connecting lines may cause confusion. Graphical Representation In the "Flatness" window. symmetry planes and planes determined by three points only.. particularly when the points have not been measured in the correct order. you can calculate it numerically.Tolerances 1. When probing manually.4 14. Enter the admissible geometrical deviation in the "Tolerance Width" text box. however. that's what you normally do. you come to the "Further Tolerance Options" dialogue window.09. It is recommended that you do away with the connections. you come to the window "Settings for the flatness graphics". activate the symbol (on the left). Using this symbol. The result appears in the result box.. Via this symbol (on the left).04 . Ö Ö Select the desired plane under "Element". click on the symbol (left on top) and come to the "Flatness" window. Ö In any case. Here you can select any setting other than the default. geometrical deviation is not defined. or have its run displayed in a graphic. you control the functionality "Loops" (see details this topic). Further Options This symbol leads you to the dialogue window "Further Tolerance Options". refer to the topic Scaling of Tolerance Graphics.Tolerances 1. Using this symbol you govern the "Loops" functionally (for details refer to detailed information regarding this subject). We recommend that you do away with the connections.4 VIII-9 . the connecting lines. The result is displayed in the result box. 1. 14. geometrical deviation is not defined. intersection circles. Here you have three options to choose from: Actual roundness scaling Tolerance zone scaling Nominal value with • Upper tolerance • Lower tolerance For details. Connection of Points "Connecting points" is the normal case for you.. however. click on the symbol (top left) to get to the "Roundness" window". Enter the permissible geometrical deviation into the "Tolerance Width" text box and click OK.1 Definition As far as roundness is concerned.6. The symbol (on the left) leads you the window "Settings for Roundness Graphics". When probing manually. you can calculate it numerically. or have its run displayed graphically.6.2 Graphical Representation Activate the symbol (on the left) in the "Roundness" window. Ö Ö Select the required circle under "Element". Ö In any case.09. may cause confusion.04 v 2. particularly when the points have not been measured in correct order. fitted-in circles and circles determined by three points only. Hint: For theoretical circles.6 Roundness 1. the protocol or from data output. The roundness figures can be seen from the result box. Hint This is applicable accordingly to straightness. By clicking on the symbol (on the left) in the "Further Tolerance Options" window = you can report the roundness figures to a statistics program. Hint This is applicable accordingly to straightness. you can retrace the exact run of the circle in the graphics (see FIG. flatness. As far as scaling is concerned. the "Settings for Roundness" windows allows you to choose from three options. the points are always located within the green field.1 Scaling of Tolerance Graphics Roundness Scaling The symbols (on the left) of the "Roundness"-dialogue window enable graphical representation. however. This applies equally to the following options. VIII-10 v 2.Tolerances 1. flatness. even if roundness does not comply with the specification. too. This is caused in the present setup by the fact that the points with minimum and maximum distance define the green field. runout tolerances and parallelism.7. The width of this tolerance zone is already entered in the "Roundness" window. Tolerance Zone Scaling Using this option you establish that the green field in fact agrees with the tolerance zone. In this graphics. runout tolerances and parallelism. Consequently.4 14.09. too. You can see that the P1 and P40 values are the same as in the figure above for "Actual Roundness Scaling". below. Actual Roundness Scaling (Default Setting) If you decide for this option. In the graphics you can realise whether the circle is located within the roundness tolerance (see FIG. below).04 .7 1. you do not see whether the points are located within the tolerance width. roundness. but not to runout tolerances and parallelism.Tolerances With large or very small deviations. Nominal Value Scaling with Upper and Lower Tolerance To find out whether the circle with its geometrical deviation is still within the dimensional tolerance. 14. input an Upper and a Lower Tolerance. you should resort to the "Actual Roundness Scaling" function.7. This can be seen from the result box. a blue circle. above) that one or more points are located outside the green field. you see here with this option. not be able to retrace the run of the form. in addition to the figure above. under certain circumstances.2 Straightness/Flatness Scaling Contrary to "Roundness Scaling". however. Hint This is applicable accordingly to straightness and flatness. The green field is defined by the nominal value and the upper and lower tolerance you have entered. the other one is located in the material. is in line with the specification. You may. you can perform the scaling operation using the nominal value and the tolerance limits (Upper / Lower Tolerance).4 VIII-11 . you may.09. It is possible (see FIG.04 v 2. In this case. however. The upper limit is the one located prior to the material. the protocol or from data output. As a result. This is the nominal diameter circle. these two cases do not allow to check for dimensional tolerance. 1. In addition. If the use of MMCHTPC_MSGL_TOL_MMB with a reference is allowed . VIII-12 v 2. Ö You click on the symbol in the tolerance bar Ö In the next step you select. For details about the principles of MMC. You need to know that for points (e. Ö In the next text box you enter the width of your tolerance zone or you make your last entries using the arrow. piercing point "Cylinder axis through plane") the material side is unknown and that therefore the "Maximum Material Condition (MMC) can not be applied directly.1 Definition Using the function "Position" you determine whether the positional deviation of a point is still within tolerance.g. The structure of the subsequent line is almost identical with the one for the drawing entries. you activate the symbol. help bubbles explain the individual symbols. you activate the symbol. the element type whose position must be tolerated. please refer to the topic Maximum Material Condition. If circular.8 Position 1. via the symbols.4 14. you activate the symbol.04 .09. Ö Your drawing tells you whether the tolerance zone is circular or flat. Ö If the use of MMCHTPC_MSGL_TOL_MMB is allowed.Tolerances 1.8. Ö You tolerate the cylinder diameter. Example 3 For this example we take the case of a "Position of a symmetry line in a groove". Example 2 For this example we take the case of a "Cutting circle of cylinder jacket and plane". Then you can apply the MMC in the dialogue window with respect to the position.4 VIII-13 . Ö Choose the type of co-ordinate system using the known symbols. v 2. concentricity and symmetry of the point of intersection. Ö Ö You tolerate the circle diameter.09. without necessity of an entry into a text field.you can input only one co-ordinate. In case of a flat tolerance zone – the symbol is not activated .. In this case.. the concentricity and the symmetry of the point of intersection. In case of a circular tolerance zone (the symbol is activated). Ö You tolerate the groove width as the distance. of the symmetry line.. Ö Ö Ö first select the plane where the tolerance zone is located. Ö You assign a datum label to the cylinder diameter via the dialogue window "Further Tolerance Options" . you can enter the nominal position either in the cartesian or the polar system. You recognise this when the text field (Max.04 then the co-ordinates of the location. Material Condition Element) is active.8. Material Condition Element). Ö Then you can apply the MMC in the dialogue window with respect to position. parallelism etc.. and .2 Examples Example 1 As an example we take the case of a "Point of intersection of cylinder axis and plane". 14. Ö You assign a datum label to the groove width via the dialogue window "Further Tolerance Options".Tolerances 1. You recognise this by an active text field (Max. Ö Then you can apply the MMC in the following dialogue window with regard to the "Position axis element". 04 . Using this symbol you control the functionality "Loops" (see detailed information under this topic).4 14. In case of a spatial tolerance zone (symbol on the left is activated). in addition.09. Further Options Via this symbol. Click on the symbol left to find detailed information about the topic "Determine Position Tolerance" with the option "Calculate absolute". VIII-14 v 2. By a click on this button you can take over the value of the element that you want to tolerate. left-hand column). The help bubbles provide you with additional information. determine your working plane using the symbols (picture above. use the symbols (picture below.Tolerances Take over the actual value In the left near the coordinate buttons you find an element button. you can. In case of polar co-ordinates. enter three co-ordinates. you come to the dialogue window "Further Tolerance Options". To determine the type of co-ordinate system. right-hand column). Next.3 Position of Plane You can only realize a tolerance of the position of a plane that is approximately parallel to one of the base planes. see also the topics "MMC" and "Further Tolerance Options".4 VIII-15 . Rectangular Tolerance Zone In this case. Round Tolerance Zone In this case. You get the function via the “Tolerance” menu. In the following dialogue window Ö Ö select the plane in which you want to realize a tolerance and enter the width of tolerance. For more details. it is possible to select whether you enter Cartesian or polar co-ordinates. Y or Z. enter the co-ordinates of the centre and the diameter of the tolerance zone. Via the icons (see left). Enter the nominal position of the plane in the text field X.8. enter the co-ordinates of the left lower and the right upper edge.04 v 2. you decide in which tolerance direction (main direction and in parallel to which base plane) the tolerance range extends to. 14.Tolerances 1.09. Further proceeding depends on whether your tolerance zone is round or rectangular. 09. In the following dialogue window Ö first. a cone or a cylinder. 1 = Tolerance diameter First. you decide whether the actual element is a line. You get the function via the tolerance menu.Tolerances 1.04 . VIII-16 v 2.4 Position of Axis You can only realize a tolerance of the position of an axis element that is approximately parallel to one of the principal axes.4 14.8. Round Tolerance Zone: The example of a bore of which the axis runs approximately parallel to the Z-axis. you look on the axis from top (see picture below). select the X/Y plane and then enter the X and Y co-ordinates. The further parameters depend on whether you have a round or plane tolerance zone. You can display the elements in the list. Tolerances Finally, enter the co-ordinates of start and end point (see picture below). 1 = start point 2 = end point If you select another plane, proceed in a similar fashion. Plane Tolerance Zone: By means of the example of a line in the X/Y plane that runs approximately parallel to the X-axis we explain, which parameters to enter (see picture below). 1 = start point 2 = end point 3 = Width of tolerance in error direction The position of the axis is indicated through the Y value. The error direction is the Y direction, too. 14.09.04 v 2.4 VIII-17 Tolerances Ö Therefore, for this example, select under “Print Preview“ (patch of a surface) as error direction the Y-axis in the X/Y plane. Ö Ö In the text field, enter the nominal of the position of the line. Ö If you select another error direction, proceed in a similar fashion. In our example, enter the X values for the start respectively the end point. For more details, see also the topics "Max. Material Condition(MMC)" and "Further Tolerance Options". Click on the symbol left to find detailed information about the topic "Determine Position Tolerance" with the option "Calculate absolute". VIII-18 v 2.4 14.09.04 Tolerances 1.8.5 Calculate Absolute Position Tolerance For the position tolerances you can use the option "Calculate absolute" in certain cases to simplify the input of the nominal co-ordinates. The illustration below shows four bores (cylinders in top view and the points of intersection of the cylinder axes with the plane). The nominal co-ordinates differ only in the signs. This hole pattern has two symmetry axes (X- and Y-axis). You can either tolerate the position of the points or the position of the cylinder axes. In both cases you can enter the same nominal co-ordinates with the option "Calculate absolute" for all four bores, i.e. absolute (x = 6.0 and y = 4.0). This is useful for the loop repetitions. For the position of an axis, as compared to the position of a circle, you additionally enter start and end point. When calculating the position tolerance, their signs remain valid also when carrying out an absolute calculation. 14.09.04 v 2.4 VIII-19 Tolerances 1.9 Concentricity Definition With the function "Concentricity" you check whether the location of the centre of a circle agrees with the location of a reference circle (centre of circle). Proceed as follows: Ö In the first step, using the symbols, select the element of which position must be toleranced. Hint For points (e.g. piercing point "Cylinder Axis through Plane") the material side is unknown and therefore MMCHTPC_MSGL_TOL_MMB cannot be directly used. Ö Click in the tolerance bar on the symbol (on the left) and the "Concentricity" dialogue window appears. The structure of the top line (below the header) follows roughly the one for the drawing entries. In addition, help bubbles explain the individual symbols. Ö In the first text box, enter the diameter tolerance zone. Example of a solution For this purpose, we take the case "Cylinder Axis through Plane". Ö You tolerance the diameter of the cylinder. Ö Via the "Further Tolerance Options" dialogue window, allocate a datum label to the cylinder diameter. Ö In the "Concentricity" dialogue window, you can then use MMC also with the "Point" element. This is shown by the fact that the centre text box in the top line is active. With the elements circle, ellipse and sphere, the first relates to the element itself. This is why the input of a datum label is not required. As for the rest, you proceed as described under the topic "Maximum Condition". Further Options Via this symbol, you come to the dialogue window "Further Tolerance Options". Using this symbol you control the functionality "Loops" (see detailed information under this topic). VIII-20 v 2.4 14.09.04 Tolerances 1.10 Coaxiality Definition With the "Coaxiality" function, check the position of two axes to each other. It is important for the input that the axes are approximately parallel to a main axis of the co-ordinate system. Ö Proceed as described in detail of the topic "Concentricity" and "Maximum Material Condition". Ö Click in the tolerance bar on the symbol (on the left) and come to the "Coaxiality" dialogue window. The structure of this line roughly follows the one for the drawing entries. In addition, help bubbles explain the individual symbols. Hint As start or end point enter one co-ordinate, each of the range of which checking must be performed (see picture below). This is what applies for our example (the reference axis shows as the Z axis upwards): Start point =0 End point =5 The direction of the reference axis influences the signification of start and end point. If the reference axis, opposite to the Z axis shows downwards, the following input is correct: Start point = -5 End point = 0 Further Options 14.09.04 v 2.4 VIII-21 Tolerances Via this symbol, you come to the "Further Tolerance Options" dialogue window. Using this symbol, you control the functionality "Loops" (see details of this topic). 1.11 Parallelism With the function parallelism you check the location of two axes to each other. It is important for the input of the reference lengths that the axes or planes are approximately parallel relative to a main axis of the co-ordinate system. In the tolerance bar you click on the symbol (on the left) and come to the "Parallelism" dialogue window. First, you have to select your actual and your reference element. The subsequent inputs depend on these elements. Thus, we differentiate between four initial situations: The parallelism of an axis relative to a reference axis The parallelism of an axis relative to a reference plane The parallelism of a plane relative to reference axis The parallelism of a plane relative to a reference plane For the four cases, proceed as follows: Ö First, select your actual or reference element in the window "Parallelism". Ö The next line is adapted to suit for the drawing entry. Here, in this line you enter the figures from your drawings. Ö If MMC is allowed, see details under "Maximum Material Condition". By a mouse click on this topic, you obtain the latest information about each of the four initial situations. Graphical Representation If the actual element is a measured line, you can have parallelism also graphically displayed. The procedure is similar to the one described in detail of topic Parallelism Graphics. You inform yourself about this theme with click on Parallelism: Example . Further Options Via this symbol, you come to the "Further Tolerance Options" dialogue window. Using this symbol you control the functionality "Loops" (see details of this topic). VIII-22 v 2.4 14.09.04 Tolerances 1.11.1 Parallelism: Example For the parallelism of a line with a reference line, the system also provides a graphic. The following example in the illustration below shows the parallelism of the line (3) to the reference line (2) as a reference. The graphic clarifies the way of calculation: In addition to the measurement points P1 to P4 of the tolerated line (line 3), two additional points P5 and P6 are generated that have been calculated at the distance of the input reference length on the line (line 3). The parallelism results from the difference between biggest and smallest distance to the reference line. If the selected value of the reference length is shorter than the measurement range of the line, only the measurement points positioned within the reference length are included in the calculation. Exception: If the input for the reference length is 0.0, the reference length is inserted for the measurement length of the line. These results are included in the graphic which is also available in form of a printout: 14.09.04 v 2.4 VIII-23 Tolerances 1.11.2 Parallelism of an Axis to a Reference Axis Ö The tolerance symbol (on the left) appearing on a drawing indicates that the tolerance zone concerned is a circular one. You click the symbol in the dialogue window. In the following text box, there appears the width of the tolerance zone. Ö If MMC is allowed, details can be seen under "Maximum Material Condition". Ö If the tolerance zone is flat, you have to enter additionally the drawing level where it is defined. Finally you must enter over which length parallelism has to be maintained (reference length). 1.11.3 Parallelism of an Axis to a Reference Plane Finally you must enter over which length parallelism has to be maintained (reference length). 1.11.4 Parallelism of a Plane to a Reference Axis Finally you must enter over which length parallelism has to be maintained (reference length). 1.11.5 Parallelism of a Plane to a Reference Plane Hint (applies to rectangular tolerance zone only) For the input of the reference lengths, it is important that the two planes are approximately parallel to any of the base planes, the reason for this being that the reference lengths can only be entered parallel to the co-ordinate axes. VIII-24 Ö To complete the previous steps (for details cf. "Parallelism" and MMC) additionally enter which length parallelism has to be maintained (reference length). Ö With the diameter symbol not activated (on the left), enter the diameter of the range which must be toleranced. Ö With the diameter symbol activated, select the axis along which parallelism must be maintained, and ... enter the reference lengths in the other two axes. v 2.4 14.09.04 Using this symbol you control the functionality "Loops" (see details of this topic). in which drawing level it is defined.4 VIII-25 . First.Tolerances 1. you must enter over which length perpendicularity has to be maintained (reference length).12 Perpendicularity With the perpendicularity function. click on the symbol (on the left) and the "Perpendicularity" dialogue window is displayed. Ö In the tolerance bar. we differentiate between four initial situations: Perpendicularity of an axis to a reference axis Perpendicularity of an axis to a reference plane Perpendicularity of a plane to a reference axis Perpendicularity of a plane to a reference plane In the four cases. Here. check the location of two axes relative to each other. By a mouse click on this topic. select your actual or reference element in the "Perpendicularity" window. you obtain the latest information about each of the four initial situations. Further Options Via this symbol. v 2. Ö If MMC is allowed. in addition.09. you come to the "Further Tolerance Options" dialogue window. Ö 14. proceed as follows: Ö First. It is important for the input of the reference lengths that the axes or planes are approximately parallel relative to a main axis of the co-ordinate system. you have to select your actual and your reference element. Thus.12. you enter the figures of your drawings.1 Perpendicularity of an Axis to a Reference Axis Ö Since the tolerance zone is flat. refer to details of topic "Maximum Material Condition". you must show. 1. The subsequent inputs depend on these elements. Ö The next line is adapted to suit for drawing inputs.04 Finally. 04 . Ö If MMC is allowed. Ö To complete the previous steps (for details cf.2 Perpendicularity of an Axis to a Reference Plane Ö The presence of the diameter symbol (on the left) in the drawing indicates to a circular tolerance zone. in which drawing level it is defined. select the axis along which perpendicularity has to be maintained. enter the diameter of the area to be toleranced. you must enter over which length perpendicularity has to be maintained (reference length).12. refer to details of topic "Maximum Material Condition".. you must enter over which length perpendicularity has to be maintained (reference length). Ö In case the symbol (on the left) is activated. and .09.3 Perpendicularity of an Axis to a Reference axis Hint (applies to rectangular tolerance zone only) For the input of the reference lengths it is important that the plane is more or less parallel to any of the base planes.4 Perpendicularity of a Plane to a Reference Plane Finally.4 14. The next text box shows the width of the tolerance zone. you must show. the reason for this being that the reference lengths can only be entered parallel to the co-ordinate axes. Perpendicularity) you additionally enter over which length perpendicularity has to be maintained (reference length). Ö In case the symbol is not activated.. Click the symbol in the dialogue window. 1.Tolerances 1.12.12. Ö Finally. in addition. 1. enter the reference lengths for the other two axes. Ö If the tolerance zone is flat. VIII-26 v 2. Ö If your actual element features an axis (cylinder. Ö In the line below. cone or line) you have to click the drawing level where the angle must be maintained. Plane relative to an axis. select your respective actual and reference element. Proceed as follows Ö In the tolerance bar. Ö First. enter the width of your tolerance zone. Axis relative to a plane. click on the symbol (on the left) and come to the "Angularity" dialogue window. you come to the "Further Tolerance Options" dialogue window.Tolerances 1. refer to "Maximum Material Condition" for more details.09.4 VIII-27 . enter nominal angle and reference lengths. check the location of an Axis relative to an axis. By using this symbol you control the functionality "Loops" (see details of this topic). Plane relative to a plane. Ö In the bottom text boxes. Further Options Via this symbol.13 Angularity Definition With the angularity function.04 v 2. 14. If MMC is allowed. Proceed as follows Ö In the tolerance bar.. deviation will be automatically calculated perpendicularly to this plane. in turn. you come to the "Further Tolerance Options" dialogue window. in addition to the above. For details concerning MMC cf. Using this symbol you control the functionality "Loops" (see details of this topic). becomes the reference element. According to your drawing. Prior to realize the tolerance check itself. the tolerance width. select your actual and reference element. the symmetry element. you also have to input.4 14. If the symmetry location is given by a plane. (Symbols "Projection" de-activated. VIII-28 v 2. Ö By using the symbols in the top line of the dialogue window. Maximum Material Condition. Further Options Via this symbol. If the symmetry location is given by an axis. the projection plane where deviation is must be calculated.04 . you must measure the two elements and use them to calculate . If the reference element is only point-based – unlike a line or a plane .you still have to preselect the direction along which deviation must be calculated. symbols "Tolerance Direction" activated). This. The value determined is double the deviation from this location..1 Symmetry Tolerance Point Element With this function you check the location of an element relative to a symmetry element.Tolerances 1. click on the symbol (on the left) and come to the "Symmetry Tolerance Point-Element" dialogue window.09.14.14 Symmetry Tolerances 1. . in addition to the above. in turn. Using this symbol you control the functionality "Loops" (see details of this topic). Further Options Via this symbol.14. According to your drawing. select your actual and reference element. the tolerance width.. If the reference element is point-based. deviation will be calculated only at this point. refer to Maximum Material Condition . the symmetry element. This.. Prior to performing the tolerance check itself. Proceed as follows Ö In the tolerance bar. measure the two elements and use them to calculate . 14. If the reference element is an axis. the start and end point for the actual element must still be entered.Tolerances 1.2 Symmetry Tolerance Axis Element With this function. check the location of an element relative to a symmetry element. Start and end point correspond to the co-ordinates in this axis. For comparison see also the topic Coaxiality. It is not necessary to enter start and end points.09. the actual element should be parallel to one of the co-ordinate axes. click on the symbol (on the left) and come to the "Symmetry Tolerance Axis-Element" dialogue window. Ö By using the symbols in the top line of the dialogue window. you also have to input. the "Further Tolerance Options" dialogue window is displayed. For details concerning MMC.04 v 2.4 VIII-29 .. you must. becomes the reference element. If possible. . This. If possible.Tolerances 1. Ö By using the symbols in the top line of the dialogue window you select your reference element... in addition. v 2. for the other axes. If the reference element is a plane. the start and end point of the area to be measured (for details concerning this topic refer to Coaxiality). the planes should be paraxial in order to enter in a reasonable way the reference lengths and the toleranced direction. no further data is required.04 . and the "Symmetry Tolerance Plane-Element" dialogue window appears.09. Proceed as follows Ö In the tolerance bar. to calculate the symmetry element. in turn. Before realizing the tolerance check. measure the two elements and use them . check the location of an actual element relative to a symmetry element. click on the symbol. and. the toleranced direction is the Z-axis). the position comparison is carried out only at this point.4 14.3 Symmetry Tolerance Plane Element With this function. you must . you must enter.. Therefore..14. If the reference element is an axis. you have to • • VIII-30 input the direction . If the reference element is a point. the corner points of the area (see picture below. becomes the reference element.. Using this symbol you control the functionality "Loops" (see details of this topic).04 v 2. 14. you come to the "Further Tolerance Options" dialogue window. the tolerance width.Tolerances X1 = Start X X2 = End X Y1 = Start Y Y2 = End Y According to your drawing.09. Further Options Via this symbol. refer to Maximum MaterialCondition . For details concerning MMC. you have to input. in addition to the above.4 VIII-31 . Ö Now. you must differentiate between a axial runout – you measure a plane . or an axis that has been defined as a connection line through several circle centres. you come to the "Further Tolerance Options" dialogue window. If you have measured a cylinder your result will be equal to the total radial runout. For details refer to the topics "Roundness"Flatness" "Scaling of Tolerance Graphics" Further Options Via this symbol. This involves the measurement of a circle or a cylinder.4 14.04 . Ö For this purpose. Ö Enter the admissible tolerance range in the bottom tolerance box.or a radial runout. check both the radial and axial runout of your workpiece. Ö By a mouse-click on one of these elements (on the left). Hint: For further details.Tolerances 1. refer to the subject Axial Runout. This can be the axis of a cone or a cylinder. optionally click on one of these symbols. you additionally need the diameter of the shaft (reference diameter) whose surface you have measured. Hint: For the axial runout. VIII-32 v 2. Ö In the tolerance bar. Using the symbols you can have the radial and axial runouts also in a graphics. find the following elements in the list.09. you have to define the axis of rotation. click on the symbol and come to the "Runout Tolerance" dialogue window. By using this symbol you control the functionality "Loops" (see details of this topic). Ö First.15 Runout Tolerance With the "Runout Tolerance" function. Depending on your selection. select as reference element the element that determines your axis of rotation. 09. Consequently. a plane is defined by points located on a circular path (circle made up of red dots in the line drawing below). The reason for this is that for the limitation of a plane you have to enter a reference diameter in addition to the rotational axis.Tolerances 1. between "Simple Axial Runout" and "Total Axial Runout". they define the axial runout since they represent the maximum deviations. the reference diameter (in red) is the diameter of this circular path.15. one distinguishes. Determined by GEOPAK. This circular path should be located centrally around the reference axis. Simple Axial Runout For Simple Axial Runout. It is not the cylinder diameter.04 v 2.1 Axial Runout As far as axial runout is concerned.4 VIII-33 . as a rule of principle. In the present case. 14. the two points P13 and P14 are not measured points. the points P25 and P26 are not measured points.4 14. VIII-34 v 2. no matter which reference diameter has been entered. all measurement points are used.04 . In this case. For example.. To capture the edge of the end face as well. the whole end face of a cylinder can be captured this way. they define the axial runout since they represent the maximum deviations. you have to enter the reference diameter which is. the diameter of the cylinder. in our example below.09. Determined by GEOPAK.Tolerances Total Axial Runout For Total Axial Runout. Hint For axial runout calculation. a plane is established by points which can be located on several circular paths. .2 Circular Runout A circular runout calculation in GEOPAK does not only include the measurement points of a circle but also two additional points which are positioned on the circumference of the calculated circle.15. the tolerated circle does not meet the required circular runout. the number of measurement points = 4 is quite usual. the transmission to STATPAK. because a situation may occur in which the measurement points are all positioned inside a pre-defined tolerance zone. The measurement points on the horizontal and on the vertical axis are still within the tolerance range.Tolerances 1. Although the example illustration below is not representative for a circular runout measurement. 14. (see details of Further Tolerance Options).16 Tolerance Variable You can also realize a nominal-to-actual comparison of calculated values.g. 1. Nevertheless. because both points on the bisector of the angle are outside the tolerance range. by clicking on the symbol in the following dialogue. but not the whole circle. You come to the function and the dialogue via the menu bar "Tolerance / Variable. Although they were not measured. they belong to the calculated circle.4 VIII-35 .04 v 2. In addition. you have all other possibilities of the nominal-to-actual comparison e.09.".. Diameter and position of the calculated circle also depend on the selected mode of calculation. etc. 4 14. also see details under Tolerance Comparison Elements Dialogue". the dialogue windows are. but you can. if you click only on the "Element". Confirm and the dialogue for example "Tolerance Comparison Element Cylinder" will appear. 1. After the measurement. form) in only one dialogue. VIII-36 v 2. The dialogue will appear for example via the menu bar "Tolerance / Tolerance Comparison Elements / Last Element or Element". direction. To this subject. also see details under Tolerance Comparison Elements Dialogue".09. the proposal in the dialogue has always reference to the last measured element of the selected type. Finally.Tolerances 1. for which you want to realize a nominal-to-actual comparison (see in addition details under "Tolerance Comparison Element". for the co-ordinates. However.04 . of which you want to have a nominalto-actual comparison.18. 1. you can also click on the symbol in the element window. size. in this case and independently to the type.17 Tolerance Comparison "Last Element" This function usually deals with a nominal-to-actual comparison as in GEOPAK-3.18 Tolerance Comparison Element In this dialogue. To this subject. which characteristic you want to check in this dialogue. the dialogue automatically opens. in part. it is possible to check all element characteristics (position. differently constructed. you click on the element. access the last measured element. If you have measured several elements of one type. you can choose in the following window the type of element.1 "Tolerance Comparison Elements" Dialogue With this nominal-to-actual comparison. click on the symbol. According to element type. you are only interested in the absolute value and not in the sign. Absolute Values If. Ö Via the symbol you select. 1. With the spherical co-ordinates. (also see details under Further Tolerance Options). click several times on the symbol. you can select in the dialogue whether you want a Cartesian or a polar evaluation (see symbols in the dialogue. Then. for the unit "Inch" to two digits after the comma. The actual values are rounded up to one digit after the comma. in addition.2 Further Input Options For round elements you can. you get the Phi angle in the XY plane and the Theta angle to the Z-axis. you get the radius in the XY plane.18. Instead of using the given tolerance classes. you can realize different settings to the graphic in the following window. During the learn mode of GEOPAK you can click on the respective icon of the element (e. In the GEOPAK editor the values are set to 0.g. line on the top left of the dialogue box) to accept the measured actual values in the "Nominal Value" column as proposal. bottom left).4 VIII-37 . Via the symbol. the transmission to STATPAK. GEOPAK calculates out of nominal value and tolerance class the corresponding limit values and displays them in the inactive text boxes. click several times on the symbol. determine via the symbols whether you want to input the diameter or the radius.04 v 2. A helper program will be delivered during installation. In the tolerance classes. you can create your own characteristic tables.g.Tolerances Tolerance Class or some values.00. to input a tolerance class. you get further options e. you have the possibility instead of entering upper and lower tolerance limits. Polar Co-Ordinates For the position of an element. at first. at first. If you want the analysis in another plane. By using this symbol you control the functionality "Loops" (see details of this topic). In the cylinder co-ordinates. If you want the analysis in another plane.09. you can also have a graphic chart. the possibility to cancel etc. Options For the form of some elements. Settings for this graphic By clicking on the symbol. 14. pay attention to the use of capitalization and small letters. 4 14.09.. 1. "Change File Output Format". you can prompt a warning already before arriving at the tolerance limit. If an actual value is outside of the control limits . You come to these dialogues via the menu bar "Printout. A definite IO-condition will be set (see details in the "io_con_e.Tolerances Position If you click on one of the symbols you can currently switch over from "Tolerance single co-ordinates" to "Tolerance Position" and vice versa. The control limit is a single value is and is indicated in percent of the tolerance zone. pdf" respectively "io_con_g. With the corresponding setting of the format.19 Set Control Limits With this function (menu bar "Tolerances / Set Control Limits . respectively is written into the output file. the feature is printed out.").pdf" document on our Homepage or on your MCOSMOS-CD).04 . "Change Print Format")..g. About "Tolerance Position" you inform yourself with a click on the topic. you can't use the element line). v 2.however within the tolerance – the following happens: VIII-38 The value is represented in another colour as red or green in the result field as well as in the protocol. Significant are the four dialogues "File Format Specification". You can only use this option if the elements can be tolerated with "position tolerance" (e. "Print Format Specification". Nominal and actual contour must be stored in the GEOPAK working memory before the comparison itself is realized. Moreover.4 VIII-39 . already available. As a rule. then enter into the input field "Number of nom/act pairs" a "3".Contours 2 Contours 2. for example. Pair 1: (4)act1 / (1)nom1 Pair 2: (5)act2 / (2)nom2 Pair 3: (6)act3 / (3)nom3 In order that the tolerance comparison of multiple contour pairs can be executed. "Load Contour from CAD System"). Or load your contour from an external CAD system (for further details regarding this topic cf. Ö Enter into the input field "Number of act/nom pairs" a "1". Furthermore. the memory numbers are counted upwards and the memory number of the selected contours is used as the start number According to the input example. If you want to compare. all used contours must be positioned in the same projection plane. "Nominal" and "Actual". three nominal contours with three actual contours. Similar to the loop mode.09. Load Contour). Tolerance Comparison Contours Ö Clicking on the symbol in the icon bar. the following pairs are created. the nominal contour is provided by a CAD system. select from the lists your contours which are. The nominal contour can already be a measured contour (for details cf. Your further action is divided into the following sections 14. Ö In the text boxes.04 v 2. you come to the "Tolerance Comparison Contours" dialogue window.1 Contours: General With the "Tolerance Comparison Contours" function. all contours must be existing with the relevant memory numbers. enter into the input field "Number of act/nom pairs" a number bigger than "1". the contours must be available in the same projection. check the geometrical deviation of an actual contour from a nominal contour. Tolerance comparison of multiple contour pairs If you want to execute tolerance comparisons with multiple contour pairs. in fact. if not already proposed. This is why they are interpolated (cubic curve). Comparison only at nominal points: A comparison is realized at each point of the nominal contour. by Vector Direction. This means that even the areas between the points are calculated. not identical with the contour points of the actual respectively the nominal contour points. 2. in most cases.04 . you first of all define the points from where measurement must take place. Constant pitch: Uniform distance on the nominal contour.. VIII-40 v 2. enter the direction along which the distance from the opposite contour is measured.2 Pitch By making inputs in "Pitch". The points at which the nominal and actual comparison is carried out are.4 14.09.Contours Pitch Comparison (Vector Direction) Best Fit Tolerance Width By using this symbol you control the functionality "Loops" (see details of this topic). The pitch specifies the distance where the individual comparisons are carried out. According to your task. in the next step. Comparison only at actual points: A comparison is carried out at each point of the actual contour. you will opt for one out of six "pitches".. Contours Hint This form is not recommended. use a uniform distance on the nominal contour. in the 1st co-ordinate Example In the ZX projection. enter a constant value in the respective text box below the symbols.09. 14. Constant pitch (1st co-ordinate): Here. you obtain a uniform in the X component with this setting. to be more exact. 1 = Actual contour 2 = Nominal contour Constant angular pitch: The comparison takes place in a constant angular pitch relative to the co-ordinate system origin. use a uniform distance on the nominal contour. to be more exact. Constant pitch (2nd co-ordinate): Here.04 v 2.4 VIII-41 . you obtain a uniform distance in the Z-component with this setting. It is because of the vector direction that the program has to calculate the point through which the perpendicular goes to the actual point (see picture below). Except for nominal and actual points. in the 2nd co-ordinate Example In the ZX projection. as it takes a great deal of time. This is the comparison that Mitutoyo offers in the default. The most frequent application is the "Comparison Perpendicular to Nominal Contour".04 . The circle diameter is then limited by two contour points. Comparison perpendicular to nominal contour: A perpendicular on the contour is formed using the comparison point.Contours 2. Comparison through origin: A line through the origin of the co-ordinate system is using the comparison point.3 Comparison (Vector Direction) Between nominal and actual distance is calculated. VIII-42 v 2. Then.4 14.09. Four possibilities are available (see below). the biggest possible circle is created with its centre located on the perpendicular. Comparison along first axis: This comparison makes available the following possibilities: • • • • • YZ-Contour parallel to Y-axis ZX-Contour parallel to Z-axis XY-Contour parallel to X-axis RZ-Contour parallel to R-axis (radial plane of section) Phi-Z-Contour parallel to Phi-axis (completed representation) Comparison along first axis: This comparison makes available the following possibilities: • • • • • YZ-Contour parallel to Z-axis ZX-Contour parallel to X-axis XY-Contour parallel to Y-axis RZ-Contour parallel to Z-axis Phi-Z-Contour parallel to Z-axis Circles between nominal and actual contour: A perpendicular to the nominal contour is created through the reference point. the circle centre may leave the perpendicular in order to allow the creation of a bigger circle. the best fit is possible neither. For more information.1 Best Fit Contour: Definition and Criteria The best fit function rotates and shifts a set of co-ordinate values (points of the actual contour) in such a way that it fits "best" into another group of given coordinates (points of the nominal contour). In this case. three contour points limit the expansion of the circle (see ill.4. 14. Should the latter not be possible. refer to the topic Degree of Freedom for Best Fit.4 Best Fit Contour 2. The best fit follows the Gaussian criterion requiring that the sum of the distance squares is minimal.Contours Hint In certain cases. and then are squared and summed.4 VIII-43 . The best fit is based on the nominal-actual comparison. 2.09. below). This means that the distances of the actual points are calculated from their respective nominal values.04 v 2. The "best" location is reached when this sum is as small as possible. you can preset that the windows are printed out or applied in the repeat mode. Ö Clicking with the right mouse button on the flag. you will have no more influence. operate the functions "Horizontal".4 14. Ö Click on the symbol The mouse changes to a reticle. The results are graphically and numerically shown in the "Tolerance Comparison Contours" window. you can achieve the best result.4. you have following possibility In particular via the information symbol.2 Degrees of Freedom for Best Fit Generally. among other things. You must activate this function already in the single mode. "Rotate". "Vertical". since. Click either on one of the three symbols. The result can be seen from the graphical representation. For this. you see the abbreviations where UD is Upper Difference. Ö Click on the position in the graphics where you want to set the information or flag. you can. delete the flag. The best fit will be automatically made. you have the possibility to set information flags. Ö With a further click on the flag (keep the mouse button pressed) you can drag the flag to a different position. Using the "Learnable Graphic Commands" symbol.Contours 2. said rotation is carried out around the origin of the actual co-ordinate system. or on two or even all three symbols. LD = Lower Difference.04 . In addition to the above. via various symbols in this window. If only one rotation is allowed. the actual values can be rotated and shifted as you want. Thus.09. VIII-44 v 2. being in the repeat mode. Here. MD = Mean Difference). this will yield a scale factor of 500. The reference direction is not influenced by the offset. If. Consequently.5 Width of Tolerance (Scale Factor) Definition An enlarged scale is used to visualize the deviations of the actual contour from the nominal one. On a DIN A 4-sized sheet of paper. The difference from upper and lower tolerance is related to the length of the nominal contour. you take a tolerance width of 2 %. 14. • • The upper.04 v 2. the lower tolerance and the tolerance width determine the scale. this will yield a scale factor of 25.4 VIII-45 . Three examples Example 1: The nominal contour is 1000mm and the difference from upper and lower tolerance is 0. this would be equal to about 10 mm.09.Contours 2. Example 3: The nominal contour is 5mm and the difference from upper and lower tolerance is 0. If. this would be equal to about 4mm. Offset An overmeasure contour around the nominal contour is created with the offset. On a DIN A 4-sized sheet of paper. this would also be equal to about 10 mm. If you take in this case a tolerance width of 5 %.02 mm. Then. the deviations are displayed in a scale larger than the scale used for watching the nominal contour. this will yield a scale factor of 5. in the material. in this case. you take a tolerance width of 5 %. Example 2: The nominal contour is 5mm and the difference from upper and lower tolerance is 0. the upper tolerance is outside.1 mm. With regard to tolerances the lower tolerance is. in this case. the calculated deviations no longer refer to the nominal contour but to the overmeasure contour.1 mm. On a DIN A 4-sized sheet of paper. as a rule. a significant deviation is visible. The distance between the contours (i. the slot width) is 52 mm.09.025 mm. The tolerance comparison shall be used to examine the deviation of the slot width from the nominal measurement 52 mm +-0. The inside contour serves as the nominal contour.04 .e.g.4 14.Contours Example: A slot is limited by inside and outside contour. VIII-46 v 2. The result of the numerical evaluation shows no difference between the two processes.025 mm.032 mm.998 mm and 52. When carrying out the comparison with an offset (overmeasure) e. no deviation is visible in the graphic when applying the onesided tolerance of 51. the outside contour as the actual contour. of 52 mm and a tolerance of +-0. Compared with that. refer to this topic). Use the symbol "Loop counter" to control the functionality "Loops" (for detailed information. (for more details. This radius amount is doubled (diameter of circle). If you activate this symbol you can have a form tolerance chart displayed. Best fit The best fit is carried out prior to the evaluation of the line form tolerance.Contours 2.6 Form Tolerance Contour The form tolerance of a measured contour to a reference contour is determined according to DIN 7184 in connection with DIN ISO 1101 as follows: First. refer to the topic Best Fit Contour. Ö Ö Load a measured contour (nominal contour).09. the maximum deviation between both contours is determined (see in the illustration below the radius of the red circle as a dotted line). Determine line form tolerance A prerequisite for this function is that you are already using contours in your part program. etc. how to perform transfers to STATPAK or how to abort a part program when the measurement results are outside the tolerance limits. Reference contour (black) Nominal contour (green) Ideal circle (blue. for example. also refer to the topic Further Tolerance Options). The symbol "Further tolerance options" offers further possibilities.04 v 2. The value of the diameter includes all deviations when the centre of the circle is moved on the reference contour. Load an ideal contour (reference contour). For details. part of the constructional drawing) Circle with biggest deviation (red) Use the function "Line form tolerance" to calculate this value.4 VIII-47 . The best fit position of the contour is calculated only temporarily and is not stored. 14. Enter the value of the tolerance limit into the input field "Tolerance width". In case a contour nominal-to-actual comparison is performed.09. VIII-48 v 2. the measured contour can be compared to the nominal contour and its tolerance limits.04 . Define tolerance range of a nominal contour Ö Ö Load a nominal contour. Ö Define the contour tolerance range. For details refer to the topic "Define Tolerance Band of a Contour" and "Edit Tolerance Band of a Contour". Every contour point can be assigned a lower and upper tolerance limit.4 14.Contours 2. The Tolerance band dialogue is shown. Ö Select a nominal contour. Click in the menu bar on "Tolerance / Tolerance Comparison Elements / Tolerance Band Editor". which can be stored in the GWS file. The tolerance band editor can be called only in the learn mode.7 Tolerance Band Editor The tolerance band editor makes it possible to specify various widths of tolerance ranges within a nominal contour. Now no entries are possible in the "End of Tolerance Range" area. Define proportional tolerance range You wish to define a tolerance range having a tolerance range start width and a tolerance range end width. all contour points have the same upper and lower tolerance limit. Mark tolerance range Ö Use the mouse cursor to mark the contour point where the tolerance range is to start.09. Now it is possible to make entries in the areas "Start of Tolerance Range" and "End of Tolerance Range". Ö Enter the "upper and lower limit" in the areas "Start of Tolerance Range" and "End of Tolerance Range".Contours 2. Ö Ö Click on the "Constant Distribution" symbol. For further information on this topic refer to Tolerance Band Editor and Edit Tolerance Band of a Contour. While dragging with the mouse. Ö Continue as described under "Mark Tolerance Range".04 v 2. A blue cross is shown. 14. Ö Release the mouse button at the end of the tolerance range to be defined.8 Define Tolerance Band of a Contour Define uniform tolerance range Your intention is to define a uniform tolerance range. This means: the tolerance width continues changing from the tolerance range start to the tolerance range end. Ö Keep the left mouse button pressed and drag the mouse pointer to the contour point where the tolerance range is to end.4 VIII-49 . i. The defined tolerance range is shown marked with a red frame in the graphics of elements. Ö Click on the "Proportional Distribution" symbol.e. a second blue cross is shown. Enter the "upper and lower limit" in the area "Start of Tolerance Range". Ö Press the left mouse button. by mistake.09. Once the "Proportional Distribution" symbol is activated. Show all elements in the graphics of elements While defining a tolerance band of a contour. Enter tolerance limits using the mouse Click on the pipette symbol to take the tolerance ranges by means of the mouse into the input boxes of the areas "Start of Tolerance Range" and "End of Tolerance Range". click on the symbol "Show Elements in Background".04 . Delete defined tolerance ranges of the whole contour Click on the dust bin symbol to delete your tolerance ranges of the whole contour. the values entered would be changed. press again the pipette symbol in order to switch this function off.4 14. VIII-50 v 2. Once you have entered the required values. Should you click. only the current contour is shown enlarged in the graphics of elements. into the graphics of elements. the upper and lower tolerance limit of a contour point are entered only into the input boxes of the area "Start of Tolerance Range".Contours 2.9 Edit Tolerance Band of a Contour Relate tolerance range to the whole contour Click on the selection symbol in order to relate the entries from the areas "Start of Tolerance Range" and "End of Tolerance Range" to the whole contour. For further information on this topic refer to Tolerance Band Editor and Define Tolerance Band of a Contour. Ö Click with the mouse cursor on a contour point within a tolerance range. the upper and lower tolerance limit of a contour point are entered into all input boxes. Once the "Constant Distribution" symbol is activated. If you wish to watch all elements. Depending on application. The preset UPR-size is 50. you must in any case enter the "Run in / run out"-value.10 Filter Contour Regular Contours When filtering a contour (menu bar "Contour / Filter Contour") in GEOPAK. the circle diameter and on the basis of 50 UPR (undulations per revolution). you should use the Gauss Filter / Circle. Automatic Circle Measurement For the automatic circle measurement a filter can be selected when the scanning symbol is active (see ill.Contours 2. The formula used internally by GEOPAK is then: Critical wavelength = π * Circle diameter / UPR 14.04 v 2. This option allows you filtering for contours and for Automatic Circle Measurement Automatic Line Measurement When the Robust-Spline-filter is selected. the text field for the "Run in / run out"entry is deactivated. It must be stated for every filter. you should distinguish: For round contours.09. for oblong contours. Irregular Contours For contours to which it is almost impossible to assign a Gauss-filter due to their irregular forms. When using the Gauss-filter. below). Ö Select the filter via the list in the "Filter Contour" window. We offer you a Gauss low-pass filter where the high frequency parts will be suppressed. the filter via the line. a smoothing effect is realized. you will select the "Robust-Spline-Filter". The critical wavelength is calculated with π.4 VIII-51 . 0. VIII-52 v 2. Pre-set are the Gauss-filter and a critical wavelength of 1.4 14.04 . The measurement unit is limited to millimetres. below) the critical wavelength must be entered.09.Contours Automatic line measurement For the automatic line measurement (ill. 1 Nominal-Actual Comparison. 14. Via the symbol in the heading of the dialogue window. diameter). Input the so-called "Identifier" for the tolerance class into the text field. third axis is the axis Z.Nominal-Actual Comparison: Further Options 3 Nominal-Actual Comparison: Further Options 3. you can determine whether the sign is enabled or not: If you click on the symbol. To call this function. icon and the "Nominal Actual Comparison" Click into the dialogue window appears.g.04 Instead of numerical values. the polar representation is referred to the plane XY. v 2. it is possible that the sign of the position (e. you have two possibilities: Ö Click into the menu bar "Nominal Actual Comparison Elements / Element and come to the "Nominal Actual Comparison" dialogue window.g. With one click. e.g.g. After that.. You notice that inputs are possible in one case. Normally. the position of the element is directly converted. value X) is important. cylindrical co-ordinate mode). The selection is carried out through two symbols below on the left side of the chart (for example diameter). e.g. in the other case the cells are disabled.e. you can select whether you want the diameter or the radius for the comparison of nominal and actual values. With "circular" elements. H7). If you want to relate the representation to another plane.g. Ö Select via the evaluation tools (toolbar on the lower display margin). since by the simply mathematical comparison an error is located that is twice as large as the value of the position. click a second or third time on the corresponding type of co-ordinate system. the sign is disabled. click on one of the symbols on the left (e. With tolerances of positions. If you want to tolerate the position in another mode of co-ordinate system. you activate or deactivate the cells. it happens that the sign is troubling. i. On the other hand.09. The cells of the numerical values (columns "Upper" and "Lower Tolerance Limit ") are deactivated. Activate each time the symbol before going to the "type" column. the tolerance limits can also be determined by table codes (e.4 VIII-53 . "Element Circle" You have measured a circle and want to realize a nominal-actual comparison. you can determine whether the displayed characteristic has to be tolerated or not. Ö By clicking on the characteristics (e. on the co-ordinate X. .09. not for form and position tolerances. As soon as at least one character is input for a name.Nominal-Actual Comparison: Further Options Exit the text field either with a "TAB" or with one click into another box. The values are recorded there and can be consulted for calculations (e. 3. drawing grid square) for easier finding.g. transfer the suitable feature to STATPAK or 3D-TOL (for 3D-TOL. in the "Comparison of Nominal and Actual Values Element” dialogue window If you want further actions after the comparison of nominal and actual values. A dialogue window appears "Further Options of Nominal Actual Comparison". confirm via the symbol. only position tolerances are possible) assign to the feature a position number for the continuous numbering and a sequence in the first sample test Additionally. click e.4 14. click e. or . Best Fit). This is only valid for bilateral tolerance. Below the headline "Further Options in the Nominal Actual Comparison" you can then abort the part program if the upper tolerance limit is exceeded. abort the part program if the lower tolerance limit remained under. define the feature as reference for a assign to the feature a further identifier (e. in the "Comparison of Nominal and Actual Values: "Element Circle" dialogue window on the symbol. In addition. For this. You may also transmit position tolerances to 3D-TOL. VIII-54 v 2. first of all a name must be assigned to the feature. the following options are at your disposal: abort the part program if one value is excessive and/or too small.2 Further Options for Nominal Actual Comparison If you want to execute further actions after the comparison of nominal and actual values. transfer the feature to STATPAK.g. you can also determine whether values of positions (positions) have to be tolerated in the current or in the origin co-ordinate system.04 . If you want to carry out further actions after the nominal actual comparison. the symbol "Report to Statistic Program" is activated. Here. Then the numerical values from the tolerance chart are entered into the boxes "Upper" and "Lower Tolerance". the feature name can be only input for the protocol.g..g. With the development of a new function.Nominal-Actual Comparison: Further Options Additional Information: the position number. you get a list of the references already defined. so that the feature can be easily found.09. In the program of initial sample report of Mitutoyo.04 v 2. Here. You want to tolerate the positions in your original co-ordinate system that actually is no longer at your disposal.g. Where it is possible. This allows you to carry out the measurement in another order than the features are required in the report a further designation.g. ' A '). 3. we want to keep at your disposal. you can use it if you. this can be. before printing. Tolerance of the positions In the "Further Options for Nominal Actual Comparison" dialogue window. You want to execute all nominal-actual comparisons only at the end. the grid square of a larger drawing. Diameter or radius are independent from the co-ordinate system.3 Origin of Co-ordinate System Normally. a reference identification. in GEOPAK. GEOPAK always converts the positions and directions into the current co-ordinate system. e. 14.4 VIII-55 . The Situation You have a long part program and change the co-ordinate system several times. this is used if the MMC may be applied. to use the MMC you also can input this reference identification. the possibility to tolerate the positions in the original co-ordinate system. it is sometimes specified in the drawing that the MMC can also be applied for a reference element (e. click on the symbol on the right and activate for tolerance of the positions the "Origin of Co-ordinate System". execute the measurement for an initial sample. at the end of a long part program. the features are classified according to this number. The symbol on the left side always signifies the actual (last) co-ordinate system. During the input. This is only valid for positions. e.g. . ... 11 Change Protocol ..................17 1.....12 1.....16 1......11 1..................... 8 Output Text .................. 21 3.20 1....................................................................................... 16 2.................................................................................................................................................................. 6 Print Format End...................... 2 1............................ 8 External Print Format End ....... 12 Types of Output .......................8 1................................................ 20 Protocol Output ......................................... 15 Flexible Graphic Protocols .............................6 1...................................................................................................................2 1.............................................................................10 1..................................................3 1.....................................................4 IX-1 ....................5 1..........22 1....................4 3 Flexible Graphic Protocols and Graphic .. 13 Print Preview (Page View)........................................................................................................ 6 Form Feed .................... 7 Protocol Archive ............... 5 File Format End......................................... 21 Scale and Print Graphics .....23 2 Output of Data......................2 2...........................13 1....3 2.......................................1 3.................................... 3 Standard or Special File Format........................ 17 Flexible Graphic Protocols in the GEOPAK Editor .............................................. 8 External Printing ..........................04 Dialogue for Protocol Output..............1 1........................................... 11 Open Protocol ........................ 5 Print Format Specification .......................18 1............................... 12 Close Protocol .........................09..........14 1........ 19 Templates of Graphic Windows ........................................... 12 Protocol Output ..4 1................................. 7 Printing according to Layout Head Start .............19 1............ 4 Change File Output Format ....................9 1.............................................................................................. 18 Tolerance Graphics in the Flexible Protocol ................ 9 Layout for Surface ..............Output IX Output of Data Contents 1 Output.....................21 1............................................................1 2........................................................... 2 File Format Specification ................ 10 Save Contour in ASCII File .7 1... 21 v 2..................... 5 Change Print Format ....................................................2 14.... 8 External Print Format Change .15 1..................................... If you need a printed report. you can change the output format via the "Change File Output Format" function. in some other programs. printer output and storage as ASCII file. In GEOPAK. The output of data in a file (storing) is always in ASCII. however. You can output the data on a printer. The format of the data can either be the one predefined by GEOPAK or your own format. For further details. You can use both ways.Output 1 Output 1.04 . You will prefer this solution if you need the data for further processing. these functions are accessible with the menu bar and the "Output" menu. if you need documents for the archives. independently during the learn mode of the part program. you first must select this printer as default in Windows. To do so.4 14. GEOPAK always proposes two ways. Printing is done page by page. use the "File Format Specification" function. "Print Format Start"). there is no formatting information. and/or store the measurement results in a file. However. These parallel functions will meet all your requirements. e. you are going to opt for the printer as output media e.g. refer to Print Layout".g. Please consider in advance which data you need to be printed or stored before starting the learn mode. GEOPAK uses the printer having been determined as default printer in your Windows system (see details under "Printer Settings").09. IX-2 v 2.1 Output of Data For the "Output" of measured data.g. The data are recorded from the moment you switch the corresponding format on (e. • • • If you want to use a different printer. It is also possible to print the ASCII-file. From this list.g. Otherwise. For information on whether and how to choose "Standard" or any special formats refer to the topic Standard or Special File Format. If you enter one fixed file name. Output You can click as many boxes as you want. with the corresponding options. It will be easier to find them again. of 255 signs). For further information concerning this subject. formula calculation. folder "GENERAL". the name of the output file.04 v 2. you meet all requirements for your output file.4 IX-3 .Output 1. If you click on the icon. the new data are always appended to the existing file. you get a dialogue window (Windows conventions) so that you can easily find files in the different directories.2 File Format Specification In this dialogue (menu bar "Output / File Format Specification") you determine. etc. you must change the file name each time you execute the program.09. 14. you can enter a complete file name including drive and path (according to Windows conventions a max. Append Also click on the "Append" check box. the file is simply overwritten. In this case. If you have already created one or more output files. this file will be automatically stored. select "signifying" file names. e. • • • If possible. file "UM_string_code_g(e). Output File In the "Output File" text field. Thus. If you enter only one file name.). where to store it and which information it must include (head data.pdf. You will find the file in the MCOSMOS/exe directory having been created at the installation of MCOSMOS. you can use a list of suggestions. If you want to store all files. please refer to your MCOSMOS-CD-ROM under "Documents". the output file will be overwritten each time you execute the part program. this list appears when you click the arrow symbol. you can choose a file by clicking with the mouse. IX-4 v 2. The "Mitutoyo GEOPAK-3" and "Mitutoyo GEOPAK" formats are always shown.3 Standard or Special File Format File format Beginning from Version 2.4 14. This is what you should know: • • • • The list is derived from already existing format files. In order for this to be implemented. Here you can make your choice using one of the radio buttons for "Standard" or any other formats. Special format In order to get a special format. we recommend that you contact the Mitutoyo Service. The other optional formats are derived from files with the extension GAF = GEOPAK-ASCII format. The format has to be described in this file.2. To get to this dialogue.INI and the sections [GEOPAK-3] and [Geopak-Win] respectively. use the "Menu bar / Settings / Default Settings Programs / CMM / GEOPAK".09. After reinstallation the GEOPAK-3 format is suggested. This enables you to create ASCII files in several formats for a variety of part programs without having to change the default setting. The file name without this extension is in each case the name that is shown in the list. Use the arrow key to select your format from the list. Standard Clicking "Standard" causes the default setting made in the "Settings GEOPAK" dialogue of the PartManager to remain unchanged. They refer to the file GEOASCII. click the second button.04 . the "Start of File Format" dialogue includes as an extension the section "File Format". The format file name's length is limited to 40 characters. The GAF file has to be stored in the MCOSMOS-INI directory.Output 1. The last preceding input is suggested. you get a dialogue window (Windows conventions) so that you can easily find and activate your file in the different directories.6 Print Format Specification Activate these functions in GEOPAK via the menu bar and the "Output" menu. Via the arrow key. you can change the items that must be in the file by the "Change Output Format" function. you can add other items to your file or delete. you can see how your logo appears above the protocol head. you finish the data output to file. Thus. If you click on the icon. 1. cf. – in different files and to store it. The footer includes the current page number. Now. or even start a new file (cf. you define which items (measured results) will be printed. Instead of typing the file name. It is supposed that you have stored your logo as a bitmap (*. the texts are right justified. it automatically appears in the dialogue. 14. "Tolerances". You do not have to finish the output explicitly. input the path and file name of the bitmap of your logo. the version number and the part program term into the headline. In the protocol. Thus. the output file will be automatically closed. etc.09. you can also click the icon. During the execution of the part program. To realize your protocols. When using this function and the following dialogue window.4 IX-5 . Texts that have once been input are automatically stored. in any case. The data are stored.5 File Format End Via this function (menu bar "Output"). The file can be in JPG or BMP format. under File Format Specification). Select the "Print Format Specification" function.4 Change File Output Format Before starting the output.04 If you choose a logo.BMP) file in a directory. Font and size of type is defined for the whole protocol. In the logo file description field. The printed protocol has a headline and a footer printed on every page. under Print Layout. Notice that GEOPAK writes. when you leave the program. v 2. you must have specified under "File Format Specification " what you want to output in the file. you can define the text for the headlines and footers. Activate the "Change Output Format" function via the menu bar and the "Output" pull-down menu. you can either use this file for other purposes. In the description fields. In the protocol. 1.Output 1. it will be possible to place in order the data – sorted according to "Geometrical Elements". you can activate and use later again the texts that have once been input. 8 Print Format End Via this function (menu bar "Output"). Thus. You do not have to finish the output explicitly. You must know 1. it will be automatically printed. You will always get the • • name of the operator and the date and time of start printing.4 14. Via the "Change Print Output Format" function.09. If a page is full. you can change print options without stipulating a new printout format. you finish the data output to file. Via the "Form Feed" function (menu bar "Output") you can get the printout even if the page is not yet full. The selected data are recorded until you finish the part program or stop the output with the "Print Format End" function via the menu bar "Output". You can only use one printout format until activating the "Print Format End" function. You can define the head data in the PartManager via the menu bar "Settings / Head data". or even start a new file (cf. you can either use this file for other purposes. the part name. You can watch the percentage in the status bar besides the user name (at the bottom of the page).04 . you can select which information will be printed on your protocol. the protocol output will be finished and the current page printed (even if the page is not complete). "Tolerances". Change Print Format This function is same as "Change File Output Format". you can have the head data of the part printed on the first page of the protocol. etc. A page is printed as soon as it will be full.Output By clicking in the "Head Data" check box. and others. Ö When using the other check boxes. These data may be the drawing number.7 Recording starts as soon as you confirm the input of the "Print Format Specification" by "Ok". IX-6 v 2. according to "Geometrical Elements". Now.g. –. the customer information. under File Format Specification). it will be possible to create different protocols – sorted e. when you leave the program. 1. If you want to use the layout file.9 Form Feed Via the "Form Feed" function (menu bar "Output") you can get the printout even if the page is not yet full.according to Windows conventions . please refer to your MCOSMOSCD-ROM under "Documents". file "print_lay_2_0_g(e). first search .pdf" and "UM_user_def_g(e). for example created several layout files and activated them already once.pdf" and folder "GENERAL". To do so. If this format is not satisfactory. Ö If you want to make the selection that MCOSMOS offers.Output 1. 14. Under "*/MCOSMOS/Layout" you will find the files proposed from Mitutoyo and those you have created. you can have an adjusted layout from the Mitutoyo service. you can create your own report.g. Hint For further information about the layout. The structure of the log heading is stipulated in the layout file and cannot be changed on your own. 1.the directory in which MCOSMOS is installed on your computer. files "dia_lay_g(e). e. The layout is realized in another program (see details under "The Mitutoyo Layout"). This function also allows printing out several reports in only one operation. you must tell it GEOPAK.04 v 2. Proceed as follows Ö If you have.pdf". Hint The "Print Layout" function is utilised appropriately at the end of the part program because all nominal-to-actual comparisons will be listed in the report.10 Printing according to Layout Head Start MCOSMOS proposes a default layout for your print report. click on the arrow key on the right of the text field. Mitutoyo delivers several possibilities for the layout.09. click on the symbol in the following "Open" dialogue window. this means via the "Print Layout" (menu bar "Output") function.4 IX-7 . If you want. you will find these in a list. As a standard. folder "GEOPAK". the initial sample report according to VDA guidelines. proceed in the following dialogue the same way as explained under "Print Format End". you enter the folder in which MCOSMOS stores all the files relevant for a subsequent protocol.Output 1.04 .09. 1. IX-8 v 2. proceed in the following dialogue the same way as explained under "Print Format Specification". proceed in the following dialogue the same way as explained under "Change Print Format".11 Protocol Archive In this window (menu bar "Output / Protocol Archive"). The data can be administrated or printed via the Protocol-Manager.14 External Print Format End If you activate this function. 1.4 14. See details under "Protocol-Manager".13 External Print Format Change If you activate this function.12 External Printing If you activate this function. 1. you can use position numbers to define the sequence of the output data. This is also valid for the ASCII file. Then. folder "GEOPAK". The input text will be analysed and prepared. In the case of identical position numbers. In output protocols (e.04 v 2. is the same when you print it or another text at each part program execution. initial sample report). Assign position number to a text You can assign a number to entered texts (attributive features) using the input field "Position number". GEOPAK will stop at each execution and asks you to enter your text. For further information concerning this subject. which text will be written into the protocol respectively into the file after the "Preparation of Data".g. each time.). which.15 Output Text Activate the "Text Output" function via the symbol or via the menu bar and the "Output" menu.4 IX-9 . click on the printer symbol. In the line under the description field is shown. You may enter a defined text. If you want to output additional information in your protocol (see icon on the left).pdf. first the input text and then the relevant tolerance comparison are output.Output 1. You can enter a variable in the text (date etc. 14. This is how you can directly position input text in the protocol. file UM_string_code_g(e).09. please refer to your MCOSMOS-CD-ROM under "Documents". Stop 3D-TOL after having printed and.09. You can ask for a list of the different views of the part. It is possible to edit in these lines in contrast to the "Labelling" (see above). If you have opened the dialogue. You only can call the layout commands having been generated in 3DTOL and change with some options. and the two comment lines you can display the default of 3D-TOL via the arrow symbol. you can’t edit in this line. In the following description fields drawing no. In GEOPAK. IX-10 v 2. you may automatically "Re-sort" these. With the different options. print the list of the measured points. windows in the selected view. you will see in the "Labelling" line the names of the views. You can rotate the part and print out the view. you actually work with in GEOPAK.16 Layout for Surface The "Layout for Surface" window (menu bar "Output" and then the function) has to do with the dialogue you originally know from 3D-TOL Win.04 . if you have opened the info. you can Ö Ö Ö Ö print the graphics.Output 1. although it is the same dialogue. In 3D-TOL. the different views of the parts or the models will be provided with a name in the "Labelling" line.4 14. which you have already allocated in 3D-TOL. via the arrow symbol (see picture below). Ö Ö Ö Click on the view you want (in our example "top view"). It is your decision as a user what print-out option you take: all tolerance comparisons. go to the menu bar and the "Output" menu. the tolerance comparisons outside the control limits. or modify the data. It is also possible to edit in these text files (according to Windows conventions). Once you have stored the contour in such a file. or all elements. Word. w and s come from "GEOPAK-Win Scanning". The "Open Protocol" dialogue offers you four options under the heading "Output Options". the program does not recognise the special information contained in the file.4 IX-11 . For initial detailed information refer to "Protocol Output" .Output 1.gws>. 14.or Notepad to read. This function and the subsequent options "Change Protocol Format" and "Close Protocol" enable you to control the output of tolerance comparisons and elements. The three letters g.g. Otherwise.09.17 Save Contour in ASCII File With the "Contour Save" function. print.04 v 2. you can use the scroll bar to view the whole list. If you do not see it in the displayed zone. It is a part of the List of Elements . In the "Contour Save" dialogue window in the list field under "Select Element". Hint Remember right from the beginning that for the control of the print output you have always to follow this order: Close protocol Change protocol format Close protocol Printing. Ö You can also click on the icon and store the file in the following dialogue window (Windows conventions). you will find the contours you have measured so far. the number of contours is not limited. Ö Click the contour you want to store. you can use e. is also performed automatically at the end of the part program. you can store contours as ASCII file that means as a text.18 Open Protocol To access this function and the corresponding dialogue. Ö Now enter the name of the file in the "Contour File" field together with the path where you want to store the contour. tolerance comparisons outside the tolerance limits. Using this dialogue you also make your decision for one of the "Output Types". Activate this function via the menu bar and the "Output" pulldown menu. The file names must get the extension <. 1. Here. however. It is your decision as a user what print-out option you take: all tolerance comparisons.21 Protocol Output By means of the "Protocol Output". After the MCOSMOS installation. of course.\MCOSMOS\Layout directory.g. If you select a layout. You have four options. So that you can input the head data. etc. by "Geometric Elements". you find some examples of layouts in this folder you can use. the protocol output is closed and the protocol printed out. you can select a layout and the type of output. open a new protocol (for details refer to "Open Protocol").. tolerance comparisons outside the tolerance limits. "Layout" List Box IX-12 On the left side of the dialogue window. v 2.20 Close Protocol Using this function (Menu bar / Output) you finish the current print output.19 Change Protocol This dialogue (Menu bar / Output / Change Protocol Format) allows you to make changes to the output format previously selected in the dialogue "Open Protocol". you will see all layouts situated in the .09. a preliminary drawing of the layout is automatically displayed. 1. the tolerance comparisons outside the control limits. you must use the option Inout Head Data or Set Head Data Field.. When you leave the program.04 . you can create protocols. or all elements. "Tolerances". Here.designated e. After finishing you can.Output In contrast to the function File Format Spezifikation the option "head data" does not stand to the decree in this dialogue. 1. In the "Layout" list box. Thus it is possible to generate various protocols . 1. you find the "Layout" list box.4 14. Hint The template is a layout or a manuscript for your protocol. g. If. several files will be created by default. The condition for this is a postscript printer driver able to create graphics for a device-independent printing. output is done on the current printer.04 v 2. In which form the protocols are printed or stored is explained in the "Types of Output". If you want to send your measurement protocols (e. out of the . Multi-Mime-HTML-Format This format is qualified for sending measurement protocols.Output Number of Copies In the "Number of Copies" list box. Not all software makers comply with this specification. 1. see details under "ProtocolDesigner".5". you have selected another printer for a layout. a PRN file (preprint process) will be created. So it may happen that the created RTF documents will be badly displayed by the text-processing programs. For this topic. print and edit (but editing is limited) with the free of charge "Acrobat Reader" of Adobe.09. you should use the Multi-Mime-HTML format. you define how many copies you want to output. as email or on CD rom). you can select layouts that have been optimised for Word.22 Types of Output By means of the radio buttons. On your MCOSMOS-CD-ROM you will find also a complete user’s manual under "protocolldesigner_g(e). in the ProtocolDesigner. With 14. But. Print to File If you select this option. the pictures are stored in a separate file. a file will be created in RTF format. you see how many protocols have been requested at last. Adobe PDF-Format A PDF document will be created that you can read. which are listed under "Output" on the right side of the dialogue window. Hint The RTF documents will be created according to the Microsoft specification "Version 1.. For example. you can open this file in a text-processing program and if necessary adapt it. Click on "Documents" and "GENERAL". The following radio buttons are available: Printer If not set before. In the list box.pdf". this will be used to print the protocol. you determine the output format. Rich Text Format If you make this option. HTML Format If you output a protocol in HTML format (without Muli-Mime).\MCOSMOS\Layout directory. Then.4 IX-13 . you get one or several bitmap files. XML-Format This format is partially still in the making. Hint These graphic data files are suitable for a problem-free integration of your measurement data in presentations.09. independently to the size of your protocol.4 14. IX-14 v 2. only one file will be created. you get one or several JPEG files.Output Multi-Mime-HTML format in contrast to simple HTML. you enter the file name of the protocol. JPEG graphics If you make this option. independently to the size of your protocol. XML is meant to offer you multitudinous possibilities for processing your measurement data. Output in Formats of Graphic Data File • • • Bitmap If you make this option.04 . Metafile (EMF) If the output must be in the Metafile format. you get one or several Metafile files. independently to the size of your protocol. List Box for File Names In the list box bottom right. Output 1.23 Print Preview (Page View) This preview option is a "Real Data Print Preview". This means that there are no global values displayed such as those shown, e.g., in the ProtocolDesigner. What is displayed are the values obtained from the measurements you have just performed. You access the dialogue (picture below) in the GEOPAK learn mode through the "Menu bar / Output / Protocol Preview". So it is possible for you to verify your protocol once more before printing. If your protocol is alright, you will not have to leave the print preview again. You select your template from the list and confirm. As a result, you obtain a screen-filling preview from where you can print directly. In addition to the above, it is possible to store the print preview or to email it to your customer. For this purpose, you customer needs only a small program that he can get from you without paying license fees. You find this "invoice.ll" program on your MCOSMOS – CD. All other symbols in this preview window are ballooned, so you can see right on the spot what function is concerned. 14.09.04 v 2.4 IX-15 Flexible Graphic Protocols 2 Flexible Graphic Protocols To open the dialogue window "Store graphic for template" click on the symbol (left) of an opened graphic window, e.g. "Graphics of elements". Alternatively you can use the menu bar "Graphic / Store graphic for template". With this function you can prepare graphics in the learn mode for the printout in the flexible protocol. Background It is not possible to print graphic windows directly out of the GEOPAK learn mode into the flexible protocols. For this, you need to store the graphic windows temporarily as a file. The definition as to which files are printed out, you find in the templates. In the input field "Names" of the dialogue "Store graphic for template" you enter a name of the graphic that is as "telling" as possible. You can also dispose of nine view numbers. Depending on the template with which you want to print, you have to select the view number. You know these view numbers (picture on the right) from the ProtocolDesigner. For detailed information on this program and further directions for use and Online Help refer to ProtocolDesigner. The inputs in the input fields "Name" and "Comment" are, subject to a relevant template, included in the flexible protocol. Hint In contrast to the GEOPAK edit mode, you need not select a graphic type, because in the learn mode, the function "Store graphic for template" is linked to the graphic. For more information, refer to "Flexible Graphic Protocols in the GEOPAK Editor"" and "Flexible Graphic Protocols and Graphic". IX-16 v 2.4 14.09.04 Flexible Graphic Protocols 2.1 Flexible Graphic Protocols and Graphic Print Graphic Ö Activate the function "View number". The function "For table" is deactivated. Ö Select view number 1, as the protocol output of Mitutoyo templates is performed via "view number" 1 as a standard. Ö Activate the function "Print graphic" if you wish to print out the graphic immediately after having confirmed the dialogue with "OK". After clicking the option "Print graphic", the dialogue "Protocol Output" opens. Ö In this case, you select in the dialogue "Protocol output" the template you require for your flexible protocol. To avoid problems with graphics of older measurements, these view numbers and the connected data are deleted upon each program start. Print graphic as a table in the flexible protocol Ö Activate the function "For table". The function "View number" is deactivated. Thus, the graphic is not printed in a single frame but is included in a table in the flexible protocol. The advantage of printing graphics within a table is that any number of graphics can be printed, i.e. irrespective of whether you wish to print out 1 or 100 graphics, you can always use the same template. Positioning the graphic in the flexible protocol If you enter a number in the input field "Position number", you can position the graphic in the flexible protocol. We recommend that you reserve position numbers for this purpose in your part program in order to avoid a doubling of position numbers in the flexible protocol. Change size of graphic in the flexible protocol If you activate the function "Define scaling", you can enlarge or reduce the display size of the graphic in the flexible protocol to scale. You can use this function to fit the graphic into the frame of the template. In case that the graphic is bigger than the frame, only that part of the graphic is displayed that fits into the frame. Values below zero reduce the graphic size. Values bigger than zero enlarge the graphic size. Edit graphic The function "Store graphic for template" automatically stores all graphics as a meta file. To edit the graphic with the graphic programs Corel Draw, Micrografx Designer or AutoCAD, click on the button "Edit graphic". The button "Edit graphic" is only active when a graphic editor has been set in the PartManager under "Settings / Defaults for programs / button PartManager / Editor Tab". 14.09.04 v 2.4 IX-17 Flexible Graphic Protocols Layout of info windows in the learn mode You can use the function "Define layout of info windows for print command" to store the number, position and contents of the info windows in a meta file. Therefore, the graphic is printed in the repeat mode exactly the same way as it has been learned in the learn mode. For detailed information, refer to the topic "Define Layout of Info Windows". Info windows can only be defined for the element graphics and the airfoil analysis (MAFIS). For detailed information refer to "Protocol Output" and "Types or Output". 2.2 Flexible Graphic Protocols in the GEOPAK Editor In order to print-out graphic windows like, for example, "Graphics of elements” in the repeat mode, the function "Store Graphic for template” is required. Background It is not possible to print graphic windows directly out of the GEOPAK learn mode into the flexible protocols. For this, you need to store the graphic windows temporarily as a file. The definition as to which files are printed out, you find in the templates. To get to the function and the corresponding dialogue use the menu bar and the menu "Output". In the part program, this function should always be between the commands "Open protocol” and "Close protocol”. In the command "Open protocol”, always ensure that you have selected the correct template. For detailed information, refer to the topic Templates of Graphic Windows. For further information, also read the topic Tolerance Graphics in the Flexible Protocol. IX-18 v 2.4 14.09.04 Flexible Graphic Protocols 2.3 Tolerance Graphics in the Flexible Protocol Positioning the graphic in the flexible protocol You can position the graphic in the flexible protocol when you enter a number into the input field "Position number". We recommend to reserve position numbers for this purpose to avoid a doubling of position numbers in the flexible protocol. Change size of graphic in the flexible protocol If you activate the function "Define scaling", you can enlarge or reduce the display size of the graphic in the flexible protocol to scale. Values below zero reduce the graphic, values bigger than zero enlarge the graphic. Example: Print-out tolerance graphic "Flatness" in the flexible protocol. Ö In the dialogue window "Open protocol" you select for example the template "Flatness". Ö Ö Select from the list box "Define graphic type" the type "Flatness". Ö Confirm the "Loop counter", when you want an output of elements with a tolerance graphic within a loop. Ö In the input fields "Name" and "Comment" you enter the text that you want to be output in the flexible protocol. Ö Activate the function "View number". The function "For table" is deactivated. Ö Select view number 1, because the Mitutoyo templates regularly output the protocols via the "View number 1". Ö Activate the function "Close window" when you want to close the graphic window in the repeat mode. Select from the list box "Reference element" an element that shall be represented in the tolerance graphic. Example: Print tolerance graphic "Flatness" as a table in the flexible protocol Ö Select in the dialogue window "Open protocol" the template "Mitutoyo Graphic output in a table.mte". Ö Ö Follow the steps 2 to 5 of the above example. The function "View number" is deactivated. Activate the function "For table". For details, refer to the topic Templates of Graphic Windows. 14.09.04 v 2.4 IX-19 Flexible Graphic Protocols 2.4 Templates of Graphic Windows For information about which graphic window requires which template, see the table below: Graphic window Template Graphics of elements ELEMGRAPHIC Tolerance graphic IX-20 Straightness STRAIGHTNESS Flatness FLATNESS Roundness CIRCULARITY Parallelism PARALLELISM Circular Runout CIRCULARRUNOUT Axial Runout AXIALRUNOUT Compare Points COMPAREPNTS Tolerance Comparison Contour TOLCOMPCONTOUR v 2.4 14.09.04 Protocol Output 3 Protocol Output 3.1 Dialogue for Protocol Output With the dialogue for the protocol output, it is possible to enter additional data in the protocol. These can be e.g. data concerning the part, data concerning the user or data concerning the customer. Via the "Template" list box, you select the layout you want. Hint The template is a layout or a manuscript for your protocol. The selected ProtocolDesigner template must have been related to a user-defined input dialogue (edl file). You can relate a user-defined input dialogue only in the ProtocolManager program. For further information on this subject refer to "Relate User-Defined Input Dialogue to a ProtocolDesigner Template". An example for a layout with a dialogue is the "Initial Sample Report of 1998" that you can find in the list box. Hint For a better orientation, a preliminary drawing of the selected layout is automatically displayed. 3.2 Scale and Print Graphics The function "Learnable Graphic Commands" enables the settings for the graphic evaluations of the below items to be stored in the GEOPAK Part Program Editor. Element Graphics Tolerance Graphics • • • Straightness Flatness Circularity Parallelism Airfoil analysis Circular Runout Compare Points Tolerance Comparison Contours You decide whether the print graphics is printed out with an automatic or adjustable scale factor. 14.09.04 v 2.4 IX-21 Protocol Output Add learnable graphic command to part program Ö Ö Ö Click in the menu bar on "Output / Learnable Graphic Commands". Select a graphic type from the list box "Define graphic type". In the list box "Reference element", select an element that shall be displayed and evaluated in the selected graphic. Hint When several reference elements are possible, always select the current or the nominal element as the reference element. All elements are displayed in the element graphics. Therefore the Element Selection list box is disabled in case you select the element graphics. Ö Activate the "Print Window" option, when the graphics is to be printed in the repeat mode. Only open graphic windows can be printed. In order for the element graphics to be printed, it is necessary that in the repeat mode the function "Window / Element Graphics" in the menu bar is activated. To print the rest of the graphic windows it is necessary that the diagram symbol is activated in the corresponding nominal-to-actual-comparison. IX-22 Ö Ö Adjust the way your graphics is to be scaled in the printout. Ö Upon confirmation of your settings the part program command "Learnable Graphic Commands" will be transferred into your part program. Activate the "Close Window" option, when the graphic window which was followed in performing the part program command in the repeat mode, has to be closed. v 2.4 14.09.04 ..............7 2..14 2......................................................... 3 Export Contour ..................2 1......................................................3 3................................. 16 Middle Contour ..........................3 2.........................1 3............................................. 24 Recalculate Contour from Memory / Copy ..............................17 2............................................................. 8 Special formats .......................................................................................................................... 25 Contour Connection Element .............20 3 Manipulate Contour ............. 10 2..6 1.............................................................Contours X Contours Contents 1 Contours .18 2............. 22 Scanning of a Nominal Contour ...........................2 3......................................... 18 Activate Leading Contour ................................2 2.16 2.................................................. 12 Create Offset-Contour ....... 30 v 2..................................................................................................................... 19 Scanning with Guiding Contour ..... 9 Manipulate Contour...... 9 Error Message.......................................... 26 Delete Contour Points..........................10 2 Principles .....................................................................8 1.................................................................................... 10 Edit Contour Point ............................9 1...1 2.......................11 2................................... 14 Change Point Sequence.............................................5 1..................1 1............................ 18 Prepare Leading Contour.....................5 2..... 29 Delete with Radius.04 Delete Points of a Contour................. 11 Mirror Contour ... 5 VDAFS Format ......... 17 Fit in Circle with fixed Diameter ........ 27 3....6 2..............19 2........13 2.................................................................................................................................................4 14....................................09..........10 2............................8 2.....................................................3 1........................................ 28 Delete with the Co-Ordinates.....................4 1.............. 3 Contour Import...................................... 27 Delete via "Single Selection" ........ 4 Technical Specification........... 12 Idealize Contour.........4 2........................... 24 Intersection Point (Contour with Line / Circle / Point)......... 15 Sort Sequence of Contour Points .................................................................... 5 DXF Format ......................................................................................................9 2............... 20 Loop Counter ......................... 3 1... 6 VDAIS (IGES) Format............................................. 22 Define Approach Direction ......12 2.................... 11 Move / Rotate Contour ......................................................4 X-1 .................................................7 1.......................15 2.................................................................................. 10 Scale Contour ........ 7 NC Formats ......................................... ............................................9 3................ 37 v 2...................... 34 Clean Contour ......................... 36 Delete Double Contour Points.......Contours 3............04 .......13 3.... 32 Reduce Neighboured Points .....................5 3.............................................. 34 Delete Contour Loops................. 31 Reduce Number of Points .....................10 3.............6 3............................7 3........................................................................................................ 33 Delete Point Intervals from Contour .................................... 35 Delete Reversing Paths from Contour..................14 X-2 Delete via an Angle Area ........ and Max....... 31 Delete Linear Parts of a Contour.................................................. Point.................4 14...8 3... 36 Min.12 3..........11 3.....09............... Use the function "Pitch" to insert additional points. Click on the icon "Import contour" and confirm. 1. Condition for the measuring procedures in GEOPAK is that only the required contour data (e. In order to obtain exact results for the tolerance comparisons always activate the option "Set end point". Enter the contour name and the memory number in the dialogue window "Element Contour". The unit of measurement of the file (default. If this option is activated. We recommend to use the default setting. the initial and end points of a line or of a sector of circle will be transferred only.g. it is only possible to read in formats which correspond to the technical specifications determined in GEOPAK (for further information please refer to Technical Specification). however. of any two dimensional contour) are included in the CAD files.4 X-3 . The dimensioning lines are considered as lines to be measured by the program. The distance between these two points is normally too large. The pitch: If you do not insert additional points. In general. the determined unit in the CAD file is not correct you have to change it.meanwhile integrated in GEOPAK which was known before as program "TRANSPAK".04 v 2.Contours 1 Contours 1. It's primary task is to read in contours for tolerance comparisons.g. Dialogue window In the dialogue window "Import contour" choose the following settings: The Type of format. If. Precondition The function "Import contour" must be activated by an entry in the dongle. VDAFS or IGES. No surface data and no dimensioning lines must be included in the data file. e. millimetres or inch). two additional contour points are inserted at the beginning and the 14.09. The Contour file (CAD file) by choosing this icon. With this function it is possible to take over contours from external CAD systems to GEOPAK.1 Principles The following texts describes a function .2 Contour Import Procedure Click on this icon or choose "Element / Contour" from the menu bar. This process will take some time. the data can be output to CAD systems via different common interfaces e. In this case the position of the elements is not correct (see picture below).g. Confirm. Choose the "unit of measurement" of the file. The result is shown in the element graphic. If you wish to sort. Procedure How to export the measured contour data to an external CAD system: Click on menu "Output" and choose function "Export contour". X-4 v 2. VDAFS or IGES. The points are inserted with a distance of 0.Contours end of a line or of a sector of circle. First of all sort the elements in the correct order.04 . "Type of format" and "Contour file" in the displayed dialogue window.01 millimetres. After you have scanned a contour. Confirm. Choose the desired contour (2D contour or 3D contour) by clicking on the corresponding icon. The maximum number of points to be generated is 32 000. 1. in the element list and in the result field.3 Export Contour The specifications of chapter "Import contour" are valid for this chapter except for the following descriptions. a maximum number of 7000 elements can be read. The contour is read. If a contour contains many small elements. this option is not necessary.09.4 14. The output of the contour is protocoled in the result field. If this number is exceeded. GEOPAK displays the error message "Too many points". Sort order of points: It may occur that the elements in a CAD file are not mutually connected. Choose your settings for "Select contour". 21. In particular. 20. If this option is deactivated. When interpolation is activated each point corresponds to a VERTEX element. 30 (centre). 30 (point) (when using the DXF 'POINT' element no intermediate points are generated in GEOPAK) CIRCLE 10. 30 (starting position) 11. the use of 210. 30 (starting position) 11. 50. It is possible to create contours with a maximum number of 31999 points. 20. 30 (centre).5 DXF Format DXF format : ASCII. 230 and with POLYLINE 10. 220. 20. in AUTOCAD set OFANG to END).0 Autodesk Convert DXF into GEOPAK The contours are output as elements. Convert GEOPAK into DXF Contours are output as DXF element POLYLINE. 40 (radius) ARC 10. 60 (angle) POLYLINE 66 VERTEX 10. 31 (end position) Group codes not listed here are ignored. 20. Only the contour lines may be used in the data output. 42 (bulge) SEQEND 3DLINE 10.4 X-5 . 14. up to 31999 elements can be read in. based on AutoCad V10. Blocks must be resolved before the output.4 Technical Specification General conditions for data exchange Attention must be paid during the design with the CAD system that the end positions of successive design elements coincide with the start position of the next element (e.09.Contours 1. 20. 30 (location). the maximum number of geometric elements to be read is 7000. 40 (radius). The maximum sequence of polynomial curves is 22. 31 (end position) POINT 10. 20. The following elements and group codes are supported: LINE 10. 30 with values not equal to 0 leads to errors. This specification is only valid for the exchange of contours between CAD systems and GEOPAK 1.04 v 2.g. If the option "Sort order of points" is activated. 21. 20. the polynomial sequence may not exceed 22 CIRCLE Circle Using language elements not listed above may lead to errors.Contours 1. The following VDAFS elements are supported: HEADER Start identifier of the file BEGINSET Start of a set ENDSET End of a set $$ Comment POINT Point co-ordinates (when using this element. the direction vectors are not evaluated CURVE Curve from segments. Convert GEOPAK into VDAFS Contours are output as the VDAFS element PSET. Convert VDAFS into GEOPAK The contours are output as "sets". X-6 v 2.04 . V 2.) PSET Point sequence MDI Point vector sequence.09.4 14.0 according to DIN 66301.6 VDAFS Format VDAFS format : ASCII. no intermediate points are generated in GEOPAK. 7 VDAIS (IGES) Format VDAIS is a subset of IGES V3.15 !00 X - Structuring element PD pointer only on geometric elements * * General restriction compared to IGES. Convert VDAIS into GEOPAK Element Typ Form Subord Sw PD ptr.4 X-7 . 14.0. Spline curve 112 0 X X X Geometric elements Types: linear.09.14. Circular arc 100 0 X X X 2D-point 106 1 X X X 3D-point 106 2 X X X Straight line 110 0 X X X Par.Contours 1. quadratic. cubic * Point (--> composite 116 curve) 0 X X X Transformation matrix 124 0 - X !0 Composite curve 102 0 !00 X !0 Group 402 1.04 v 2. Convert GEOPAK into VDAIS Contours are output as the VDAIS element 110 (straight line).7. Matrix ptr. G3 can also be programmed permanently. the commands G1.4 14. Reading NC data into GEOPAK The following G commands are interpreted: G1 straight line interpolation G2 circle interpolation in clockwise direction G3 circle interpolation in counter-clockwise direction G17 XY plane selection G18 ZX plane selection G19 YZ plane selection Note the circle in commands G2 and G3 must be defined via the midpoint (I. X-8 v 2. J.Contours 1.04 . Initial and end sequences can be defined specifically for each control system. Output of GEOPAK in NC formats The data are output via G1 commands. G2. K).8 NC Formats NC programs are generated and read according to DIN 66025.09. the co-ordinates can be specified both incrementally and absolutely. are available.4 X-9 . If necessary enlarge the distance of points. Deactivate the option "Set end point". 14.09.Contours 1. 1. In these formats it is possible to transfer point data only.9 Special formats In addition to the above-mentioned formats several special formats for programs such as PC-DRAFT. PERSONAL DESIGNER. proceed as follows: Check the format in the dialogue window "Import contour". As described above it may happen that e. etc. Internal (binary) CAD formats are generally not supported.04 v 2. In all cases these formats are ASCII formats. To a large extent the formats may be freely defined using control files.10 Error Message If an error Message is displayed. an IGES file contains elements which can not be read by GEOPAK.g. You can cancel any changes made. not necessarily in the system where they were measured.Manipulate Contour 2 2. that is.1 Manipulate Contour Manipulate Contour A mouse-click on the menu topic "Contour" provides you with various possibilities to manipulate your contour (position. You enter the scale factors into the text boxes X.4 14. The manipulation is done to the original contours. however. please refer to the title "Loop Counter". Using the arrow.04 . 2.2 Scale Contour For details regarding general principles see under "Manipulate Contour". All functions are of the teach-in type to be used for the repeat mode.). All points of the contour are multiplied . This is what you can do with the contour: Scale Mirror Move Create Offset-Contour You can also "Cancel Points". using the menu "Elements". you select an already existing contour. X-10 v 2. no new contours are created.by these factors. You proceed in the following way: You click in the menu bar on Contour/Scale and come to the dialogue window "Scale Contour". etc.09.relative to the origin of the actual co-ordinate system . that is. For details as to whether and how to use the loop counter. All contours are processed in the actual co-ordinate system. You activate this function. shape. Y and Z and confirm. 09.04 v 2.Manipulate Contour 2. Use this arrow to select an already existing contour. The order of points is inverted. Using the symbols. you select one of the planes relative to which you want to mirror the contour.3 Edit Contour Point You can use this function to change the co-ordinates of an already existing contour point. The dialogue window "Select points from contour" is opened. and then you confirm. Set the co-ordinates mode. you select an already existing contour. The dialogue window "Edit contour point " is opened. The object is. Proceed as follows: In the menu bar click on "Contour / Edit contour point" and the dialogue window "Edit contour point " opens. Confirm your selection. In the dialogue window "Edit contour point" you enter the new co-ordinates of the contour point to be changed. You proceed in the following way: You click in the menu bar on Contour/Mirror and come to the dialogue window "Mirror Contour". to establish from the original and the mirrored contour one common contour (in one sense of rotation) (for details see under the topic "Connection Element Contour").4 Mirror Contour For details regarding general principles see under "Manipulate Contour". in particular. In the GEOPAK learning mode you can select the contour point to be changed in the element graphic using the mouse. 14.4 X-11 . 2. Using the arrow. Confirm. Enter the contour point you want to change. You proceed in the following way: You click in the menu bar on "Move/Rotate Contour" and come to the dialogue window "Move/Rotate Contour".. Now the angle of rotation remains at 0. you select an already existing contour. and then . If you then still want to rotate the contour around an axis.Manipulate Contour 2. and then you confirm. 2. For details regarding general principles see under "Manipulate Contour". you select the contour via the list functions.5 Move / Rotate Contour All points of the contour are first moved and then rotated .4 14. You enter the "move" figures into the text boxes X. Introduction You have scanned a contour in order to generate a CNC part program (e. "Rotate" first If you want to rotate first and move after.. You proceed in the following way: You click in the menu bar on "Contour/Contour with Offset" and come to the appropriate dialogue window. leave the "move" figures at 0 and confirm. In this dialogue window.g. Y or Z). The perpendicular (normal line is formed at each point of the contour. you rotate (as described above). you use the symbols to select one of the three axes (X. Furthermore.6 Create Offset-Contour For details regarding general principles concerning the topic contour see under "Manipulate Contour".09. The point is moved by the "offset" along the perpendicular.04 .. you enter the figure for the angle in the adjacent text box. for wire spark-erosion machines (for details see under the topic Transfer Contour into External System). Use the option buttons to define in which direction the contour shall be offset. you enter the offset figure. X-12 v 2. call up the dialogue again and move (as described above).relative to the origin of the actual co-ordinate system. Using the arrow. Such a contour is also called an Offset Contour or an Equidistant. What you need for such a transfer is a contour whose tool radius is increased or decreased. Y and Z. Then .. 4 X-13 .09. On the left (above) the original contour. These points are recovered by the "Back function". these constrictions are automatically deleted. For this. 14. Left / Right The offset orientates at the sort sequence of the contour points. This is the reason why the calculated contour may possibly provide less points than the initial contour. The command "Left" effects the stated offset to the left side of the contour seen in point sequence. on the right (below) the contour after the offset. The option "Increase contour" moves the contour outwards. The calculation of the offset contour makes it possible to clip off parts of the contour (see picture below.04 v 2. The "Offset Contour" is shown in the element graphics and recorded in the result box.Manipulate Contour Increase/Decrease Contour To define the direction in which the contour shall be increased or decreased. Upon completion of the calculation. imagine a closed contour between start and end point. the material side of the contour is of no importance. Proceed as follows: In the menu bar. go to "Loop Counter". refer to the topic Elements: Overview. go to the topic Load Contour. Select element In order to be able to select an element. refer to the topic "Loop Counter". Select contour In order to be able to work with contours.Manipulate Contour 2. angle). click on "Contour/Idealize contour". circle. the contour equals the element in this specific range. line. click on the element with which you wish to idealize the contour. Then. Selection of an element to be taken as the ideal element. For information about if and how to use the loop counter. Select contour range Use the buttons "Selected range" to select: X-14 v 2. For information about how to load a contour. the required element must be part of your part program. In the list box "Select contour". Selection of the contour sections to be idealized. The operation of the function consists of three parts: Selection of a contour to be changed. The dialogue "Idealize contour" opens. For further information.Use the buttons Point Line Circle Angle to select an element type with which you wish to idealize the contour.7 Idealize Contour The possibility to change a measured contour is important for the creation of a machine tool part program. In the list box "Select element".04 . A point selection of a contour can be put in relation to a defined geometric element (point.09. you must load at least one contour. This contour range is idealized to the element. For information about if and how to apply the loop counter. click on the contour you wish to idealize.4 14. refer to Sort Sequence of the Contour Points beschrieben. For more information about this topic. Defined by element.04 v 2. In the list box "Select contour". refer to the topic Load Contour. Select complete contour To select the complete contour. The complete contour is idealized after the selected element. When confirming the dialogue "Change point sequence". the dialogue "Point selection contour" opens. Select contour range Click on the button "Point selection contour" and you can define a contour range. The coordinates of the points and the number of the contour points are not influenced. The dialogue "Change point sequence" opens.8 Change Point Sequence The function changes the sequence of the points within a contour. Proceed as follows: Click in the menu bar on "Contour/Change point sequence". For details. For more information.09. Select a contour range. 14. For information about if and how to apply the loop counter. refer to "Point Selection Contour". click on the symbol "Complete contour". go to "Select Points from Contour". click on the contour for which you wish to change the point sequence. Complete contour. Select contour To be able to work with contours you need to load at least one contour. You wish to idealize a contour section with a manual input.4 X-15 . 2. For information about how to load a contour. refer to the topic "Loop Counter". The contour section is defined by the selected element. The function can be applied to a selected range or to the complete contour.Manipulate Contour Point selection contour. Manipulate Contour 2.9 Sort Sequence of Contour Points A correct sort sequence of the contour points is important for many types of calculations. The sequence can be wrong when, for example, a contour has been imported by an external system. Also the GEOPAK-function "Connection element contour" can lead to the connection of points to a disordered contour. The decision as to which of the following functions is the most suitable must be taken from case to case. Smallest projected distance Smallest distance in the space The points are sorted depending on the distance between adjoining points. The algorithm starts with the start point (ascending) or the end point (descending) of the selected range. Then, the next contour point to the previous one is continuously searched and sorted anew. This is repeated until the sorting of all contour points is completed. The point co-ordinates are, depending on the selection, viewed as a projected point (projected distance) or as a XYZ-point (in the space). Reverse sort sequence for points The sequence of the points is reversed. Thus, the start point of a contour becomes the end point of the contour and vice versa. X-co-ordinate Y-co-ordinate Z-co-ordinate The points are sorted depending on the selected co-ordinate. The start and the end point of the contour may change. Radius projected Radius 3D The points are sorted against the origin of the co-ordinate system depending on the radius of each point. The start and end point of the contour will usually change. The radius is calculated, depending on the selection, either from the projected point (radius projected) or the XYZ-point (Radius 3D). Angle range The points are sorted against the first axis of the contour projection depending on the angle of each individual point. The angle is always calculated on the projection plane of the contour. The start point does not change, the end point may change. Ascending / Descending The sort sequence of the previous settings (except "Reverse sort sequence for points") can be reversed using these option buttons. X-16 v 2.4 14.09.04 Manipulate Contour Examples: • • • Contour points of a gear are sorted with the option "Angle range". A contour parallel to the X-axis could be sorted easily with the option "X-co-ordinate". In most cases, the option "Smallest distance in space" is sufficient. 2.10 Middle Contour A Middle Contour is calculated, for instance, in cases where the mean for correction is to be calculated from a variety of workpieces (nests or forms). A situation where a new contour with a defined pitch or defined pitches is to be produced from a single contour is regarded as a special case. Thus, the Middle Contour becomes necessary in case of a tool correction where the nominal, the actual and also the tool contour must each have the same number of points. Only if this is the case, a correction can be performed. You proceed in the following way: You either click on the symbol or use the menu bar with the functions "Element/Contour". Using the dialogue window "Element Contour", you allocate a name and a memory location to the contour you still want to calculate. You click on the symbol and confirm. In the window "Middle Contour" under "Avail.", you select the contours you want to use for the calculation. Clicking on the double arrow you move the contours under the heading "Selected" (or also back). Additionally, you enter the pitch (the spacing between the points) to be used for calculating the new contour, and then you confirm.. For details as to whether and how to use the loop counter, please refer to the title "Loop Counter". The new contour is displayed in the element graphics and recorded in the result box.. Hint In the window "Middle Contour" you can, of course, select just one contour with a different pitch. For details regarding general principles see under "Manipulate Contour". 14.09.04 v 2.4 X-17 Manipulate Contour 2.11 Fit in Circle with fixed Diameter You can fit in a circle with given diameter in a contour with two touching points. The result is the circle shown in the element graphics below. You proceed in the following way In the toolbar, click on the symbol on the left. In the following "Element Circle" window, click under "Type of Construction" on the "Fit in Element" symbol. Via the "Fit in Element Circle" and "Select Points from Contour" windows, you create your circle. See further details to this in the topics Constructed Circles and Select Points from Contour . This function can only be used on contours with a point sequence. The "Inserted Circle“ is a simulation of the customary methods in order to evaluate spindle and screw parameters. The starting points must exist shaped as a contour. 2.12 Prepare Leading Contour A leading contour can be provided, e.g. by a CAD system. Upon completion of the measurement, an actual / nominal comparison can be made with the scanned contour. You proceed in the following way Scanning following a leading contour requires the following actions to be done previously: You click on "CNC On" and on the functions "CMM/CNC On" disposed at the menu bar. You see in the GEOPAK status line a yellow dot next to the CMM symbol. You click on the symbol in the symbol bar, and... de-activate in the following dialogue window "Element Contour" the function "Automatic Measurement". For details as to whether and how to use the loop counter, please refer to the title "Loop Counter". X-18 v 2.4 14.09.04 Manipulate Contour You click on the symbol and confirm. Upon completion of the above, the function " Scanning following a leading contour" in the menu CMM is activated. For details regarding general principles see under "Manipulate Contour". 2.13 Activate Leading Contour Before the function "Scanning following Leading Contour" is activated, you must perform a series of steps. For details see under the topic Prepare Leading Contour. This is what you must know • • • The points are established by probing. For this purpose, every single point of the leading contour is probed. Moreover, it is necessary that a probe is defined. You proceed in the following way: In the menu "CCM" you click on the function "Scanning following Leading Contour". You select the leading contour in the window " Scanning following Leading Contour". For details as to whether and how to use the loop counter, please refer to the topic "Loop Counter". Using the known symbols you specify the plane along which scanning is to take place. In addition to the selection of the plane you choose a probing direction. A graphical sign in the dialogue window on the right shows you the plane where and the direction from which probing takes place. Clicking on the symbol you specify that traversing will take place using "Probing Direction of the Leading Contour". You enter the safety distance and measurement length. The probe radius compensation, if necessary, will be carried out by you at a later time, requiring a separate step. 14.09.04 v 2.4 X-19 Manipulate Contour 2.14 Scanning with Guiding Contour Basis If you want to scan according to a guiding contour, you must consider the following items: The points of the guiding contour and the measured points are treated as probe centre points. The probe radius cannot be compensated because when working e.g. on vaulted surface, the exact point on work piece (P) is not known (see picture below). In order to avoid a crash, enter the required safety distance. The measured nominal length limits the search in the probing direction. This way, you avoid a crash with the probe shaft (see also the related subject Enter Z Offset). In the first scanning with guiding contour, you should reduce the movement speed of the CMM. Default: Specify measurement direction (fixed measurement direction) If you have selected e.g. the X/Y plane, you measure in the +Z or— Z direction. In order to get a short measurement time, the (dash-lined) Z coordinate adapts itself in our example with the X/Y plane (swung line below) of the workpiece contour. If you selected, like above, the X/Y-plain, the probing direction in the X/Y plane is automatically calculated. It passes vertically to the contour, namely to the inner or outer side. (see picture below [outer side]). X-20 v 2.4 14.09.04 Manipulate Contour Measuring Direction specified through Guiding Contour If the contour of 3D-TOL has been generated, also a probing direction exists that you can use (see picture below). 14.09.04 v 2.4 X-21 Manipulate Contour 2.15 Loop Counter For saving and exporting contours, you also can use "Loop Counters". The procedure for "Saving". Via the symbol, click in the list field on the contour, with which you want to begin in the loop, respectively you want to save as first contour. Activate the loop counter via the symbol. When saving, the loop counter is not automatically registered. Click on the symbol. In the window "Save Contour as" you must enter the special characters "@LC" at an independent place (see example below).
[email protected] At each m loop flow, a file is (example above) created: contour1.gws, contour2.gws, .., contourN.gws Notice For the export of contours with the loop counter the above mentioned steps are analogously valid. 2.16 Scanning of a Nominal Contour This function is used to scan flat surfaces, e.g. sealing surfaces of cylinder heads, in the surface mode. In the edge mode you can scan a nominal contour at high speed. For this, you can only use scan probes, like for example MPP100 SP25 SP80 SP600 The scanning of single points, e.g. with a TP200, is not possible. The scanning of a nominal contour in the surface mode works like the Phi-Zscanning. However, a contour is used as leading geometry instead of a circle. Proceed as follows In the menu "CMM" click on the function "Scanning of a nominal contour" Select the leading contour in the window "Scanning of a nominal X-22 v 2.4 14.09.04 Manipulate Contour contour". For information about if and how to apply the loop counter, refer to the topic "Loop Counter". Add probe radius offset to leading contour The loaded leading contour is positioned either on the workpiece surface or in the probe centre. When using a contour positioned on the workpiece surface, activate the button. Add probe radius offset to measured contour The measured contour can be compensated by the probe radius. This is how you get a contour on the workpiece surface. This button is only active in the edge mode. Tolerance Limits The nominal contour is used to calculate geometrical elements like circles (red) and lines (blue). The maximum deviation between the nominal contour and the calculated elements is defined by the tolerance limits of the line and circle elements. Enter these tolerance limits into the input fields "Line" and "Circle". During the scanning process the probe may not loose contact to the workpiece. Therefore, the offset of the nominal contour is included in the calculation. This offset is the excursion that is added to the approach direction. For detailed information, refer to Define Approach Direction. 14.09.04 v 2.4 X-23 click on the symbol . When probing a surface and using the Phi-Z-strategy. The approach direction is used to determine on which side of the nominal contour the material is. With this function you can assert that no collisions occur before starting the contour measurement. The entered values are automatically adapted so that the sum of the cosine four squares is 1.09.04 . enter the point distance of the individual contour points. When probing at an edge in one of the three planes XY. A window "Recalculate from Memory / Copy: Contour" is displayed. in a new co-ordinate system). 2.17 Define Approach Direction Define the scan mode or the movement strategy. This can be useful if two contours must be calculated being of two different co-ordinate systems. Procedure In the toolbar. click on the symbol "Start point on the surface". the approach direction to the first contour point is defined. Point distance and scan speed In the input field "Pitch". In the "Storage" list box. In the input field "Scan speed". Accept CMM-position When clicking on the symbol "Machine position". click the contour. This scan mode is quicker than the scan mode for an unknown contour.Manipulate Contour 2.18 Recalculate Contour from Memory / Copy For your measurement task it can be necessary that an already saved contour must be recalculated (e. On principle. you enter a no. As this is a 2D-scan. the third coordinate remains almost constant. XZ and YZ from the side. You can define the angles of the direction vectors of the approach direction in the input fields X. for your contour. which must be recalculated (copied). In the list field "Select Contour". You can also select via the "Menu Bar / Element / Contour". If you click on the symbol "Change direction vector".. click on the symbol "Start point on the edge".4 14. the respective angle of the direction vector is reversed. you can select X-24 v 2. already existing or a new no..g. enter the speed with which you wish to scan your workpiece. and in the following window "Element Contour" on the keypad. Y and Z. You either click on "Insert element point as contour point" or on "Insert all of the intersection points". click on the "Intersection" symbol in "Type of Construction" and confirm. you determine whether the contour must be recalculated as an open or closed contour.04 v 2. Select an element in the list box "Second element". Via the symbol. see the topic Intersection Element Point. For further details. confirm and the "Element Point" window is displayed. In the tool bar "Second element".09. line. In this window. is fully shown in the topic "Loop CounterHTPC_SCN_CONT_SAVE_LOP". in case of the combination "Contour / Point". Note The projection of a point onto a contour is defined as the shortest distance between the point and the contour.4 X-25 . If. 2. the point is not positioned on the contour. "Contour / Line" and "Contour / Point".19 Intersection Point (Contour with Line / Circle / Point) You can calculate intersections also by using the element combinations "Contour / Circle". the point projected onto the contour is calculated as the intersection. circle and point). You proceed in the following way Click on "Element Point" in the toolbar. Via one of the symbols (here the Phi Z plane). If and how to use the loop counter. Insert intersection points as contour points into a contour In the tool bar "First element". you click on the element symbol that you want to intersect with the contour (e.Manipulate Contour • • a whole contour or a section of it (also selectable with the mouse). click on the contour symbol when this button is not yet active. You select a contour in the list box "First element". 14. The "Intersection Element Point" window is displayed. you decide in which plane the contour must be projected.g. . the button is displayed as pushed. e. actual co-ordinate system and in the selected projection plane. you must confirm in the "Element Contour" window.04 . In any case.. the contour is assigned the status "opened contour".20 Contour Connection Element Using the function "Connection Element Contour" you can connect single contours to form a common contour. You would then have the original together with the "new contour" for comparison purposes. In this case. Hint For details as how to proceed in the dialogue windows "Contour Connection Element (Single or Group Selection)". In the window "Element Contour". Or select via the "Menu Bar / Element / Contour".09.g. This function is suitable also for copying a contour. in cases where you create a "Contour with Offset". click on the symbol (picture left).4 14. please refer to the "Single Selection" and "Group Selection". X-26 v 2. You can also overwrite and existing contour. Of great importance is the option which allows you to choose between the Single or Group Selection (for details please refer to the topics "Single Selection" and "Group Selection"). Opened / closed contour: Change status You can use this function to connect the first and the last contour point of a contour. Procedure You come to the dialogue window "Contour Connection Element" by clicking on the symbol in the toolbar.. You can use this function to your advantage.Manipulate Contour 2. If the connection between the first and the last contour point is interrupted. The general contour is located in the . The contour is assigned the status "closed contour". at least. The explanations provided for the following functions show how geometrical elements can be calculated from contour points and. the "Delete Points" window gives you four options with regard to the "Delete Points" function. or to delete not desired contour points.g. For information on how to load a contour refer to the topic Load Contour.Delete Contour Points 3 Delete Contour Points Working with contours makes it necessary to change (delete. e. Use contours For details regarding the practical use of contours refer to the following items: Delete Points of a Contour Reduce Number of Points Clean Contour 3. you must know that the reference point is always the origin of the actual co-ordinate system. Select contour In order for you to work with contours. move) contour measurement points.. Decide whether you want to use the loop counter.4 X-27 . one contour.1 Delete Points of a Contour If. Delete via Single Selection Delete with the Co-Ordinates Delete with Radius Delete via an Angle Area Notice For the following actions.04 v 2. The topic "Loop Counter" provides information as to whether and how to use the loop counter. how you evaluate only parts of a contour. you have to load. 14.09. Click on "Contour / Delete Points" in the menu bar in order to open the "Delete Points" dialogue. you wish to evaluate only parts of a contour. for instance. The area is marked in another colour (see Fig.04 . The number of the selected groups and their co-ordinates are transferred to the "Selection of Point Contour" window. below marked in red). Click on the symbol. you mark in the element graphics the points you want to delete. The "Selection of Point Contour" window opens. X-28 v 2. you will use this function. With the mouse cursor (reticule). Confirm the "Delete Points" dialogue.Delete Contour Points 3.09.2 Delete via "Single Selection" In cases where you have to delete single points from a contour.4 14. you will use this function. For the example shown in the picture below.09.04 v 2. 14. Click on the symbol "X-Y-Z Co-Ordinates". The result is shown in a graphics and in the "Select Points from Contour" window. You can input negative values.4 X-29 . we activated the option "X Co-Ordinate" and "above".3 Delete with the Co-Ordinates For cases where you have to delete contour areas from the contour. You decide whether you want to use the X. Use the check buttons to determine whether you wish to delete the points above or below the co-ordinate or between two co-ordinates. Y or Z co-ordinate for the selection of the contour points. The area where you wish to delete the contour points is to be entered into the text box adjacent to the co-ordinate symbols.Delete Contour Points 3. Click on the symbol "Radius . For our example (see picture below). Enter the radius or the radii (in the present case 10) into the text box. X-30 v 2.09. Use the check buttons to determine whether you wish to delete the points above or below the radius or between two radii.4 Delete with Radius For cases where you have to delete contour areas from the contour.3D" or on the symbol "Radius .Delete Contour Points 3. you will use this function.04 . we activated the "below" option.4 14.projected". 4 X-31 . there are the following functions available for you: Delete Linear Parts of a Contour Reduce Neighboured Points Delete Point Intervals from Contour 14.. into the second box.g.5 Delete via an Angle Area For cases where you have to delete contour areas from the contour. speed up calculation. "to" angle 2 Upon confirmation of your entries you get the following contour in the element graphics. 50°) into the first input box. Fig.04 v 2. 50°).g. you will use this function.. 2. and.Delete Contour Points 3. the "to" angle (e. Contour with deleted points 3. process contour data to suit a CAD system or a machine tool.6 Reduce Number of Points You will reduce the number of points of a contour if you intend to. Click on the "Angle Range" symbol.09.. clean the contour. "From" angle 1. To this end. Enter the "from" angle (e. points not required are to be deleted from the linear run of the contour. points. 1). Indicate in the "Maximum Deviation" input box the width of the gap determining which points are deleted.Delete Contour Points 3.04 . Perform the following steps: Click on the symbol "Deviation from Chord".7 Delete Linear Parts of a Contour This function ensures that contour points located inside the run of the contour are kept within the contour. Points deviating less than 0. X-32 v 2. 2.01 mm from the ideal contour run are deleted.09. located in areas where the contour is linear. The points shown in red are deleted from the contour. Contour with not deleted contour points. Fig. however.4 14. Example In the contour shown here (Fig. are deleted. e.g.01mm into the input box designated "Maximum Deviation". into the input box "Lowest Pitch". see Fig.g.04 v 2. The element graphics has shown you that the linear portion of the contour run is 3 mm. 0. 14. Enter the value 3 mm into the "Max.09. The distance is calculated from every point which was not deleted. Points shown in red are deleted from the contour. Enter a figure. Contour with deleted points. 3.8 Reduce Neighboured Points This function enables you to delete contour points located close to each other. Pitch" input box. Upon confirmation of your entries you get the following contour in the element graphics. 1 mm. This is the case mostly with runs of curves or small radii. Points located within this distance are deleted. Perform the following steps: Click on the button "Reduce Neighboured Points".4 X-33 . 3.Delete Contour Points Enter e. 2. into the input box "Step of Points to save". no loops and no reversing paths.Delete Contour Points 3.9 Delete Point Intervals from Contour This function enables you to delete point intervals from contours. Using the following functions you can: Delete Contour Loops Delete Reversing Paths Delete Double Points X-34 v 2. see Fig.10 Clean Contour A contour consists of measurement points arranged in the order of measurement. see Fig. Supposing the contour consisted of 1000 contour points and you entered 1001. Upon confirmation of your entries you get the following contour in the element graphics. The contour should include no points of the same position (double points). 3. e.4 14. The first contour point and every third contour points will not be deleted. except the first point. Points shown in red are deleted from the contour. 3.04 . Contour with every third point. the contour would be deleted. 1. Enter a figure.g.09. Click on the button "Keep Points by Interval". By entering a figure of your choice into the input box "Take every xth Point" you determine the points which are not to be deleted. 09. 2. 1.Delete Contour Points 3. Click on the symbol "Delete Contour Loops". 14. The time required for calculating this function depends on the number of loop points which you have entered.11 Delete Contour Loops The reason for contour loops can be the functions "Contour with Offset" and "Probe Radius Compensation" in the scanning dialogue. The crossing point is shown in green and the loop points in red.04 v 2. se Fig. see Fig.4 X-35 . Performing the function "Delete Contour Loops" causes the crossing point of the loop to replace the contour points of the loop. Upon confirmation of your entries you get the following contour in the element graphics. Enter the max. number of points into the input box "Biggest Loop". all these loops will be deleted. Contour with no loop If a contour contains several loops. 4 14. The origin of the angle is. This function recognises also the end of the reversing paths and deletes the points not required (shown in red). Contour with no reversing paths 3. into the input box "Reversing Angle". see Fig.12 Delete Reversing Paths from Contour Reversing paths are formed as a result of the connection of two contours with each other and the superposition of contour points. in this case. 2.g. click on the symbol. Upon confirmation of your entries to get the following contour in the element graphics. Click on the symbol "Delete Reversing Point Sequences". Contour with reversing paths.04 . which covers the reversing paths. the point 5. e. Neighboured points whose distance is less than 0. X-36 v 2.13 Delete Double Contour Points In order to delete double contour points. Double contour points (same position of single meas. The function recognises reversing paths.09.Delete Contour Points 3. 10°. Enter an angle. provided they are located within the entered angle. points) cannot be used for contour calculation.0001 mm are regarded as double contour points. Notice The extreme values are even evaluated (interpolated) if the point itself has not been measured.09.4 X-37 . you determine the point on the contour. If you will choose specifically the first or the last point of a contour you click one of the symbols. With this function. Click on one of the symbols (optionally) and confirm. click on the "Min/Max of Contour" symbol in the "Type of Construction" line and confirm. With this function.14 Min. the extreme value outside a gearwheel (above right side). you want to know which size must have the blank. The point is displayed in another colour on the graphics. you see that it is also possible to evaluate the extreme values outside the contour (see red points). you determine the point on the contour. Point If. and Max. In the symbol boxes of the adapted contour. you continue as follows: 14. e. you also can – for alignment of a co-ordinate system – set the part on "0" (origin) at an extreme value. The function is used. select at first a contour. With this function. To locate the co-ordinates already shown in the picture. Position of the Point In the picture below. Y and Z. You proceed in the following way Click on the point symbol in the toolbar because the extreme values will be stored as point elements. which is the farthest to the origin. among other things. All subsequent positions are relative to this extreme value.04 v 2. to evaluate the greatest extension of a contour in the minus and plus values of X. In the following "Element Point" window. which is the nearest to the origin.g.g. for fabrication of eyeglasses. In the "Min/Max of Contour" window. we have evaluated e.Delete Contour Points 3. you can use the min-max function in GEOPAK. Delete Contour Points Click in the element graphics on the symbol (left side).09. Through click e. X-38 v 2.4 14. you get a list from which you can. call your information (picture below). Via click on the green point.g. e. you get the requested value (picture below).04 . Through click on the right mouse button on this rectangular box. on the Y co-ordinate. in a rectangular box. you first get the point no.g. ........................................11 1.......................14 1............................. 4 Circular Movement .............................................................1 1.........7....................16 1......................................25 14... 8 Change of Probe ........................ 7 1............... 16 Automatic Line Measurement...... 20 Automatic Circle Measurement ....4 1.17 1...............................................2 1......... 15 1........................ 8 Option 1......20 1..8..................................................... 29 1....................1 1..................................................................................................................................6................................... 7 Procedure and Options ...................................................................................... 30 Delete Last Meas........... 7 Procedure............................................................ 6 Manual Measurement Point .............6..................................... Point........7 Error Height................................................ 30 Stop.............................4 1.....04 Element finished .....8......................... 15 1....7....................4 XI-1 .......................................... 18 Automatic Plane Measurement................. 8 1.... 7 Measurement Point: Two Options..................5 1................................ 15 1....................................21.... 3 1.8..........24 1.......10 1.............................. 26 Scanning ..6 Move CMM ............................2 Scanning in the YZ................ 7 Move Clearance Height..22 1........ 8 Co-Ordinate System........................................3 1................................CMM Movement XI CMM Movement Contents 1 CMM Movement ................................................. 4 Drive Manually to Point .................... 12 Direction Entry via Variables ....................................................... 28 1............ 31 v 2....................8......3 1... 8 Measurement Point................................... 23 Automatic Inclined Circle Measurement: Dialogue .....................................................................................1 Scanning of Known Elements .........2 1..........................................13..13...........7........4 1....................9 1..................................3 1..........................................................21........21 Probing of Edge Point ............................................ 14 Measurement Point with Imaginary Point........8 Definition .......................... RZ and Phi Z Planes ... 7 1......................................09............................................................12 1......................18 1.....................15 1............. 13 Groove Point ........... 24 Automatic Cylinder Measurement.....................................2 Procedure.................................................2 1............6...................2 1................................................ 6 Define Clearance Height .........................1 Three Options ..................... 27 1.....................3 1......................................... 3 Move CMM along an Axis...................13 Definition ......................23 1.... 9 Details .................... 21 Automatic Inclined Circle Measurement.............. 9 Option 2..............1 1..................................................1 1..19 1.. 12 Measurement Point with Direction ...................... 30 Turn Rotary Table ......................................... 10 Measurement Point (Laser).............................................................................7........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ZX...... ...4 14.....................04 ........32 1.....CMM Movement 1...........26 1..... 37 Best Fit with a Variable Number of Points ..................................35....................... 34 Positioning Accuracy........3 1....................................... 38 Degrees of Freedom for Best Fit..........4 1................... 35 Best Fit: Definition and Criteria....................... 32 Trigger-Automatic .......... 37 Program Run..................................................................................................................................35.....35..............31 1............2 1.......................................... 39 XI-2 v 2...... 34 Measured Nominal Length ....................................6 1...................................................................1 1.................................................................................30 1..........35.......... 34 Movement Speed.........34 1.......... 36 1............09..........................35 Deflection...................35.....................................27 1............. 32 Measuring Speed.....29 1..........................................35.................................................................36 Calculation of Minimum-/Maximum ................................... 32 Installation of CNC Mode...35...............................28 1...................7 Two Purposes . 39 1...........5 1.................. 34 Safety Distance............... 35 Change CNC Parameters........................................... 37 Best Fit with Fixed Number of Points.................................. 38 Tolerance and MMC for Best Fit ....................... 39 Graphics for Best Fit ...................................33 1...................... then you can use these variables for the input. you see the icon. 14.g.CMM Movement 1 CMM Movement 1.g. it is the position where it goes after power up. If you want to move the machine to a specific position. store Z) in the "Formula Calculation". you can recall the last inputs. these movements can lead to a collision.1 Move CMM Procedure You can either click the icon. at any time. then you get the actual position in the selected mode. because you only want to change one of the values). In both cases you get the dialogue window "Move CMM". Depending on the actual position of the machine. click on the icon. By a click on the arrow on the right end of the input fields. click here and input the co-ordinates of this position. which is located in the tool bar for the machine (left margin) or select via the menu bar "Measurement / Move Machine". On the left side. then the two other axes together. A click on the icon enables you to move the machine according to the actual position. you can click on the corresponding symbol.04 v 2.09. For the in-home movement. Now you can select which Types of Co-ordinate Systems you want to use. The in-home position depends on the construction of the machine.4 XI-3 . If you need the actual position of the machine in your input window (e. the machine moves along the spindle axis first. Furthermore you can define variables (e. There are two methods offered for the "Circular Movement" function. choose in the upper icon bar the symbol "CMM Co-ordinates" and confirm through "Ok". This way. pass through and end point.CMM Movement 1. but shifting to the machine co-ordinate system is possible. Perform the following steps: Ö First determine in the "Circular Movement" window which coordinate mode you want to use.3 Ö Ö Keep the dialogue window "Move Along an Axis". It is also possible. the program supposes moving along an axis in the part co-ordinate system. however. you overwrite the co-ordinate system. If you want to display the data of the point where the probe is now situated.04 . Enable the function via the menu bar "CMM / Move Along Axis".09. This function can be used in the CNC mode only. Method 1 This method (Default Setting) is used to approach three points.4 14. You access the dialogue through the "Menu bar / CMM / Circular Movement". The input is only possible in Cartesian. it is possible to proceed the probe in an axis. and then click OK. XI-4 v 2. Ö In the following dialogue window. Normally. Ö Enter the co-ordinates of start. that you use the CMM symbol to enter the current CMM position.2 Move CMM along an Axis Through this function. click on the symbol. Click on "Co-ordinate System" in the menu bar and in the pull-down menu on "Determine Co-ordinate System". Just enter the value of the target co-ordinate in the axis. Circular Movement The "Circular Movement" function serves the purpose of getting the probe on the quickest way from the start to the end point. Proceed as follows: 1. This "Method 2" is not for use in space.04 v 2. Method 2 This method allows you to determine the movement path by driving plane. This is. start and end angle.09. the CMM with the probe first moves from the current position to the start position.CMM Movement In any case. sense of movement (using the clock symbols clockwise and anticlockwise). 14. of course.4 XI-5 . and centre of circle. YZ and ZX. based on the assumption that you (can) move the probe precisely to the position which is to become the centre of circle. 1 = Start point 2 = Pass through point 3 = End point Movement commands issued by CAT300 as "Circular Movement" within an element measurement cycle will be stored automatically in the part program. For the centre of circle you select (see above) the co-ordinate mode or the CMM's current position. The centre of the circle must be located within the CMM volume. radius. Use this symbol to change to "Method 2". but only in the driving planes XY. 04 .5 The numbers in blue on the left indicate the distances of the nominal positions along the machine axes. If the "Capture range" of the axes has been reached the digits are displayed in green. The window disappears as soon as the numbers for every selected axis are green. In learn mode. 1. and at a CNC-CMM for elements that are measured in manual mode (before the “CNC ON” command). XI-6 v 2.09.CMM Movement The angles refer to the first axis of the base plane. for each element that you record at a manual CMM. It is possible to jam two axes each and to drive in one axis only.4 Drive Manually to Point Drive to a certain position If you wish to measure at a certain position of the part with a manual CMM you can make use of the function "Drive manually to point". This option is available in the Cartesian mode only. Manual Measurement Point You can see the “Manual Measurement Point” function in the part program and in the “CMM” menu of the editor. This means. 1. Display window After confirmation a window indicating the determined coordinates on the right will be displayed. Use this symbol to change to "Method 1". this command is automatically ended.4 14. Make the following entries: Ö Ö the coordinates of the desired position the precision to reach the position (in the "Capture range" text box of the dialogue box). Hint It is possible to reuse the manual measurement point function in an element. For example if you want to realize a change of probe between the measurement points. In the polar mode the influence of the individual axes is extremely high so that it is useless to select a single value. To open the dialogue box choose "Machine / Drive manually to point" from the menu bar. In the Cartesian mode simply click on the icon to determine the axes to be considered. The centre of the circle must be located within the CMM volume. 1 Error Height Definition The error height is meant to be the height that you drive in case of a machine error. this avoids entering intermediate positions between the elements. That is why you must define the error height in a way that the CMM is able to • duly terminate the "Collision Measurement" and • the next part can unobstructedly be driven To ensure this. Then. e.1 Definition The clearance height is a height. This can be useful. 1.7. several error heights can exist.3 Move Clearance Height The clearance height is always automatically driven between two elements. for example in case of a collision at a part. In the following dialog.09.g. This procedure has the same effect as Move CMM in an Axis. for example at a collision. you can call the actual machine position via the symbol.6.6. Thus. 1. for tests. click the symbol (left) to define the clearance height in the text box (right). e.7 1. click on the function “Move Clearance Height” in the “CMM” menu.g.6. 14. which is automatically driven before element measurement. You define the axis in which axis to move via the axis symbols (in the picture it is the X axis) The selected axis is displayed.CMM Movement 1. This function is mostly used in part programs for palette operation or for shifts without any attendance.6 Define Clearance Height 1. the measurement passes on to the next part. But you can also drive the machine to the actual clearance height whenever you want. 1. After each measurement. In these cases. The error height ensures that. be measured without an intermediate position. To get help. a hole mounting pattern can. In opposition with the clearance height.04 v 2. it may be useful to define several clearance heights. In many cases.4 XI-7 . the error heights are driven in opposite to the definition made. the machine returns to clearance height position.2 Procedure Activate "CMM / Clearance Height" via the menu bar. Deactivate the clearance height by clicking once more on the symbol. 1 Measurement Point Measurement Point: Two Options You can make the machine probe a point either by the joystick box. then move the machine to the part. The other way is via the keyboard. 1.4 14. Then you get the corresponding dialog window. You can change the last defined error height.7. You can delete the last defined error height.CMM Movement 1. for this. For security. or via the menu bar "Measurement / Probing Point" as soon as you have activated an element.09. 1.3 Co-Ordinate System During the measuring process different co-ordinate systems are possible. Therefore GEOPAK must know to which co-ordinate system the axis and the error height refer.7. either the icon on the left margin. For a problem free movement it can become useful to change the probe between the error heights. you should reduce the Movement Speed (in the dialog below on the left).8. Normally. You can define the error heights at the symbol.4 Change of Probe You always drive the error height with the actual probe.2 Procedure and Options Activate the function via the "CMM / Error Height“ menu bar. XI-8 v 2. there are two possibilities to define a measurement point. When the error height has been reached the program changes to the probe you have indicated in the dialog.04 . The numbers are automatically counted (upwards) and displayed.8 1. 1. press the "MEAS"-button.7. and the travelling direction.8.09. In addition. the theoretical touch point on the surface of the part is given. 1 = start position 2 = travelling direction 3 = change over point 14. even if you use a probe with a different diameter. Probe centre: Here. the probing direction is also required.04 v 2.2 Option 1 1.3 Option 2 2. This works in nearly all cases. 1 = stylus ball radius 2 = theoretical touch point 3 = travelling direction 4 = safety distance 1. as the probe size is taken into account when measuring.4 XI-9 .CMM Movement 1. Point on the surface: Here. you specify the location of the probe centre a certain distance away from the surface point.8. 04 . or v 2. and Z. GEOPAK always starts with the Cartesian co-ordinate system. Cartesian co-ordinate system Cylindrical co-ordinate system Spherical co-ordinate system After input of the probing point.: X=90° becomes X=270°. select a value out of the list boxes. .g.4 Details Point on the surface: Ö Ö Ö Enter the co-ordinates for the theoretical touching point. or Select the data from the list box. e.4 14.09. GEOPAK needs the direction of probing.8. Y. which appear after a click on the arrow besides the input box. where the last ten inputs are stored and offered to you when clicking on the arrow or take the actual position of the machine by clicking the icon. you can select between three Types of Coordinate Systems . The program knows the Safety Distance and the probe diameter and uses them to calculate the movement. Just click on the icon for the type of co-ordinate system you want.CMM Movement 1. you have two possibilities: I Input of angles. you enter the angles of the probing direction with the axes X. this input is done in the prompt fields besides the symbol Here. 1 = movement speed 2 = measurement speed During the input of the co-ordinates. or Ö click on the icon. this makes the direction of the probing vector pointing into the opposite direction. For this. The angles can be input through one of the following three methods: XI-10 Ö Ö key the values in. gives the direction. above). this position means the co-ordinates in the part co-ordinate system. If you select the input by target. 14.04 v 2. Note A click on the icon shows the actual position of the probe. For the input of the targets. which can even be situated in the part. the icons and the corresponding input fields are inactive. Laser probe For working with a laser probe. and it is immediately transformed to the selected co-ordinate system type. you can also select one of the three Types of Coordinate Systems (cf.4 XI-11 . you do not input the theoretical touch point.09.CMM Movement II Input of a Target: Here. you can also select the Types of Co-ordinate Systems (cf. a target point. but the point in front of the material where the machine switches from movement speed into measurement speed. above). Centre of Probe: In this case. refer to the topic Measurement Point (Laser). For the input of this point. 1 = measurement point 2 = imaginary point The co-ordinates of the target are entered in the lower input boxes. It is not necessary that the probe can reach the target. this target is only taken to calculate the direction. When working with a laser probe. select the data which has been recorded here over the last ten measurements. To switch between the surface and the edge mode. You come to the corresponding dialogue window. you do not have a theoretic workpiece.4 14. Measurement point with direction: At this procedure. a change between a surface and an edge measurement must in any case be announced to the machine control before starting a new measurement. or select the data of position of machine via the symbol v 2. proceed as described by the topic Measurement Point. this dialogue is extended by the functions "Surface mode" or "Edge mode" respectively. 1. refer to the topic group Laser Probe "WIZprobe" . you have three options (see details of topic Measurement Point ). or From the list boxes. You can also use a joystick for probing. However. use the tool bar (see ill. For detailed information about measuring with a laser probe.09. One of the possibilities is the following. You can also click on the symbol in the tools for machine.10 Measurement Point with Direction Define the measurement point (probing point) via the menu bar "Measurement" and the "Measurement Point (Probing Point)" function. For point measurement. XI-12 Enter the data for a centre of probe with direction in the upper three input fields.9 Measurement Point (Laser) For the topic "Measurement point (probing point)" you must always differentiate between point measurement and scanning measurement. In order to determine the measurement point.CMM Movement 1.04 . Select a centre of probe with direction in which the probe must move. below). 4 XI-13 . or Select a value from the pull-down list fields. Cartesian Co-ordinate System Cylinder Co-ordinate System Sphere Co-ordinate System You still must enter the direction in which the system of probe has to move.CMM Movement 1 = start position 2 = movement direction 3 = centre of probe with direction You can choose one of three Types of Co-ordinate Systems hereafter.11 Direction Entry via Variables Apart from the possibility to enter fixed angles or components of the direction vector.09. In this case please observe that all components of the direction value are defined via variables and the sum of the squared components is 1. you can also enter values via variables. Here. Y or Z components if you want probing into the opposite direction. You have three possibilities: Enter the values you want. 14. Y and Z.04 v 2. you determine the angle of the probing direction to the axes X. You can do that in the input fields beside the symbols. or Click on the symbols and change the direction vectors of the X. 1. Example: X=0° is becoming X=180°. 4 14. the topic Measurement Point with Direction XI-14 v 2.g. It is always the centre of probe that is output. Click on the icon on the left in the following dialogue.CMM Movement 1. you can drive with a scanning probe e.04 . which records a measurement point at the first contact with the part. You get this function via the "Menu Bar / CMM / Measurement Point (Probing Point)".12 Groove Point Differently from the touch trigger system. Cf.09. in a vformed slot so that the ball is fitting at the same time to the two flanks (see pictures below). Start of probing Contact and change of direction Groove point The probing must always be vertically realized to the Z-axis. or Ö Choose data from the list fields which have been recorded over the last ten measurements or Ö Ö Choose data of position of machine (symbol). Enter the data for the imaginary point in the lower three input fields. Normally.04 v 2.09. In order to determine the measurement point. you measure the origin of the element. You obtain the corresponding dialogue window.CMM Movement 1.13. the symbols (direction vectors) are inactive. Even now. you have three options (refer to detailed information Measurement Point).13. 1. 1 = Measurement Point 2 = Imaginative Point 1.4 XI-15 .1 Three Options Measurement point with imaginary point: When proceeding this way. Cartesian Co-ordinate System Cylinder Co-ordinate System 14. you see the co-ordinate initials X. In the basic configuration. You also can click on the symbol in the tools for machine.2 Procedure Ö Enter the data for a centre of probe with direction in the upper three input fields.13 Measurement Point with Imaginary Point You determine the measurement point (probing point) via the menu bar "CMM" and the function "Measurement Point (Probing Point)". you can select one of the three Types of Co-Ordinate Systems . Y and Z. When applying this procedure. One of the three possibilities is the following. you determine the direction by means of a centre of probe with direction and an imaginary point. You will use this option when you intend to change only one co-ordinate. Near the edge point on the sheet. In the CMM pull-down menu. one or several probing processes will be executed.14 Probing of Edge Point If you want to probe an edge point at a thin sheet. 2 = Measurement Deepness. In this case the co-ordinates of the start position for travelling to the imaginary destination are taken over. 3 = Edge Point Probing Direction Representation for the "1 Surface Point" Option 1 = Distance Edge/Surface Point.09.CMM Movement Sphere Co-ordinate System Start position as a proposal You can also select the start position that you have already entered by clicking on the symbol. 1. GEOPAK calculates the probing direction from the difference of the co-ordinates. As. you can realize this in GEOPAK with a special probing strategy. however. Representation for all Options of the Edge Measurement 1 = Edge point. It is possible to independently adapt the safety distance from the general setting. click on the "Edge Measurement" function. at least one co-ordinate needs to be changed. separately according to your required edge and surface point(s). for example.04 .4 14. 2 = Surface Point Probing Direction XI-16 v 2. The height of the real edge probing will be calculated out of these preceding probing processes (surface points). This strategy can also be applied if the sheet you want to measure is bent compared with the model or the learnt part. The following dialogue is divided in "Edge Point" and "Surface Point". Ö Ö Select the element "Point". the height will be adjusted. Representation from top 1 Surface Point Red Point = Preceding Probing Point 2 Surface Point 1 = Distance Edge/Surface Point.CMM Movement At the “1 Surface Point” option. also a lateral bending of the sheet will be compensated. 2 = Min. not only the height but also the direction of the edge probing will be adjusted.04 v 2.4 XI-17 . 3 Surface Point 1 = Distance Edge/Surface Point. 2 = Min. 14. Edge Distance If there are three surface points.09. Edge Distance If there exist two surface points. 15 Automatic Line Measurement To open the dialogue box click on this icon in the "Element Line" dialogue box or choose "Machine / Autom.CMM Movement 1. XI-18 v 2. element measurement / Line" from the menu bar or click on this icon in the tool bar on the left margin of the GEOPAK main window.e. Start point In the "Automatic line measurement" dialogue box enter the coordinates of the start point (depends on the type of coordinate system).09. if you enter an angle of 0 or 180 degrees you will achieve the opposite measuring direction (see following picture). i. Angle This is the angle between the line in measuring direction and the first axis of the direction plane.4 14.04 . 04 v 2.09. See also information on the subject "Scanning of Known Elements ".CMM Movement Probing Choose the "Probing" icons if you wish to probe in the driving plane along the driving direction to the right or to the left. 14. On the right side of the dialogue box the selected probing mode will be displayed (see example in the picture below). See also "Filter Contour".4 XI-19 . you should input. the driving strategy is the same as in the automatic circle measurement. XI-20 v 2.09. It depends essentially on the number of meas. a slot width (see symbol). you should activate this (see symbol) if you measure the base of a circumferential groove. The probing is done vertically to the driving plane. If you can move from a meas. With the symbols. See also information on the subject "Scanning of Known Elements ". points and the slot width. out of the actual ball diameter and out of the safety distance.4 14. in case of a circumferential groove. this means out of this slot width.CMM Movement 1. Circular If you can make a rotation with your CMM. or via the symbol out of the "Element Plane" dialogue. or via the menu bar "CMM / Autom. The number of the calculated intermediate positions is always the smallest possible. Slot Width If your CMM is not able to make a rotation. point to the next one without a collision. you determine whether you probe by moving up or down (in positive or negative plane direction). GEOPAK then calculates the driving ways between the probing positions. You get the function via the symbol in the CMM tools. You avoid intermediate positions that would be necessary if you would drive on straight lines.16 Automatic Plane Measurement At the automatic plane measurement. Element Measurement / Plane". This slot width indicates how much place is available for moving around. the straight way is the fastest and shortest.04 . That means the measurement points will be distributed on a circle. this means out of this slot width. This way. the straight way is the fastest and shortest. This slot width indicates how much place is available for moving around. You get the function via the symbol in the CMM tools. Circular If it is possible with your CMM to make a rotation.CMM Movement 1. Slot Width If your CMM is not able to make a rotation. If you have input the thread pitch. The option "In Clockwise Direction or Anticlockwise" is only relevant if you only measure the part of a circle. As part measurement. you can use the "Automatic Circle Measurement" also for a cylinder. Input the circle parameter that means the nominal diameter for the diameter. click on the symbol and input the thread pitch. Thread Pitch If you want to measure the position of a thread hole. It essentially depends on the number of meas. the CMM will drive on the same height. If the symbol is not activated. a slot width.04 v 2. The ball diameter and safety distance are automatically calculated by GEOPAK. or via the symbol out of the "Element Circle" dialogue. a good position determination is possible. Element Measurement / Circle". GEOPAK then calculates the driving ways between the probing positions. a cone or a sphere. points and the slot width. The number of the calculated intermediate positions is always the smallest possible. the probing always takes place under the same conditions. in case of an outer circle. At an inner circle (bore hole). you should input. you should activate this (see symbol) if you measure an outer circle (bolt). out of the actual ball diameter and out of the safety distance.09.4 XI-21 . 14. You avoid intermediate positions that would be necessary if you would drive on straight lines.17 Automatic Circle Measurement You can use the "Automatic Circle Measurement" if you measure a circle or an ellipse. or via the menu bar "CMM / Autom. That would falsify the position (see pictures below). See also "Filter Contour".CMM Movement Without thread pitch With thread pitch See also information on the subject "Scanning of Known Elements ".04 .09. XI-22 v 2.4 14. In particular.4 XI-23 . Graphical presentation The illustration below (lateral cross-section) gives you an overview of the graphical presentation of the surface and circle measurement. a: Circle diameter b: Circle centre c: Approach height d: Approach depth e: Edge distance f: Surface normal g: Diameter for surface measurement h: Safety distance For how to proceed further. Furthermore it is easier to distribute the measurement points on the circle more evenly. Circle measurement at positions 4 and 5. find detailed information in Automatic Inclined Circle Measurement: Dialogue . the surface measurement is finished.09. easier to change and learn.18 Automatic Inclined Circle Measurement With this function and the relevant dialogues we provide you with the advantages of the Automatic Circle Measurement also for the measurement of inclined circles: The part program is shorter. Position 3: Start into the hole. At position 2. you can use this function to measure the surface and within the surface the inclined circle with only one part program command. The numbers 1 to 6 show the sequence of actions. Position 6: From here you can move to clearance height.04 v 2. 14.CMM Movement 1. CMM Movement 1.19 Automatic Inclined Circle Measurement: Dialogue Surface and Circle In our example for the topic Automatic Inclined Circle Measurement we assume that both surface and circle are measured. You have taken this decision already in the dialogue "Element inclined circle" (Menu bar/elements/inclined circle) using the symbols for "Measurement" and "Automatic measurement" (see above). In the following dialogue (excerpt in ill. below), you perform the settings that are already known to you from the automatic circle measurement. Additionally required are details about approach height and approach depth. Inner and outer circle As opposed to the automatic circle measurement, you must use vectors in this dialogue to define the starting position of the circle measurement on the surface. The origin for this vector is the circle centre. With the end angle you define where the last measurement point is taken (end angle 0 = end angle 360 degrees). These data are not required for the inner full circle. Edge distance and plane vector For the plane measurement you additionally require the distance to the edge and the vector for the angularity of the plane (see dialogue excerpt below). This vector is perpendicular to the plane. XI-24 v 2.4 14.09.04 CMM Movement Further elements possible The option buttons in this dialogue (dialogue excerpt below) are deactivated in learn mode. In the edit mode you must decide between: Not connected with a plane Select this option when measuring anything other than an inclined circle (e.g. cylinder, sphere, cone). Plane still to be measured (see above under "Plane and circle"). Plane is complete. In this case, a plane exists and only the circle must be measured. Hint When editing a part program, it may become necessary to change one of these options, e.g. switching from "Plane is complete" to "Plane still to be measured". 14.09.04 v 2.4 XI-25 CMM Movement 1.20 Automatic Cylinder Measurement You get the function via the symbol in the CMM tools, or via the menu bar "CMM / Automatic Cylinder Measurement / Cylinder ", or via the symbol out of the "Element Cylinder " dialogue. For the automatic cylinder measurement, GEOPAK presets the following strategy: Measurement is made - parallel to the driving plane – of the circles you preset by the "Number of Steps" (minimum 2). If you want to determine the number of points for each single circle, you must divide the total number of points (see in the dialogue window leftover) through the "Number of Steps". The measurement of the cylinder begins on the height of the coordinate (first step) you entered. The last step will be measured by the variation in elevation higher or deeper. If higher or deeper will be indicated by the driving direction. Since the direction of axis of the cylinder always corresponds to the direction of the first up to the last meas. point, you also determine the direction of axis of the cylinder through this driving direction. If this given probing strategy is not sufficient, don’t use the "Automatic Cylinder Measurement" function but rather use for example the "Automatic Circle or Line Measurement". Problem The driving strategy in GEOPAK differs from that in GEOPAK-3 to the extent that the last position is situated at another place. This can lead to – with GEOPAK-3 part programs converted to GEOPAK - a collision of the following driving command. Problem Solving You can select a GEOPAK-3 compatible driving strategy by activating the symbol in the dialogue. You activate the symbol via the "PartManager / Settings / Defaults for Programs / CMM / GEOPAK / Dialogues" and to the end the "Display Button for GEOPAK-3" function. See also information on the subject "Scanning of Known Elements ". XI-26 v 2.4 14.09.04 CMM Movement 1.21 Scanning For the scanning, you have further options via the menus "Measurement Point: Two Possibilities“ and "Measurement Point with Direction". Meantime, you should be sufficiently familiarized with these two topics. Open or closed For scanning, it is important if you have an open or closed contour. If the contour is closed, click the symbol. Then, scanning is terminated as soon as the CMM has reached the starting point. With an open contour, deactivate the symbol and determine via the target point the zone you want to record. In this case, you have multiple possibilities to finish a scanning (the following example with a scanning in the X/Y plane. Ö Enter the X as well as the Y values of the target point. The scanning is only terminated if the X as well as the Y co-ordinates have been reached. Ö Enter the X value and activate the symbol "Ignore Second Axis". The scanning is terminated as soon as the value of the X coordinate has been reached. Ö Enter the Y value and activate the symbol "Ignore First Axis". The scanning is terminated as soon as the Y co-ordinate has been reached independently from the X value. If you want get information about scanning in the YZ, ZX, RZ and Phi Z planes, click the symbol on the left. It is also important to know if you operate with a measuring or a switching probe system. If you work with a measuring probe system, you must input the scanning speed (1-20 mm/sec) and the Deflection of the probe. 14.09.04 v 2.4 XI-27 CMM Movement 1.21.1 Scanning of Known Elements Scanning with a "Measuring Probe" is possible for the four elements Line, Circle, Cylinder and Plane. Provided your CMM has a controller capable of measuring known elements, it is possible to perform measurement at a scanning speed of up to 100mm/sec. Known elements are elements that you can find in your drawings by their properties (diameter, position etc.). On principle, the scanning of the above mentioned elements is subject to the same conditions as described in the following chapters Automatic Line Measurement , Automatic Circle Measurement , Automatic Cylinder Measurement , Automatic Plane Measurement . Click on the scan symbol in the respective "Automatic Element Measurement" dialogues. Enter the scanning speed in the adjacent text box. For the optimum scanning speed refer to your records regarding the probing system and the CMM. In order to obtain an optimum result, enter a minimum of 50 points into the text box designated "Number of Points". Scanning of cylinders For the scanning of cylinder it is assumed that you know that only solid cylinders can be measured. Provided your controller has the "Scanning of Known Elements" option, measurement will take place in spiral form. Otherwise, superimposed circles will be measured. XI-28 v 2.4 14.09.04 CMM Movement 1.21.2 Scanning in the YZ, ZX, RZ and Phi Z Planes If you scan with an open contour in the other planes and want to "Ignore Axis" (see details of topic "Scanning" for the target point, you should respect the following axis co-ordinations: 1st axis 2nd axis YZ Y Z ZX Z X RZ R Z Phi Z Phi Z You select the RZ scanning if you work with rotating and symmetrical profiles. This can be, e.g. bottles or mouthpieces of trumpets. The driving plane is determined through the Z axis and the starting point (picture below). You decide for Phi Z scanning if you move a circle on the one hand, but at the same time must record different heights (see picture below). The circle is lies symmetrically around the Z axis. The radius is indicated through the starting point. 14.09.04 v 2.4 XI-29 CMM Movement 1.22 Element finished With this function (menu bar "CMM / Element Finished"), you tell GEOPAK that the actual element is finished and no other measurement points are expected. At this moment, the calculation of the elements will be realized. If, after calculation, you notice that the element had incorrect points or if you still want to measure other points, you can delete the command via the symbol. Then, you automatically return to the element measurement. If you know in advance how many points you want to measure, you can already activate this in the element dialogue with the "Aut. Element Finished" symbol. This way, after having reached the number of points to be measured, the measurement is terminated and the calculation is automatically executed. 1.23 Delete Last Meas. Point With this function, you can delete the respective last measured point in single/learn mode as well as in repeat mode. This can only be done if the CNC mode is deactivated. You can start this function via the symbol or the menu bar "CMM / Delete Last Measured Point". 1.24 Stop Via this function that you can activate either via the symbol or the menu bar "CMM / Stop", it is possible to stop the CMM in case of a crash. This is the same function that you have on your joystick ("R.STOP"). XI-30 v 2.4 14.09.04 CMM Movement 1.25 Turn Rotary Table In case you have a rotary table, the corresponding dialogue gives you several possibilities. You access the dialogue through the "Menu bar / CMM/ Turn Rotary Table". It is your decision to choose either an absolute angle of rotation, or a relative angle of rotation. Click on the symbol "Absolute Rotary Angle" and enter into the text box below an angle the table rotates to. Using the hand symbols you determine the sense of rotation. Click on the symbol "Relative Rotary Angle" and enter into the text box below an angle by which the table is to rotate. Entering a positive angle causes the table to go round clockwise, entering a negative angle causes it to go anticlockwise. In any case, when the table rotates watch whether there are workpieces on the table and where precisely they are located.. For measurement the symbol "Co-Ordinate System" should always be activated (depressed) in order to make sure that the co-ordinate system of the workpiece automatically rotates, as well. This function is usually not switched off unless the rotary table is set up. Manual mode using the joystick box Mitutoyo rotary tables can also be turned manually using the joystick box. The controller transmits the end position to GEOPAK. In the learn mode this table rotation is stored in the part program as "Turn Rotary Table Absolute". The controller does, however, not transmit the sense of rotation. Therefore GEOPAK determines the shortest travel. In cases where this method should not practicable (due to fouling conditions with the workpiece), the rotary table has to be turned under software control. See also information on the subject "Scanning with the Rotary Table:Introduction". 14.09.04 v 2.4 XI-31 This is why every second signal is ignored. Feature for SP 600 When you have swivelled the SP 600. Here. Here. Enter values If you want to enter values for the single positions. For exact measurement it is important that the measurement recording is always realized in the same direction (clear .dark or dark -clear). 1. click on the CMM symbol. On principle is valid: The deflection must be the same as the probe calibrated one. Characteristic features XI-32 v 2. depending on the connected probe system. By this means. you can change all settings at the same time.09.04 .25 and 1 mm. For CNC mode you need information to the following items (also see the dialog window): Movement Speed Measuring Speed Safety Distance In the following dialogue window. This function is only activated if you have input it into the INI. The control minds that the deflection does. a deflection between 0. not go beyond the limits of the defined values in a dialog. at each point of the part. is possible. the measuring probe works with a so-called deflection. a better deflection corresponds to a better probing of the part.4 14. we have a "Pre-Guiding".28 Installation of CNC Mode You have determined the probe and the co-ordinate system.CMM Movement 1.file. you are prompted to input the required values for the measurement task. this is influencing the own weight of the probe pin so that going backwards to 0 is not possible any more. Via the menu bar "Measurement" and the function "CNC Parameters and CNC Enabled". you come to the corresponding dialog window.26 Deflection To be sure having a contact with the workpiece. As for a spring. Enable / disable the trigger automatic by clicking on the symbol in the “CMM” menu. the maximum deflection is reduced. Notice According to the actual status of development.27 Trigger-Automatic You use the trigger automatic with optical systems that give a signal when running over a border. 1. In repeat mode. Continue with values But if you want to continue single parameters.. you have two specific values. the part program is stored according to your specification. If you confirm your inputs... length of a CMM’s moving speed to probe a part. In addition to "CNC Parameters. the status of operation. next to the symbol for the CMM. accuracy.CMM Movement For the movement and the measurement speed.4 XI-33 . CNC mode is enabled. the CMM continues to the next position. The "CNC Parameters" dialog window compared with the "CNC Parameters and CNC ON" dialog window is extended by two parameters: Measuring Length The measuring length is the max. you also find the "CNC Parameter" functions. 14. you can change one or several parameters in the actual program. and CNC ON". In the status line of the GEOPAK main window you see. Positioning Accuracy The positioning accuracy describes the distance between probe and intermediate position.09.04 v 2. you should select the default setting. You can select between the max. The default value for the measurement speed (probing speed) is the value able to realize the max. • Green: CNC-mode off • Yellow: CNC-mode on Further Options We inform you about further options for the CNC mode with the following terms "Clearance Height" and "Error Height".. click on the symbol. If your part program is determined to function on different CMMs with different properties. you can read in the headline of this dialog window ". value or the default. With this dialog. In the pull-down menu "Machine". If the probe came to the intermediate position with this distance.". CMM Movement 1. On principle is valid: The lower is the measuring speed. You have to pay special attention to new machines with a movement speed between 600 and 1000 mm/sec. But. The optimal speed is 3 mm/sec. 1.31 Safety Distance The safety distance is the distance between the theoretical probe point on the surface of the piece and the point where the CMM changes from movement speed to measurement speed. You can avoid this by entering a determined measured nominal length.04 . If the measurement points are directly probed (Scanning. you risk collisions if the contour shows and distinct irregularities. Normally. the more exact is the measurement.4 14. This avoids that wrong measurement results are possible. otherwise the probe can be damaged.29 Measuring Speed The measuring speed is the speed with which the CMM is moving to probe the part. steady measurement could unnecessarily prolong the measurement time. if you work with a heavy probing system it may happen that you must reduce the speed.) and you have a too small safety distance. Example: The parts to be measured are located on a palette. The "Minimal" or "Maximal Measuring Speed" depends on the CMM and the probing system. the CMM would measure the next part on the palette and you would get wrong measurement results. XI-34 v 2. Yet.32 Measured Nominal Length The measured nominal length is the maximal length of a CMM moving in measurement speed in order to probe a part. These movement speeds require a much higher braking distance. the co-ordinate measuring machine (CMM) moves between the measurement points. If there are missing one or more parts. 1. the movement speed is specified. 1.30 Movement Speed With the movement speed.09. For an optimal measurement speed respecting both "Accuracy " and "Measurement Time" refer to documentation of CMM. 34 Change CNC Parameters In case you want to change. 14. during CNC run. the parameters e.04 v 2. you should select the default setting. You can select between the max. accuracy. If your part program will be determined to function on different CMMs with different properties. Characteristic features For the movement and the measurement speed. It defines the point of movement of the machine where the controller considers the target as "reached" and starts moving towards the next target. you can change all settings at the same time.09.4 XI-35 . you have two specific values. The value is used in all cases when there are subsequent movements of the machine. value or the default. the part program executes faster than with a small value. measurement speed or movement speed. 1. In the following dialogue window. 1 = destination A 2 = intermediate position B 3 = destination C 4 = positioning accuracy 5 = work piece You should know: If you select a high value.CMM Movement 1. It does not affect the accuracy of the measurement. click on this function (menu bar "CMM / CNC Parameters").g.33 Positioning Accuracy The positioning accuracy is used when there are several movement commands in the buffer of the machine. The default value for the measurement speed (probing speed) is the value able to realize the max. Enter values If you want to enter values for the single positions. click on the CMM symbol. and then they are squared and summed up.4 14. The best fit is based on the analogy of the Gauss criterion. These specified co-ordinates are nominal values. This criterion requires that the sum of the squares distances is small. the status of operation. This means that the distances of the actual values are calculated from their corresponding nominal values.04 . the CMM continues to the next position.CMM Movement Continue with values But if you want to continue with single parameters. For a best fit. length of a CMM’s measurement speed to probe a part. Notice You can access the results of best fit (rotation and movement) as described in formula calculation under the topic "Table of Operands". The "best" fit can be reached. Positioning Distance The positioning distance describes the distance between probe and intermediate position. next to the symbol for the CMM. 1. Always one actual and one nominal value build a couple of points. click on the symbol. if the sum is minute. a group of co-ordinate values (points) is rotated and shifted in a way that it suits "best" into another group of specified co-ordinates. XI-36 v 2. you need at least two couples of points.35 Best Fit: Definition and Criteria At best fit. If the probe came to the intermediate position with this distance. the others are designated as "Real Value" or "Actual Values". Enter two further Parameters The "CNC-Parameter" dialogue window has been upgraded with two further parameters compared with the "CNC Parameters and CNC on" Measuring Length The measurement length is the max. In the status line of the GEOPAK main window (bottom left) you see. Green: CNC mode off Yellow: CNC mode on Further Options We inform you about further options for the CNC mode with the following terms "Clearance Height" and "Safety Plane".09. 4 XI-37 . In the pull-down menu. you disable the element symbols above the element list.2 Program Run The process is different according to whether you have a fixed number of actual points (see "Best Fit with Fixed Number of Points" to which are assigned nominal values or whether the number of the couple of points is variable (see "Best Fit with Variable Number of Points"). Ö Confirm with "OK" and come to the "Best Fit Elements" window of the elements you have measured.1 Two Purposes A best fit can do duty for two different purposes: for evaluation if an alignment of points are together within a tolerance (see also "Tolerance and MMB at Best Fit". 1. If you have. you can remove it again with the symbol.CMM Movement 1.35. the others are filtered. activate the "Single Selection-Criterion" and select the degrees of freedom (see "Degrees of Freedom for Best Fit"). The element and the nominal value are indicated in the window "Best Fit Elements". Immediately after your "OK" the calculation is realized.04 v 2.3 Best Fit with Fixed Number of Points Program Run: Ö Ö Ö You measure the elements representing their actual values. GEOPAK prompts you under "co-ordinates" to input the nominal values for the element. The element you have selected is transferred to the window "Expected Values" which only contains the selected elements.35. "Graphic at Best Fit"). In the "Best Fit" window. To do so.35. and in the protocol there are data about how much mm you have moved respectively rotated your elements. 14. you select "Co-Ordinate System / Best Fit". You only display the type you need. by mistake. transferred an element into the "Selection" window. When the element is transferred. These elements have a fixed point. Notice Even if you have measured lots of elements you can make a clear and short element list for selection. or You can determine a co-ordinate system (see "Create Co-Ordinate System with Best Fit "). 1.09. Ö In this window you select an element and press the symbol. the actual and nominal values can be moved and rotated as you like it. • • select the first nominal and respectively actual element as well as the number of your couples of points. you optionally can only rotate or shift (see "Only Rotate" or " Only Shift "). you get the best result.4 Best Fit with a Variable Number of Points With a variable number of couples of points it is not possible to enter the nominal values before. In this case. the nominal values are not entered for each element but the allocation is realized via other elements that are input as "Theoretical Elements". if for example a movement is only possible in one direction or if a rotation can only be carried out around one determined axis. These theoretical elements must have sequenced storage numbers and must be of the same type. If there is no input.CMM Movement 1. Program Run Ö You define the theoretical elements to which you have assigned nominal values. is displayed.4 14. Details With the buttons below this selection you can modify once again the degrees of freedom. With "OK". Thus.35. a selection window in which you can In the "Best Fit" window.5 Degrees of Freedom for Best Fit Definition Generally. 1. Example: A sub-program for rims with 4 or 5 fixing holes. In some cases. Ö Ö You select in the pull-down menu “Co-ordinate System / Best Fit ". rotation is effected around the origin of the actual co-ordinate system. For the remaining preference possibilities refer to "Degrees of Freedom for Best Fit". Thus. you can also enter the rotation point around which rotation shall be realized. Now. The selection in the top row facilitates the input. Ö You measure the actual elements in the same order and completely store them. you start the calculation and the result is recorded. If only one rotation is allowed.09. activate the "Group Selection". XI-38 v 2. activate the "Rotate & Shift" function.35.04 . To do so. Only for single selection In case that not points. Ö Activate the function via the menu bar "Calculation / Minimum <-> Maximum". a graphical comparison can be activated by the symbol.6 Tolerance and MMC for Best Fit For a judgement "OK / NOK" a tolerance is necessary. you can either input or automatically set the scale factor. If an actual value is further away from its nominal than twice the tolerance.35. Only an arrow shows the direction where the actual value lies. Then the individual tolerance limits are expanded by the difference to the maximum material size. In the graphics. You have two possibilities: Single. Ö You can access these values in the formula calculation (see details in topic "System Variable in Formula Calculation"). You can input this tolerance in the first window "Best fit". which is: The smallest allowable size of a hole. you can calculate all defined element features with this function. for example to determine from a number of circles the biggest or the smallest diameter. This is to avoid long lines crossing the whole of the drawing.09. 1.7 Graphics for Best Fit For an evaluation of the result of the best fit calculation.35. it is also possible to apply the MMC. Ö After termination of the calculations you have different values at your disposal. it is not displayed. 1. In the window for the nominal values you must additionally input the maximum material size of the diameter. You inform the program about this by clicking the check box "MMC". The largest allowable size of a boss. but circles are taken for the best fit calculation.04 v 2.CMM Movement 1.4 XI-39 . you can see the nominal points and the actual points.or Group Selection. This function allows. if allowed. either before or after the calculation.36 Calculation of Minimum-/Maximum On principle. The position of the single actual values is checked after the best fit against this tolerance limit. The tolerance for each position is also displayed. 14. The distances between the nominal and actual positions are enlarged. . ..................................... 2 2 Delivery ...........................................................2 Minimum Configuration .................................................. 3 2................................................. 4 Required Knowledge ........................ 4 3..................................................................................................................................... 6 14........................................04 v 2............................................ 4 4 Support and Service...2 3 Form and Scope....................................... 3 Installation.......................1 3..................... 5 5 Hotline ........................ 3 Prerequisites..........................................................Further Options XII Appendix Contents 1 Further Options .......09...4 XII-1 ...........................1 2. 09. DXF and IGES. Communication with other control systems is ensured by our "IOConditions".g. as such.Further Options 1 Further Options A series of further options add to the capabilities offered by GEOPAK. e. The PartManager offers another series of options for GEOPAK: • • • There are. the Manager Programs capable of combining several part programs to one Manager Program. It is also possible to output the value of a variable or the contents of a text variable. The scope of delivery comprises: • • XII-2 A part program converter from GEOPAK-3 (DOS) to GEOPAK A port to import external part programs in the GEOPAK-ASCII format Another function allows an output of the measured elements in the formats DMIS. Also the Q-PAK dialogue shows the pictures of those workpieces which were entered by the user already in the PartManager. Q-PAK causes part programs to be executed automatically in a wait loop. A virtual machine supports you in machine-remote programming. You have alignment programs for probe changing systems The external program call-up is programmable and. v 2. Use the "string coding" function to insert all sorts of information of a part program into a text line.04 . A graphic user prompting system supports the user. The Remote-Manager enables part programs to be started under remote control via a file-supported port in GEOPAK. can be integrated with the part program.4 14. that is from other computers within a network.. 09. GEOPAK is available in most of the European languages and also in some Asian languages as well. the PartManager is always comprised with our delivery. 14.Delivery 2 Delivery 2.-protected by means of a so-called "Dongle". The program is copy.2 Installation GEOPAK uses the Mitutoyo Installation Program (picture below) for its installation. action orientated dialogues.04 v 2. 2. The user will be guided through the complete installation by clear.4 XII-3 . Being the basis of the MCOSMOS system and responsible for the part management. GEOPAK is supplied on CD-ROM. which enable the user to carry out the installation by himself.1 Form and Scope The GEOPAK program is executable under the Windows 2000 / XP operating systems. Online Help and User's Manual are part of our delivery. 2 Required Knowledge The user of GEOPAK should have basic knowledge of geometry.09. provided that the CAD models do not exceed the free main memory capacity. recommended 2 GHz). In connection with 3D-TOL.1 Prerequisites Minimum Configuration The requirement for running GEOPAK is an IBM-compatible PC with minimum Pentium 4 processor (min. Sufficient memory is an essential prerequisite for flawless running of the measuring programs. The graphics card must be unlimited open-GL-capable and must have a minimum of 128 MB capacity (recommended 256 MB). 1. XII-4 v 2.04 .Prerequisites 3 3.4 14. 1 GHz. 3. basic knowledge of form and position tolerances as well as basic PC-knowledge (able to use Windows).5 MHZ (recommended 3 MHZ) and 512 MB main memory are required. The program requires a minimum of 256 MB RAM and 30 GB HD memory capacity (not including the capacity requirements for the temporary files and part program files). we support 3D-TOL-users with a hotline service (see chapter 12: Hotline). We reserve the right to changes in the course of the technological progress.Support and Service 4 Support and Service Maintenance is performed by way of software updates to adapt to new requirements.41469 Neuss Phone: 0 21 37 / 1 02-0 Fax: 0 21 37 / 86 85 E-Mail: MitutoyoGmbH@mitutoyo. For application problems. Being a leading supplier. highly qualified Mitutoyo experts offer training courses for customers. please first visit our homepage: www. The statements in this description are not binding.de. Mitutoyo is of course represented on all relevant trade fairs.10 D .mitutoyo. September 2004 Mitutoyo Messgeräte GmbH Borsigstr. Furthermore. Copyright Mitutoyo Messgeräte GmbH (all rights reserved).mitutoyo-ctl.4 XII-5 .04 v 2. Neuss. For information about our hardware products.09. please visit our CTL homepage: www. 8 . For information about other software products.de.de 14. The program itself and this product information are protected by copyright and may neither in part nor in whole be copied and/or distributed. m. your call will be directed to Neuss.m. Your call is directed to a branch office located in your vicinity.00 a. 01805 / 102-333 is the number for our hardware service (0. If the number there is engaged. XII-6 v 2. you will be connected with Neuss or Leonberg.04 .Hotline 5 Hotline Should you have any topical questions in spite of the documentation provided by us.30 a..m.09. you are kindly requested to contact us at the following telephone numbers. and on Saturdays from 8. to 2. At the number 01805 / 102-343 (0.00 p.m.4 14. There is an info voice installed for each branch office. Depending on whether you ring us from Northern or Southern Germany. to 8. You can reach us on the phone on weekdays from 7.12 €/min).12 €/min) you reach our software experts.00 p.